JP2020036765A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of improving amusement of games.SOLUTION: A game area 32 includes a game area on one side (game area on the left side) and a game area on the other side (game area on the right side), and enables a selection as to where a game ball is to be flowed down either in the game area on the one side or in the game area on the other side by a player's adjustment of shooting force of the game ball. In the game area on the one side, a first start winning port 36 is provided which serves as a start winning port and in the game area on the other side, a normal variation winning device 37 is provided which serves as a start winning port and which can be converted into a closed state where a game ball cannot make a winning and an open state where a game ball can easily make a winning. Further, in the game area on the other side and on the downstream side of the normal variation winning device 37, a second start winning port 97 which serves as a start winning port is provided. Game control means (a game control device) performs a first game (a special symbol 1 variable display game) based on the winning of a game ball to the first start winning port, and performs a second game (a special symbol 2 variable display game) based on the winning of a game ball to the second start winning port 97 or the normal variation winning device 37.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 106

Description

  The present invention includes a game area in which a game ball can flow down, and executes a game based on a prize of a game ball to a starting winning opening provided in the game area, and when a result of the game is a special result. And a gaming machine that generates a special gaming state advantageous to a player.

  Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In this pachinko machine, a plurality of pieces of identification information (symbols, symbols, etc.) displayed on the variable display device provided in the game area based on the fact that a game ball wins at the start port provided in the game area (start winning). ) Is started, and when the mode of the plurality of pieces of identification information stopped after the elapse of a predetermined time is a predetermined special result mode, a special payout of paying out many prize balls to the player is performed. Some are in a gaming state. There is also known such a gaming machine provided with a normal variable winning device that changes the ease of winning at the starting port by changing the operation mode of the movable member (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP 2017-121302 A

  However, merely changing whether or not a prize can be won in the normal variable prize winning device depending on the operating state of the movable member is common, and does not contribute to the improvement of interest. An object of the present invention is to improve the interest of a game.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention described in claim 1 is
A game area is provided in which a game ball can flow down, and a game is executed based on a prize of a game ball to a start winning port provided in the game area, and when a result of the game is a special result, In gaming machines that generate advantageous special gaming states,
Game control means for controlling the game overall,
The game area,
It is provided with a game area on one side and a game area on the other side, and the player adjusts the firing force of the game ball to allow the game ball to flow down to one of the one game area and the other game area. Is configured to be selectable,
A first starting winning opening that forms the starting winning opening in the one side game area;
The other-side game area comprises the start winning opening, a game ball includes a normal variable winning device that can be converted into a closed state where a game ball cannot be won, and an open state where a game ball can be easily won,
A second starting winning opening that forms the starting winning opening on the other side of the game area and downstream of the normal variable winning device;
The game control means,
Executing a first game as the game based on winning of a game ball to the first starting winning opening,
A second game is executed as the game based on a winning of a game ball to the second starting winning port or the normal variable winning device.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the interest of a game can be improved.

It is the perspective view which looked at the game machine of one embodiment of the present invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is an exploded perspective view of a game board. It is a figure explaining a normal fluctuation winning device. It is a figure explaining a normal fluctuation winning device. It is a figure explaining a normal fluctuation winning device. It is a figure explaining a normal fluctuation winning device. It is a figure explaining a normal fluctuation winning device. It is a figure explaining a normal fluctuation winning device. It is a figure explaining a normal fluctuation winning device. It is a figure explaining a normal fluctuation winning device. It is a figure explaining a normal fluctuation winning device. It is a figure explaining the modification of a normal fluctuation winning device. It is a figure explaining the modification of a normal fluctuation winning device. It is a front view of a special fluctuation winning device. It is a top view of a special fluctuation winning device. It is a figure explaining operation | movement of an opening / closing member, (a) is a closed state, (b) is an open state. It is a figure explaining a rolling mode of a game ball in a special fluctuation winning device. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a control system of a game machine. It is a figure for explaining transition of a game state. It is a figure for explaining an example of a change of a game state. It is a figure for explaining an example of a change of a game state. It is a figure for explaining an example of an effect in a display. It is a figure explaining the relation between the operation of the normal fluctuation winning device and various times. It is a figure explaining composition of a special result. It is a figure explaining the kind of variation pattern. It is a figure explaining the kind of variation pattern. It is a figure explaining an opening and closing pattern of a special fluctuation winning device. It is a flowchart explaining a main process. It is a flowchart explaining a main process. It is a flowchart explaining a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart explaining a starting port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure starting port 1 switch process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure suspension information determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure starting port 3 switch process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 game process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 game process. FIG. 3 is a flowchart for explaining ordinary processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart for explaining ordinary processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 change start process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 change start process. It is a flowchart explaining a fall lottery process. It is a flowchart explaining a support management process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a 4th specific game state setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 change process transition setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 change process transition setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining the processing during special figure 1 fluctuation. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 changing process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 display process shift setting processing 1. It is a flow chart explaining special figure 2 display processing shift setting processing 1. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 display process shift setting process 2. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 display process shift setting process 2. It is a flowchart explaining the processing during special figure 1 display. It is a flowchart explaining the processing during special figure 1 display. It is a flowchart explaining the process during special figure 2 display. It is a flowchart explaining the process during special figure 2 display. It is a flowchart explaining a fanfare / interval process shift setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 small hit fanfare middle processing shift setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle processing shift setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining a process during a fanfare / interval. It is a flowchart explaining the processing during opening of a special winning opening. It is a flowchart explaining the big winning a prize mouth residual ball processing. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit end process shift setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 big hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 big hit end process. It is a flowchart explaining the process during a small hit fanfare. It is a flowchart explaining a small hitting process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit remaining sphere process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 small hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 small hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining a main process. It is a flowchart explaining a reception command check process. It is a flowchart explaining a reception command analysis process. It is a flowchart explaining a fluctuation system command process. It is a flowchart explaining a fluctuation effect setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a one-shot system command process. It is a flowchart explaining a jackpot system command process. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating types of variation patterns in a first modification. It is a figure explaining transition of a game state in the 2nd modification. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating types of variation patterns in a second modification. It is a figure for explaining an example of an execution mode of an effect in the 2nd modification. It is a figure for explaining an example of an execution mode of an effect in the 2nd modification. It is a figure for explaining an example of an effect in a display in a 2nd modification. It is a figure for explaining an example of an effect in a display in a 2nd modification. It is a figure for explaining an example of an execution mode of an effect in the 2nd modification. It is a figure for explaining an example of an effect in a display in a 2nd modification. It is a figure explaining transition of a game state in the 3rd modification. It is a figure explaining the kind of variation pattern in the 3rd modification. It is a figure for explaining an example of an execution mode of an effect in the 3rd modification. It is a figure for explaining an example of an execution mode of an effect in the 3rd modification. It is a figure for explaining the execution mode of an effect in the 4th modification, and a selection ratio. It is a figure for explaining an example of an effect in the 4th modification. It is a figure for explaining an example of an effect in the 4th modification. It is a figure for explaining the execution mode of an effect in the 4th modification, and a selection ratio. It is a figure for explaining an example of an effect in the 4th modification. It is a figure for explaining an example of an effect in the 4th modification. It is a figure explaining transition of a game state in the 5th modification. It is a figure explaining the execution mode of the special figure change display game in the 6th modification. It is a front view of the game board in the 7th modification. It is a figure explaining the composition of the special result in the 7th modification. It is a figure explaining transition of a game state in the 7th modification. It is a figure explaining the composition of the special figure and the ordinary figure in the 8th modification. It is a figure explaining transition of a game state in an 8th modification.

<First embodiment>
As shown in FIG. 1, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be openable and closable. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is housed in a housing (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame 15 (transparent plate holding frame) having a cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

  In addition, lamps and LEDs are built into the left and right sides of the glass frame 15 to decorate and produce, and notify when an abnormality has occurred (for example, when a dispensing abnormality has occurred, the lamp, LED, and the like are displayed in an abnormality notification color (eg, red ), A frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (flashing)), and a speaker (upper speaker) 19 a that emits sound (for example, sound effect). Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is provided below the front frame 12. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b notify the details of the abnormality by voice. In addition, you may make it provide the lamp for payment abnormality notification in the predetermined part of the glass frame 15. FIG.

An upper plate 21 (reservoir plate) for supplying game balls to a hit ball launching device (not shown) and a game ball paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10 are provided below the front frame 12. An outlet 22 for the upper plate ball flowing out, a lower plate (receiving tray) 23 for storing game balls paid out in a state where the upper plate 21 is full, an operation unit 24 of the hitting ball firing device, and the like are provided. Further, on the upper edge of the upper plate 21, an effect button 25 including an effect button switch 25a for receiving a pressing operation input from a player is provided. A touch panel 29 for receiving a contact operation input from a player is provided on an upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25. Further, a keyhole 26 for inserting a key for opening and locking the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12.
In the present embodiment, the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25. However, the touch panel 29 may be provided separately from the effect button 25. For example, a sub-display device is provided near the effect button 25. A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.

  On the right side of the effect button 25, a ball lending button 27 operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, an ejection button operated to eject a prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. 28, a balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card is provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, when the player rotates the operation unit 24, the hitting ball firing device moves the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 toward the game area 32 on the front of the game board 30. Fire. In addition, when the player operates the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29, in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2), an effect or the like in which the operation of the player is interposed is performed. It can be carried out.

  Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 30 includes a flat game board body 80 serving as a mounting base for various members. The game board main body 80 is made of wooden or synthetic resin, and a game area 32 surrounded by an outer peripheral wall (guide rail) 31 is provided on the front surface of the game board main body 80. The gaming machine 10 is configured to play a game by firing a game ball from a ball firing device into a game area 32 surrounded by an outer peripheral wall 31. In the game area 32, a windmill, an obstruction nail, or the like is provided as a member for changing the flowing direction of the game ball, and the launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

  At a substantially center of the game area 32, a center case 40 forming a window serving as a display area of the variable display game is attached. A display device 41 as an effect display device (variable display device) for variably displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information is disposed behind a window formed in the center case 40.

  The display device 41 (variable display device) is configured by a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) and a CRT (CRT). In an area (display area) of the display screen where an image can be displayed, a still image or a moving image can be displayed as an effect image. For example, a plurality of pieces of identification information (special symbols), a character that effects a special figure change display game, Information about the game, such as a background image that enhances the effect, is displayed. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are displayed in a variable manner (variable display), and a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is performed. In addition, an image for an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a big hit display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen.

  In the center case 40, a warp flow path forming member 614 that forms a warp flow path for guiding game balls flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and game balls that have passed through the warp flow path are rolled. A possible stage section 620 is provided. Since the stage section 620 of the center case 40 is disposed above the first starting winning opening 36, the game balls rolled on the stage section 620 can easily win the first starting winning opening 36. In addition, a board effect device 44 for effecting a game by operating is provided on an upper portion of the center case 40. The board presentation device 44 is operable from the state shown in FIG. 2 toward the center of the display device 41.

  In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, a normal symbol starting gate (ordinary symbol starting gate) 34 is provided. Inside the general-purpose starting gate 34, a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 19) for detecting a game ball passing through the general-purpose starting gate 34 is provided. When a game ball driven into the game area 32 passes through the general-purpose starting gate 34, a general-purpose variation display game is executed.

  In the gaming area 32 at the lower left of the center case 40, two general winning openings 35 are arranged, and on the right side of the center case 40, one general winning opening 35 is arranged. The winning of the game ball into the general winning opening 35 is detected by a winning opening switch 35a provided in the general winning opening 35 (see FIG. 19).

  In the gaming area 32 below the center case 40, a first start winning port 36 (first start winning area) for providing a start condition of the special figure 1 variable display game (first special figure variable display game) is provided. . The game ball that has won the first starting winning port 36 is detected by the starting port 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 19). In the lower right game area 32 of the center case 40, there is provided a second start winning opening 97 (second start winning area) for giving a start condition of the special figure 2 change display game (second special figure change display game). Have been. The game ball that has won the second starting winning opening 97 is detected by the starting opening 3 switch 97a (see FIG. 19).

  In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, a normal variable winning device 37 is provided between the general-purpose starting gate 34 and the second starting winning opening 97. In the present embodiment, the special figure 1 variable display game is immediately executed by winning the winning opening (the general electric winning opening 37d) of the normal variable winning apparatus 37, or the special figure 1 start winning memory (first start memory). ) Is stored. That is, in the present embodiment, the winning opening of the ordinary variable winning device 37 (the general winning opening 37d) is a first start winning area that gives a start condition of the special figure 1 variable display game (first special figure variable display game). is there. Then, the game ball that has won the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 19), and when a game ball is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a, the game control device 100 The special figure 1 change display game is immediately executed or the special figure 1 start winning prize memory is stored. As described above, in the present embodiment, the universal winning port 37d and the first starting winning port 36 correspond to the first starting winning area (the starting port in FIG. 1), and the second starting winning port 97 corresponds to the second starting port. It corresponds to a winning area (a starting port in FIG. 2).

  The game control device (game control means) 100 performs a control to convert the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 into an open state and a closed state based on a predetermined lottery result of the general figure fluctuation display game. (Conversion control means) (see FIG. 19). Although the details of the configuration of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 will be described later, in the present embodiment, the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is moved forward and backward (slids) in the front-rear direction by the general-purpose solenoid 37c, so that the general-purpose winning win is achieved. This is a so-called tongue-type ordinary electric accessory that opens the mouth 37d (makes a game ball enterable into the general winning opening 37d). In addition, as the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37, for example, an attacker-type ordinary electric accessory that opens the universal winning opening 37d by turning the upper end side in the direction of falling forward by the universal solenoid 37c is provided. You may. The game control device 100 can open the movable member 37b via the general-purpose solenoid 37c and allow the game ball to flow into the normal variable winning device 37 when the result of the general-purpose variable display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode. Open state.

  Further, the game control device 100 increases the frequency of occurrence of the easy-to-win state by shortening the fluctuation time of the general-floor fluctuation display game or making the hit probability of the general-floor fluctuation display game higher than normal, The time reduction state (general power support (electric support) state) is generated by making the generation time of the easy winning state longer than the easy winning state generated in the gaming state.

  In the game area 32 at the lower right of the center case 40, a special variable winning device 38 is provided. As shown in FIGS. 15 to 18, the special fluctuation winning device 38 converts the large winning opening 38 d into a state in which a game ball can flow in by moving the opening / closing member 990 back and forth (sliding) in the front-rear direction. The special fluctuation winning device 38 changes the special winning opening 38d from the closed state to the open state according to the result of the special figure fluctuation display game, thereby facilitating the flow of the game ball into the special winning opening 38d. A predetermined game value (prize ball) is provided to the player. The game ball that has won the special variable winning device 38 is detected by a special winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 19).

  That is, the special variable winning device 38 of the present embodiment opens and closes the closed winning opening 38d from the closed state (a disadvantageously closed state for the player) with the opening and closing member 990 depending on the result of the special figure variable display game as the auxiliary game. The member 990 retreats and converts a game ball flowing down the game area 32 into an acceptable open state (a state advantageous to the player). Then, the game ball arriving at the special fluctuation winning device 38 is repeatedly guided diagonally backward by the front wall protrusion 954 and the protrusion 992 and diagonally forward guided by the recess 993 and the rear wall protrusion 964, It flows down from right to left, meandering back and forth. This allows the game ball to stay on the opening / closing member 990 in a longer time than in the case in which the front wall projection 954, the rear wall projection 964, the projection 992, the concave portion 993, etc. do not rise and fall linearly in the downflow path 38f. become longer. Therefore, a game ball is always present on the opening / closing member 990, and even when the opening time of the special variable winning device 38 is short, the game ball existing on the opening / closing member 990 when the opening / closing member 990 is opened. Is likely to fall and win the large winning opening 38d, and even if the opening is short, the player can have a sense of expectation for winning.

  When the opening / closing member 990 is opened, the game ball staying on the opening / closing member 990 comes into contact with the protruding portion 992 and jumps to be guided away from the special winning opening 38d. In addition, the bouncing game ball may come further away from the special winning opening 38d by coming into contact with the front wall protrusion 954 of the flow path front wall 952, the rear wall protrusion 964 of the flow path rear wall 962, or the like. In addition, since the protruding portions 992 are arranged at intervals that allow game balls to pass through, the protruding portions 992 may fall without contacting the protruding portions 992 through this interval. As described above, by providing the protrusion 992, the front wall protrusion 954, and the rear wall protrusion 964, the rolling mode of the game ball when the opening / closing member 990 is opened becomes various, and the interest of the game can be improved. it can. In addition, when the opening / closing member 990 is opened, the timing of inflow of a plurality of game balls existing on the opening / closing member 990 into the special winning opening 38d can be shifted, so that ball clogging occurs in the special winning opening 38d. Can be prevented. In addition, a configuration in which game balls are retained in the normal variable winning device 37 described later may be used as a configuration in which game balls are retained in the special variable winning device 38, and conversely, game balls in the special variable winning device 38 may be used. May be used as a configuration in which the game balls in the normal variable winning device 37 are retained.

  Returning to FIG. 2, in the game area 32 below the first starting winning port 36, an out port 30a for collecting game balls that have not won a winning port or the like is provided. In addition, a special figure change display game (a special figure 1 change display game, a special figure 2 change display game) and a normal figure change display game are executed outside the game area 32 and in the lower right corner of the game board main body 80. A batch display device 50 is provided.

  The collective display device 50 is a special figure 1 display (first special figure change display unit) 51 and a special figure 2 change display for a special figure 1 change display game composed of a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) and the like. A special figure 2 display (second special figure change display section) 52 for a game and a storage display section 53 composed of LED lamps for informing the start storage number of the special figure 1 change display game are provided.

  The collective display device 50 has a round display portion 55 for displaying the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of times the special variable winning device 38 is opened and closed). A first game state display unit 56 for notifying (hitting style corresponding to the game state) and a probability display unit 57 for notifying the probability state (high probability state or low probability state) of the special figure change display game are provided. The collective display device 50 has a probability state display section for displaying that the large hit probability state is in the high probability state when the gaming machine 10 is powered on, and a display for turning on when a large hit occurs to notify the large hit occurrence. A unit (display) or the like may be provided.

  Further, a general figure display section 58 for displaying a general figure change display game, a storage display section 59 for notifying the number of stored start times of the general figure change display game, and a time reduction state in which a light is turned on when a time reduction state occurs to notify the occurrence of the time reduction state. A notification unit 60 and the like are provided.

  The special figure variable display game on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 is, for example, during the execution of the variable display game, that is, while the decorative special figure variable display game is being performed on the display device 41, The segment is driven to blink to indicate that it is changing. The blink cycle is set to, for example, 100 ms. In the case of the present embodiment, in the special figure 1 change display game on the special figure 1 display 51, the eighth segment provided on the lower right side of the 7-segment is also driven to blink in addition to the center segment. It is configured to display that it is changing, and to be able to distinguish between Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2. When the result of the game is "missing", for example, the central segment (the eighth segment on the lower right side in addition to the special figure 1) is turned on as a result mode of the missing, and the result of the game is In the case of "hit", the game result is displayed by turning on a result mode (for example, a number or a symbol) other than the loss result mode as a hit result mode (special result mode).

  The storage display unit 53 displays the number of undigested balls out of the number of winning balls to the first starting winning port 36 and the ordinary variable winning device 37 serving as the starting conditions for changing the special figure 1 display 51 (the number of stored starting = the number of reserved). Is displayed by turning off and on (flashing) the plurality of LEDs. The round display unit 55 is configured by an LED lamp or the like, and turns off all LEDs when not in the special game state, and turns on the LEDs corresponding to the number of rounds selected according to the special result during the special game state. Turn on the light. Note that the round display section 55 may be configured by a 7-segment display.

  The first game state display unit 56 turns off all the LEDs in a state where the game is proceeded by performing, for example, a left hit (at the time of a normal hit), and performs a game by performing a right hit. Is set to proceed (when right-handed), all LEDs are turned on. The probability display unit 57 turns off all the LEDs when the big hit probability state is the low probability state (normal probability state), and turns off all the LEDs when the big hit probability state is the high probability state (probable change state). Is turned on.

  FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board 30 included in the gaming machine 10. As shown in FIG. 3, the game board 30 includes a substantially rectangular plate-shaped game board main body 80, a front component 600 forming a front portion of the center case 40, and a rear portion of the center case 40. And a rear component 700 to which various members necessary for the board 30 are attached. The rear component 700 has a substantially rectangular box-shaped rear base member 710 having a recess that opens forward, and inside the recess forms a board effect device 44 that performs a game effect by operating. , And various movable accessory units are provided.

  The front component member 600 is provided with a general winning opening 35, a warp channel forming member 614, a stage section 620, and the like. Further, in addition to the front component 600, the game board main body 80 includes a general-purpose starting gate 34, a general winning opening 35, a first starting winning opening 36, a second starting winning opening 97, an ordinary variable winning device 37, a special variable winning device 37, and a special variable. The winning device 38, the collective display device 50, and the like are provided.

  As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, a flow path 615 is formed on the right side of the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the front side of which is covered with a transparent cover and communicates with the vertical direction. (Specifically, game balls that have arrived at the normal variable winning device 37 but have not won the normal variable winning device 37) flow down through the downflow path 615. A guide 616 is provided below the downflow path 615. The guide portion 616 has an upper surface 617 that is an inclined surface that descends to the left, receives a game ball flowing down the downflow path 615 at the upper surface 617, and has a second starting winning opening 97 and a special variable winning device 38. You will be guided to the left.

[Normal variable winning device]
Next, an example of the configuration of the ordinary variable prize winning device 37 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the normal fluctuation winning device 37. FIG. 5A is a top view of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 in which the movable member 37b is closed, and FIG. 5B is a top view of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 in which the movable member 37b is open. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 includes a flow path rear wall 373a disposed along the front surface of the game board main body 80, and a flow path front wall 371a disposed in front of the flow path rear wall 373a. And a downflow path 37f through which the game balls can flow down in a line. The downflow path 37f is inclined so as to go down to the right as viewed from the front side, and the game balls flow down rightward in one row. In addition, the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 allows the game balls to pass in a line inside the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 (specifically, inside the base portion configured by the front base member 373 and the rear base member 375). A simple U-shaped bypass 37g is provided. As shown in FIG. 4, the entrance 37g1 (one end of the detour 37g) and the exit 37g2 (the other end of the detour 37g) of the detour 37g are formed on the rear wall 373a of the flow path, and play balls are provided. Flows into the detour 37g one by one from the downflow path 37f via the inlet 37g1, and flows out one by one from the detour 37g to the downflow path 37f via the outlet 37g2.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the front wall 371a of the flow path has a protrusion 371b that protrudes rearward and penetrates the rear wall 373a of the flow path. The protruding portion 371b is a position where a game ball flowing down the downflow path 37f collides, and is disposed at a position between the entrance 37g1 and the exit 37g2 of the bypass 37g. Accordingly, the protruding portion 371b prevents the game ball from flowing down the downflow path 37f on the way (ie, before flowing into the end point (downstream end) of the downflow path 37f), thereby causing the game ball to flow to the bypass 37g. It is designed to guide. Since the projecting portion 371b is provided in the middle of the downflow path 37f, the game ball cannot flow into the end point of the downflow path 37f without passing through the detour 37g.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the bottom surface of the central portion and the right end portion of the downflow path 37f and the bottom surface of the bypass 37g are constituted by a movable member 37b slidable in the front-rear direction. The movable member 37b protrudes forward as shown in FIG. 5 (a) and is in a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won in the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (general winning opening 37d), and as shown in FIG. 5 (b). In this way, it is possible to convert to the open state where the game ball can be retracted backward and the game ball can enter the general electricity winning opening 37d. That is, the game ball flowing down the downflow path 37f rolls on the upper surface of the movable member 37b when the movable member 37b is in the closed state and cannot flow into the general winning opening 37d, and the movable member 37b is in the open state. In the case of, it is possible to flow into the general winning opening 37d.

  Specifically, the game ball flowing down the downflow path 37f rolls on the upper surface of the movable member 37b when the movable member 37b is in the closed state. That is, it flows down the downflow path 37f to the protrusion 371b, collides with the protrusion 371b, and flows into the detour 37g. Further, when the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the movable member 37b collides with the protrusion 371b, the movable member 37b is opened, or the game ball flowing down the downflow path 37f flows into the upper surface of the movable member 37b. If the movable member 37b is in the open state at this time, the game ball flows into the general winning opening 37d without passing through the bypass 37g.

  Further, the game ball that has flowed through the detour 37g and flowed into the end point of the downflow path 37f flows into the general winning opening 37d when the movable member 37b is in the open state. On the other hand, when the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the game ball that has passed through the detour 37g and has flowed into the end point of the downflow path 37f does not flow into the general winning opening 37d, and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 does not flow. It advances to the outside and flows down, for example, through the downflow path 615 to the guide section 616. That is, the game ball corresponds to a game ball that failed to win the normal variable winning device 37 (a game ball that did not win the normal variable winning device 37 despite arriving at the normal variable winning device 37). . When the movable member 37b is in the closed state, there is a gap between the movable member 37b and the flow path front wall 371a, but the gap is such that a game ball cannot enter.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 includes a starting port 2 switch 37a, and a movable member unit 374 having a movable member 37b and a general-purpose solenoid 37c. Furthermore, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 includes a front decoration member 371 having a flow path front wall 371a, a front base member 373 having a flow path rear wall 373a, a rear base member 375 to which a movable member 37b and the like are attached, and a rear base member 375. A rear cover member 377 covering the rear surface of the member 375, a front LED substrate 372a and a front substrate holder 372 for fixing the front LED substrate 372a to a rear surface of the front decoration member 371, a rear LED substrate 376a and the rear LED substrate 376a. And a rear substrate holder 376 for fixing the rear substrate member 375 to the rear surface of the rear base member 375.

  At least the front decoration member 371, the front base member 373, and the rear base member 375 are made of a material that can transmit light. A front LED board 372a is arranged as decoration means behind the front decoration member 371, and a rear LED board 376a is arranged as decoration means behind the rear base member 375. It is possible to decorate.

  The front decoration member 371 has a plate-shaped front portion 371c. The front surface of the front portion 371c is arranged close to the rear surface of the cover glass 14 of the glass frame 15, so that the game balls do not flow down in front of the front surface. The front surface of the front portion 371c is a surface that can be visually recognized by a player, and is decorated. The upper part of the plate-shaped front part 371c is a flow path front wall 371a that forms a front side wall of the downflow path 37f.

  As shown in FIG. 5, a plurality of (two in the present embodiment) upstream front wall protrusions 371d projecting rearward are provided on the rear surface side of the flow path front wall 371a. The upstream-side front wall protrusion 371d is a triangular prism-shaped protrusion having left and right side surfaces inclined. The upstream front wall projection 371d has a function of guiding a game ball flowing to the right backward in order to meander the game ball flowing down the flow-down path 37f to suppress the power. That is, it forms a contact portion to which a game ball flowing down the downflow path 37f can contact.

  As shown in FIG. 5, a downstream front wall projection 371e that projects rearward is provided on the rear surface side of the flow path front wall 371a. The downstream-side front wall protrusion 371e is a triangular prism-shaped protrusion having left and right side surfaces inclined. The downstream-side front wall projection 371e has a function of guiding a game ball flowing to the right backward to make the game ball flowing into the end point of the flow-down path 37f meander and suppress the power. That is, it forms a contact portion to which a game ball flowing down the downflow path 37f can contact. Further, the downstream front wall projection 371e allows the game ball flowing around the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (outside of the normal fluctuation winning device 37) to flow into the normal fluctuation winning device 37 on the downstream side (the flow path 37f). It has a function to prevent intrusion from the end point side).

  FIG. 6A is a rear view of the front decoration member 371. As shown in FIG. 6A, a plurality of rib-shaped extension walls 371f extending rearward from the rear surface of the plate-shaped front portion 371c are provided on the rear surface side of the front decoration member 371. The function of the extension wall 371f differs depending on the place where the extension wall 371f is provided. General electricity winning port formation part 371f2 which forms a side wall and a bottom surface of the general electricity winning port 37d, an induction channel forming part 371f3 which forms an induction channel 37e for guiding a game ball which has won the general electricity winning port 37d, a starting port 2 switch. The switch mounting portion forming portion 371f4 that forms a mounting portion for mounting the 37a has a function as a peripheral wall 371f5 that prevents a game ball flowing down around the normal fluctuation winning device 37 from entering the inside.

  The bottom surface portion 371f1 that forms the bottom surface of the flow-down path 37f is an inclined surface that is inclined leftward when viewed from the rear side. The general winning a prize port forming unit 371f2 is inclined so as to collect gaming balls flowing into the general prize winning port 37d into the guide channel 37e. Game balls can flow in a line in the guide channel 37e, and a starting port 2 switch 37a is provided in a portion flowing into the guide channel 37e. As a result, all the game balls flowing into the normal electricity winning opening 37d flow into the guidance flow path 37e after being detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a. The guiding flow path 37e formed by the guiding flow path forming part 371f3 is a flow path for guiding the game ball from the general winning opening 37d to the rear side of the game board 30. A rib 371g for guiding backward is formed.

  The front LED board 372a and the front board holder 372 are disposed on the rear surface of the front decoration member 371 inside the peripheral wall 371f5 (portion surrounded by the peripheral wall 371f5). The portion of the rear surface of the front decoration member 371 that is surrounded by the peripheral wall 371f5 is subjected to a process for scattering light (an uneven process in the example illustrated in FIG. 6A). Thereby, it is possible to effectively decorate the ordinary fluctuation winning device 37 with the light from the front LED board 372a and the rear LED board 376a, and to decorate the front LED board 372a itself and the front board holder 372 with the front decoration. It is difficult to see through the front decoration member 371 from the front of the member 371. As shown in FIG. 6B, a plurality of holes (seven in the example shown in FIG. 6B) for releasing heat, such as the front LED board 372a, are provided below the front base member 373. Is provided. These holes are also difficult to see from the front of the front decoration member 371 due to the processing for scattering the light applied to the front decoration member 371.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the front base member 373 has a plate-shaped rear surface portion 373b. A front decoration member 371 is attached to the front surface of the rear surface portion 373b, and a part of the front surface of the rear surface portion 373b that is not hidden by the front decoration member 371 is decorated. An upper portion of the rear surface portion 373b is a flow path rear wall 373a that forms a rear side wall of the downflow path 37f. A movable member insertion portion 373c is formed at a position serving as a lower end of the flow path rear wall 373a so as to penetrate the movable member 37b back and forth for inserting the movable member 37b from the rear surface side of the front base member 373.

  As shown in FIG. 5, a plurality of (two in the present embodiment) rear wall projections 373 d protruding forward are provided on the front side of the front base member 373. The rear wall protrusion 373d is a triangular prism-shaped protrusion having left and right side surfaces inclined, and is provided behind the upstream front wall protrusions 371d provided on the flow path front wall 371a. It is provided so as to be located slightly downstream with respect to the protrusion 371d. The rear wall projection 373d has a function of guiding a game ball flowing to the right to the front in order to meander the game ball flowing down the flow-down path 37f and suppress the power. That is, it forms a contact portion to which a game ball flowing down the downflow path 37f can contact.

  FIG. 6B is a rear view of the front base member 373. As shown in FIG. 6B, the guiding flow path 37 e is provided at the center of the rear surface portion 373 b at a portion facing the portion where the guiding flow channel 37 e is formed in the front decoration member 371. A penetrating portion 373e penetrating back and forth is formed to communicate with the side. As shown in FIG. 6B, a plurality of rib-shaped extension walls 373f extending rearward from the rear surface of the plate-shaped rear surface portion 373b are provided on the rear surface side of the front base member 373. The function of the extension wall 373f differs depending on the location where the extension wall 373f is provided. Have.

  The guide flow path forming part 373f1 forms the guide flow path 37e so as to guide the game balls flowing into the through part 373e backward. Further, a rib 373g for guiding a game ball backward is formed at a lower end portion of the guide flow path forming portion 373f1. The lower end of the guide flow path forming portion 373f1 and the rib 373g formed at the lower end have an inclined surface whose upper surface is lowered rearward. To be guided to. The guided game balls flow out of the gaming machine 10 into a discharge channel for discharging the game balls.

  The peripheral wall 373f2 is formed in accordance with the shape of a penetrating portion formed in a portion of the game board main body 80 where the normal variable prize device 37 is attached and penetrating back and forth, and the normal variable prize device 37 is attached to the game panel main body 80. Then, the peripheral wall 373f2 is in a state of being inserted into the through portion. The rear surface of the rear surface portion 373b located outside the peripheral wall 373f2 comes into contact with the front surface of the game board main body 80 when the normal variable winning device 37 is attached to the game board main body 80. In this portion, a plurality of bosses for positioning and screw holes for screwing are formed.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the rear base member 375 includes a peripheral wall 375a that matches front and rear with a peripheral wall 373f2 of the front base member 373. Further, as shown in FIG. 4, a pair of rear base members 375 that guide and support a movable member 37b that operates in the front-rear direction is provided at a position facing a movable member insertion portion 373c formed on the front base member 373. The movable member holding portion 375b is provided. The pair of movable member holding portions 375b are disposed at a predetermined interval (gap 375c), and can contact the lower surface of the movable member 37b so as to guide and support the movable member 37b. Are provided so as to extend along the front-rear direction.

  As shown in FIG. 4, on the front side of the rear base member 375, a movable member unit 374 including a movable member 37b and an operation mechanism (drive mechanism) for operating the movable member 37b is attached. The movable member unit 374 includes a movable member 37b slidable in the front-rear direction, an ordinary solenoid 37c for operating the movable member 37b, and a slider 374a for transmitting the driving force from the ordinary solenoid 37c to the movable member 37b. And a crank 374b.

  The movable member unit 374 has a closed state in which the movable member 37b is protruded forward as shown in FIG. 5A, and an open state in which the movable member 37b is retracted backward as shown in FIG. 5B. Can be converted. The movable member 37b can appear above the universal winning opening 37d via a movable member holding portion 375b formed on the rear base member 375 and a movable member insertion portion 373c formed on the front base member 373. I have.

  FIG. 7A is an exploded perspective view of the movable member unit 374, and FIG. 7B is a front view of the movable member 37b. FIG. 8A is a top view of the movable member 37b, and FIG. 8B is a bottom view of the movable member 37b. As shown in FIG. 7A, the movable member 37b is located at an upper portion 37b1, at a first middle portion 37b2 provided at a position lower than the upper portion 37b1, and at a position lower than the first middle portion 37b2. The provided second middle portion 37b3 and the lower portion 37b4 provided at a position lower than the second middle portion 37b3 form a stepped shape arranged in the left-right direction. The upper section 37b1, the first middle section 37b2, the second middle section 37b3, and the lower section 37b4 are arranged in this order such that the upper section 37b1 is disposed on the leftmost side and the lower section 37b4 is disposed on the rightmost side. The ball is made to flow down from left to right.

  The upper end portion 37b1 has a front end portion extending above the general winning opening 37d when the movable member 37b is in a closed state, and serves as a downflow path forming section forming a bottom surface of the downflow path 37f. The downflow path forming portion of the upper section 37b1 is one step lower than portions other than the downflow path forming section of the upper step 37b1. In addition, a lower wall protruding portion 37b5 extends forward from a right end portion of the upper step portion 37b1 other than the downflow path forming portion. The lower wall protruding portion 37b5 has a slope on the left side, and is provided so as to gradually narrow the width (length in the front-rear direction) of the downflow passage forming portion. The lower wall protruding portion 37b5 has a function of guiding a game ball flowing to the right to the front so as to meander the game ball flowing down the flow path 37f and suppress the power. That is, it forms a contact portion to which a game ball flowing down the downflow path 37f can contact.

  The first middle portion 37b2 has a front end portion extending above the general winning opening 37d when the movable member 37b is in a closed state, and is formed as a downflow path forming section forming a bottom surface of the downflow path 37f. A portion other than the portion (that is, a portion other than the downflow path forming section) is a detour forming section that forms the bottom surface of the detour 37g. In the first middle section 37b2, the boundary between the downflow path forming section and the detour path forming section is disposed immediately below the entrance 37g1 of the detour path 37g when the movable member 37b is in the closed state.

  The first middle portion 37b2 is inclined such that the rear end is located below the front end. As a result, as shown in FIG. 8A, for example, the game ball easily rolls from the front side to the rear side of the upstream part of the detour 37g. A meandering left ridge 37b6 is formed on the upper surface of the first middle portion 37b2 to protrude upward and extend back and forth. This makes it possible to meander the game ball rolling on the detour 37g and suppress the power of the game ball.

  The second middle portion 37b3 has a front end portion extending above the general winning opening 37d when the movable member 37b is in a closed state, and a front end portion 371b for guiding a game ball flowing down the downflow path 37f to the detour 37g. It is arranged immediately below.

  When the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the lower end portion 37b4 has a front end portion extending above the general winning opening 37d, and a bottom surface of the flow passage 37f (specifically, a bottom surface at the end point of the flow passage 37f). The part other than the front end part (that is, the part other than the falling path forming part) is a detour forming part that forms the bottom surface of the detour 37g. In the lower section 37b4, the boundary between the downflow path forming section and the detour forming section is disposed immediately below the outlet 37g2 of the detour 37g when the movable member 37b is in the closed state.

  The lower step portion 37b4 is inclined such that the rear end is positioned above the front end, and the rear end portion is flush with the rear end portion of the first middle step portion 37b2. As a result, as shown in FIG. 8A, for example, the game ball easily rolls from the rear side to the front side of the downstream part of the detour 37g. Note that the rear end of the lower portion 37b4 may be provided at a position lower than the rear end of the first middle portion 37b2. A meandering right ridge 37b7 is formed on the upper surface of the lower portion 37b4 to protrude upward and extend back and forth. This makes it possible to meander the game ball rolling on the detour 37g and suppress the power of the game ball.

  As described above, the movable member 37b is provided with the protrusions such as the lower wall protrusion 37b5, the left protrusion 37b6, and the right protrusion 37b7. Further, the front decoration member 371 is provided with a protrusion such as the upstream front wall protrusion 371d, and the front base member 373 is provided with a protrusion such as the rear wall protrusion 373d. . With such a raised portion, the time for which the game ball stays on the movable member 37b is lengthened.

  As shown in FIG. 6B, a sliding portion 37b8 extending downward is formed at the left end and the right end of the movable member 37b. The sliding portion 37b8 is formed so as to extend in the front-rear direction. It becomes slidable.

  As shown in FIGS. 7B and 8B, a connection pin 37b9 that protrudes downward is provided at the center of the lower surface of the movable member 37b. Further, as shown in FIG. 7A, a through-portion 374b1 through which the connection pin 37b9 can be inserted is formed in the crank (drive arm) 374b that transmits the driving force from the general-purpose solenoid 37c to the movable member 37b. When the tip (lower end) of the connection pin 37b9 is inserted into the through portion 374b1, the movable member 37b and the crank 374b are connected.

  As shown in FIGS. 7 (b) and 8 (b), in the central portion of the lower surface of the movable member 37b, the front and rear sides of the connection pin 37b9 protrude downward and extend in the front-rear direction. Guide rib 37b10 is provided. The guide rib 37b10 has a gap 373i (see FIG. 6B) formed along the front-rear direction between a pair of holding portions 373h of the front base member 373, and a pair of movable members of the rear base member 375. It can be inserted into a gap 375c (see FIG. 4) formed along the front-rear direction between the holding portions 375b. By inserting the guide rib 37b10 of the movable member 37b into the gaps 373i and 375c from above, it is possible to guide the linear movement (slide movement) of the movable member 37b in the front-rear direction. That is, since the guide rib 37b10 of the movable member 37b fits into the gap 373i of the front base member 373 and the gap 375c of the rear base member 375, the movement of the movable member 37b in the left-right direction is restricted, so that the movement of the movable member 37b Can be limited to the movement in the front-back direction.

  As shown in FIG. 7 (a), a crank 374b for transmitting the driving force from the general-purpose solenoid 37c to the movable member 37b is a substantially L-shaped member, and has a connection pin 37b9 at one end thereof. A penetrating portion 374b1 that can be inserted is formed, and a convex portion 374b2 is formed at the other end. A recess 374a1 is formed in the slider 374a for transmitting the driving force from the general-purpose solenoid 37c to the movable member 37b. Thus, the slider 374a and the crank 374b are connected. A rotating shaft 374b3 extending in the up-down direction is formed at the bent portion of the crank 374b, and the crank 374b is rotatable around the rotating shaft 374b3. In addition, the rotating shaft 374b3 is sandwiched from above and below by a rear base member 375 and is rotatably held.

  As shown in FIG. 7A, the slider 374a has a flat main body 374a2 perpendicular to the vertical direction, a left wall 374a3 connected to the left end of the main body 374a2 and orthogonal to the main body 374a2, A front wall 374a4 connected to the front end of the 374a2 and orthogonal to the main body 374a2, and a projecting piece 374a5 projecting forward from the front wall 374a4 are provided. A concave portion 374a1 through which the convex portion 374b2 of the crank 374b can be inserted is formed in the main body portion 374a2.

  The left wall portion 374a3 of the slider 374a is engaged with the drive shaft 37c1 of the universal solenoid 37c, and the slider 374a extends the drive shaft 37c1 (in the case of the present embodiment, the tip of the drive shaft 37c1 moves to the right). Then, when the drive shaft 37c1 is pushed by the drive shaft 37c1 and moves to the right, the drive shaft 37c1 retreats (in the case of the present embodiment, the tip of the drive shaft 37c1 moves to the left) and is pulled by the drive shaft 37c1 to move to the left. I do.

  As shown in FIG. 6B, a recess 373j extending in the left-right direction is provided on the rear surface side of the front base member 373. The protrusion 374a5 of the slider 374a can be inserted into the recess 373j, and the protrusion 374a5 is inserted into the recess 373j from behind, thereby guiding the slider 374a to move linearly (slide) in the left-right direction. be able to. The front wall portion 374a4 of the slider 374a contacts the rear surface of the front base member 373 when the protrusion 374a5 of the slider 374a is inserted into the recess 373j of the front base member 373 from behind. Thus, the front-back position of the slider 374a with respect to the front base member 373 is set to a predetermined front-back position.

  When changing the movable member 37b from the open state to the closed state, the drive shaft 37c1 of the general-purpose solenoid 37c is extended. When the drive shaft 37c1 extends, the slider 374a slides to the right, and the crank 374b rotates counterclockwise about the rotation shaft 374b3 as viewed from the upper surface, so that the connection pin 983a is directed forward. And the movable member 37b projects forward. As a result, the movable member 37b is brought into the closed state (the state shown in FIG. 5 (a)), and it becomes impossible for the game balls to win in the general electricity winning opening 37d.

On the other hand, when changing the movable member 37b from the closed state to the open state, the drive shaft 37c1 of the general-purpose solenoid 37c is retracted. When the drive shaft 37c1 retracts, the slider 374a slides to the left, and the crank 374b rotates clockwise about the rotation shaft 374b3 as viewed from the upper surface side, so that the connection pin 37b9 moves rearward. Moving and movable member 37
b retreats backward. As a result, the movable member 37b is in the open state (the state shown in FIG. 5 (b)), and it is possible to win a game ball in the general winning opening 37d.

  FIG. 9 to FIG. 12 show the rolling modes of the game balls in the normal fluctuation winning device 37. 9 to 12, illustration of some members is omitted for the sake of explanation. The game ball that has arrived at the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (the game ball that has flowed into the starting point of the downflow path 37f) is first guided obliquely rearward by the upstream front wall protrusion 371d located on the upstream side, and then on the upstream side. Is guided diagonally forward by the rear wall protrusion 373d located at the position, and flows into the front end of the upper step 37b1 of the movable member 37b.

  The game ball that has flowed into the upper portion 37b1 of the movable member 37b is guided diagonally to the rear by the upstream front wall protrusion 371d located on the downstream side, and then the rear wall projection 373d and the movable member 37b located on the downstream side. Is guided obliquely forward by the lower wall protruding portion 37b5, and flows into the front end portion of the first middle step portion 37b2 of the movable member 37b. That is, the game ball flows down the downflow path 37f while meandering back and forth. Thus, the game ball stays on the movable member 37b as compared with the case where the falling ball 37f linearly flows down without the rising portion such as the lower wall protrusion 37b5, the upstream front wall protrusion 371d, and the rear wall protrusion 373d. The time gets longer.

  The game ball that has flowed into the first middle portion 37b2 of the movable member 37b collides with the protrusion 371b, and is guided rearward by the protrusion 371b and the first middle portion 37b2 that is inclined downward and rearward. As shown in (a), it flows into the detour 37g from the entrance 37g1 of the detour 37g. As shown in FIG. 10, inside the rear base member 375, a first guide piece 375d for guiding a game ball rolling on the detour 37g from the first middle portion 37b2 to the lower portion 37b4, and a lower portion 37b4 A second guide piece 375e for guiding the upper side from the rear side to the front side is provided. When the game ball rolls on the first middle portion 37b2 as shown in FIG. 10 and flows into the rear base member 375, it is guided to the right by the first guide piece 375d as shown in FIG. It flows into the part 37b4.

  The game ball that has flowed into the lower portion 37b4 of the movable member 37b is guided to the front by the second guide piece 375e or the lower portion 37b4 that is inclined forward and downward as shown in FIG. 12, and is shown in FIG. 9B. As described above, the air flows from the exit 37g2 of the detour 37g to the end point of the downflow path 37f (the front end of the lower step 37b4). Here, since the meandering left protruding ridge 37b6 is formed in the first middle section 37b2, the game ball rolls backward and upstream in the detour 37g while meandering left and right. Further, since the meandering right ridge 37b7 is formed in the lower portion 37b4, the game ball rolls in the downstream of the detour 37g forward while meandering left and right.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 6B, the front base member 373 includes a partition 373k that separates the upstream part and the downstream part of the detour 37g, and the rear end of the partition 373k is upstream of the detour 37g. An intermediate projection 373k1 is formed in a portion corresponding to the portion. Therefore, while rolling on the upstream part of the detour 37g (that is, on the first middle part 37b2), the game ball collides with the intermediate projection 373k1 and bounces, and is once pushed back to the entrance 37g1 side. It is. This allows the game ball to stay on the movable member 37b more than in the case where the detour route 37g does not have a starting portion such as the left protrusion 37b6, the right protrusion 37b7, and the intermediate protrusion 373k1, and the game ball stays on the movable member 37b. become longer.

  As described above, the flow path 37f is provided with the protrusions such as the lower wall protrusion 37b5, the upstream front wall protrusion 371d, and the rear wall protrusion 373d, and the detour route 37g is provided with the left protrusion 37b6. Since the raised portions such as the right protruding portion 37b7 and the intermediate protruding portion 373k1 are provided, the time for which the game ball stays on the movable member 37b becomes longer. Further, by providing these raised portions, the rolling mode of the game ball rolling on the movable member 37b becomes various, and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, by providing these raised portions, when the movable member 37b is opened, the timing of inflow of a plurality of game balls existing on the movable member 37b into the universal winning opening 37d can be shifted. Ball clogging can be prevented from occurring in the winning opening 37d.

  The game ball that has arrived at the normal fluctuation winning device 37 flows down the downflow path 37f, and first flows into the upper section 37b1 of the movable member 37b. When the movable ball 37b is in the open state when the game ball flows into the upper portion 37b1, the game ball flows into the general winning opening 37d without passing through the bypass 37g. On the other hand, when the game ball flows into the upper portion 37b1, if the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the game ball flows down the downflow path 37f and heads toward the protrusion 371b. Then, when the movable member 37b is opened before the game ball collides with the protruding portion 371b, the game ball flows into the general winning opening 37d without passing through the detour 37g. On the other hand, if the movable member 37b does not open before the game ball collides with the protrusion 371b, the game ball collides with the protrusion 371b and heads for the detour 37g.

  Even if the movable member 37b is opened while the game ball is rolling on the detour 37g, if the movable member 37b is open while the game ball is rolling on the detour 37g. Even if there is no such ball, the game ball continues to roll on the detour 37g and head toward the exit 37g2. When the movable member 37b is in an open state when the game ball comes out from the exit 37g2 of the detour 37g, the game ball flows into the general winning award opening 37d. On the other hand, when the movable ball 37b is in the closed state when the game ball comes out from the exit 37g2 of the detour 37g, the game ball does not flow into the general winning opening 37d, and the normal variable winning device 37 does not flow. Out of the game area (game area 32), and becomes a game ball that fails to win a prize in the normal variable prize device 37.

  Here, the intermediate protrusion 373k1 (see FIG. 6B) formed on the partition wall 373k of the front base member 373 has a function of making the game ball meander and extending the residence time in which the game ball stays on the movable member 37b. Not only that, it also has a function of securing a sufficient residence time even when the movable member 37b operates (moves back and forth) while the game ball is rolling on the detour 37g. For example, when the movable member 37b is changed to the open state while the game ball is rolling on the downstream portion of the detour 37g (that is, on the lower portion 37b4), the game ball is in contact with the movable member 37b. Since the ball is pulled back to the rear side (upstream side) in the downstream portion of the bypass 37g due to frictional resistance, contact with the right ridge 37b7, or the like, the game ball is rolling on the downstream portion of the bypass 37g. The staying time of the game ball staying on the movable member 37b is longer than when the state of the movable member 37b is not changed during the operation.

  On the other hand, for example, when the movable member 37b is changed to the open state while the game ball is rolling on the upstream portion of the detour 37g (that is, on the first middle portion 37b2), the game ball becomes movable. Due to frictional resistance with the member 37b, contact with the left ridge 37b6, and the like, the ball is drawn rearward (downstream) in the upstream portion of the bypass 37g, so that the game ball rolls over the upstream portion of the bypass 37g. The staying time of the game ball on the movable member 37b is shorter than when the state of the movable member 37b is not changed during the movement. On the other hand, since the normal fluctuation winning device 37 of the present embodiment has the intermediate projection 373k1 at the upstream portion of the detour 37g, the game sphere moves backward (downstream) within the upstream portion of the detour 37g. When it is pulled in, it collides with the intermediate projection 373k1 and bounces. That is, the game ball collides with the intermediate projection 373k1 while being drawn to the downstream side, and is once pushed back to the front side (upstream side) in the upstream portion of the detour 37g. Even if the movable member 37b is changed to the open state while the part is rolling, a sufficient residence time of the game ball on the movable member 37b can be secured.

  As described above, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes the gaming board main body 80 in which the gaming area 32 in which the game balls can flow down is formed on the front side, and the variable winning device provided in the gaming area 32 (the present embodiment). In this case, the gaming machine includes a normal variable winning device 37), and the variable winning device includes a mounting wall portion (rear surface portion 373b) for mounting the variable winning device on the game board main body 80, and a game area. An opening / closing member (movable) that can be converted into a prize-winning area (in this embodiment, a general winning opening 37d) in which a game ball flowing down to 32 can win a prize, a closed state that closes the prize-winning area, and an open state that opens the prize-winning area. The member 37b), a flow path on which the game ball can roll (downflow path 37f), a stay area for retaining the game ball (a bypass 37g), and a game ball rolling (flowing down) the flow path. A guiding portion (protruding portion 371b) for guiding to the region; Eteiru. The flow path is formed on the front side of the mounting wall by the closed opening / closing member, and when the opening / closing member is open, the flow path is formed when the opening / closing member is closed. Through the space, the game ball is configured to win the winning area, the stay area is formed on the rear surface side of the mounting wall portion regardless of the state of the opening and closing member, and has a plurality of communication ports that communicate with the flow path The game ball guided by the guiding section and flowing from the flow channel through one of the plurality of communication ports (the entrance 37g1) is connected to the one of the plurality of communication ports. Is configured to be able to flow out to a flow path through a different communication port (exit 37g2).

  Specifically, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a gaming board main body 80 in which a gaming area 32 in which a game ball can flow down is formed on the front side, and a variable winning device provided in the gaming area 32 (the present embodiment). In this case, the gaming machine includes a normal variable winning device 37), and the variable winning device includes a mounting wall portion (rear surface portion 373b) for mounting the variable winning device on the game board main body 80, and a game area. A prize area in which game balls flowing down 32 can enter a prize area (general winning prize opening 37d), by sliding back and forth, a closed state in which the prize areas are incapable of winning or difficult to enter a prize area, and game balls in the prize area. A slide member (movable member 37b) that can be converted to an open state where a game can be won, a first flow path (downflow path 37f) and a second flow path (detour path 37g) through which game balls can roll, and a first flow path. A game ball rolling (flowing down) the flow path to the second flow path Induction unit for guiding a (protruding portion 371b), and a. The first flow path is formed on the front side of the mounting wall by the slide member when the slide member is in a closed state, and is formed in the closed state when the slide member is in an open state. In some cases, the game ball is configured to win a prize area via a space in which the first flow path is formed, and the second flow path is formed by the slide member regardless of the state of the slide member. Both ends are communication ports formed on the rear surface side, and both ends communicate with the first flow path, and are guided by the guiding portion and flowed in from the first flow path through one communication port (the inlet 37g1) of the both ends. The game sphere is configured to be able to flow out to the first flow path via the other communication port (exit 37g2) of the two ends.

  That is, the ordinary fluctuation winning device 37 of the present embodiment has a configuration in which a detour path 37g (residence area, second flow path) is added to the downflow path 37f (flow path, first flow path). By adding the detour 37g in this way, the staying time of the game ball staying on the upper surface of the movable member 37b (opening / closing member, slide member) becomes longer than when there is no detour 37g. Therefore, it is easy for the game balls to win in the winning opening (in the present embodiment, the general winning opening 37d), and it is possible to suppress the decrease of the game balls in a predetermined game state (the time saving state in the present embodiment). Is possible, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced. In addition, since the normal fluctuation winning device 37 having the game ball staying function is provided in the right game area (the area on the right of the center case 40 in the game area 32), the player can play the game balls in the right game area. The rolling mode can be enjoyed. Further, in the present embodiment, the front decoration member 371 is made of a material that can transmit light, and the rolling state of the game ball in the normal fluctuation winning device 37 can be sufficiently visually recognized. The rolling mode of the game ball can be more enjoyed.

  The variable winning device provided in the game area 32 is not limited to the normal variable winning device 37 but may be changed as appropriate. For example, the special variable winning device 38 may be used. Specifically, the variable prize winning device is, for example, a device in which a detour 37g (residence area, second flow path) is added to the downflow path 38f (flow path, first flow path) of the special variable prize winning apparatus 38. You may. Further, the opening / closing member that can be converted into the closed state in which the winning opening is closed and the open state in which the winning opening is opened is not limited to the slide member, and can be appropriately changed. In the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 13A, a slide member (movable member 37b) that opens and closes the winning opening by sliding forward and backward is provided as an open / close member. However, for example, as shown in FIG. 13B, a turning member (movable member 37b) that opens and closes a winning opening by turning around a turning axis Z may be used.

  Further, the staying area for staying the game balls is not limited to the detour 37g (second flow path) and can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, the staying region is, for example, a space in which the upstream portion and the downstream portion are not separated, that is, a space obtained by removing a partition 373k that separates the upstream portion and the downstream portion of the detour 37g from the detour 37g. Alternatively, the space may be a space in which a part other than the front end part (part separating the entrance 37g1 and the exit 37g2) of the partition 373k is removed from the detour 37g.

  In the present embodiment, the ratio of game balls flowing from the first flow path (downflow path 37f) to the second flow path (detour path 37g) via one communication port (entrance 37g1) is determined by the other communication port. The ratio of the game balls flowing from the first flow path (downflow path 37f) to the second flow path (detour path 37g) through the mouth (outlet 37g2) is higher than the flow rate of the game balls, and one of the communication balls is connected to the slide member (movable member 37b). It is possible to provide a configuration in which the mouth is provided with a height difference (in the case of the present embodiment, a step or an inclination) arranged at a position higher than the other communication port. With this configuration, the game ball can smoothly roll on the first flow path (downflow path 37f) or the second flow path (detour path 37g), and thus the first flow path and the second flow path. Can prevent clogging of the ball.

  Further, in the present embodiment, on the upper surface of the slide member (the movable member 37b), in order to suppress the power of the game ball rolling in the first flow path (the downflow path 37f) or the second flow path (the detour path 37g). (In the case of the present embodiment, the lower wall protrusion 37b5, the left protrusion 37b6, and the right protrusion 37b7). With such a configuration, the staying time of the game ball staying on the upper surface of the slide member (the movable member 37b) can be further extended, so that the predetermined game state (in this embodiment, the time reduction state). ), It is possible to suppress a decrease in the number of game balls, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

  In the present embodiment, as the ball power suppressing portion, an initiating portion (projecting portion) such as the lower wall protruding portion 37b5, the upstream front wall protruding portion 371d, or the rear wall protruding portion 373d is provided on the downflow path 37f, and the detour path 37g is provided. Although raised portions (convex portions) such as the left protruding ridge portion 37b6, the right protruding ridge portion 37b7, and the intermediate protruding portion 373k1 are provided, the ball-power suppressing portion is not limited to these, and can be appropriately changed. In addition, as a ball-power suppressing portion, a downward portion (recess) may be provided in the downflow path 37f or the detour 37g. Specifically, for example, a meandering groove may be formed as a fold on the upper surface of the movable member 37b, and the game ball may roll while meandering along the groove. Further, as a ball power suppressing portion, an ups and downs (both up and down portions) may be provided in the downflow path 37f and the detour 37g so that the game ball rolls while meandering or the like due to the ups and downs. Further, the power suppressing portion is not limited to the raised portion (convex portion) or the recessed portion (recessed portion), and can be changed as appropriate.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the staying device having the game ball staying function (ordinary fluctuation winning device 37), a member that suppresses the ball (an obstacle nail, a windmill, a downflow path 615, a guiding section 616) is provided in the game area 32. Etc.), that is, a staying member having a game ball staying function is provided. Therefore, the game ball can be made to stay in the right game area by the stay device and the stay member, so that the rolling mode of the game ball in the right game area can be more enjoyed. In addition, a method of retaining game balls by providing irregularities on the surface, a method of retaining game balls by using a material having a high friction coefficient, and a method of performing a certain operation by a driving force of a driving source (such as a solenoid). A predetermined member or device may have a game ball retaining function by a method of retaining a ball, a method of retaining a game ball by providing a distribution device, or the like.

  In addition, since the normal variable winning device 37 can cause the game ball to stay in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine 10 by the starting portion and the detour 37g, a staying member (a staying device other than the normal variable winning device 37 may be used). ) Is preferably configured to allow the game balls to stay in a direction other than the front-back direction (the left-right direction or the up-down direction of the gaming machine 10). As a result, the gaming machine can be retained three-dimensionally by the retaining member (and / or the retaining device other than the ordinary variable winning device 37) and the ordinary variable winning device 37, so that the retaining time can be increased. And the interest in rolling game balls is improved.

  In addition, the exit 30c, the general winning opening 35, and the like (hereinafter, referred to as “the exit 30c”) may be provided in the middle of the detour 37g. As a result, it is possible to attract the player's attention to whether or not a game ball that fails to win a prize in the normal variable prize device 37 is to come out of the normal variable prize device 37. It is possible to adjust so that the rate does not become too large, and to prevent the occurrence of ball clogging in the bypass 37g.

  In the case where the out port 30c or the like is provided in the middle of the detour 37g, a game ball may flow into the out port 30c or the like when the movable member 37b operates. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 14, a through hole 37b11 is provided in a portion of the movable member 37b that forms the detour 37g when the movable member 37b is in the closed state. When the movable member 37b is in the open state (or may be in the closed state), the positions of the through-hole 37b11 and the out-port 30c in the vertical direction coincide (the through-hole 37b11 is located immediately above the out-port 30c). ), The game ball on the movable member 37b can flow into the out port 30c, and when the movable member 37b is in the closed state (or may be in the open state), the vertical movement between the through hole 37b11 and the out port 30c. The positions in the directions do not match (the through-hole 37b11 is displaced from immediately above the out port 30c), and the game ball on the movable member 37b cannot enter or hardly enter the out port 30c. is there.

FIG. 19 is a block diagram of a control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100. The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that controls the game in a comprehensive manner, and includes a game microcomputer (hereinafter, referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. A CPU unit 110, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port and a driver, and a data bus 140 connecting the CPU unit 110 with the input unit 120 and the output unit 130. .

  The CPU unit 110 includes a game microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator. The CPU 110 operates an operating clock of the CPU, a timer interrupt, and a clock used as a reference for a random number generation circuit. It has an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 to generate. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with a DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V generated by the power supply device 400, so that they can operate. Is done.

  The power supply device 400 includes a normal power supply including an AC-DC converter that generates the DC voltage of 32 V DC from a 24 V AC power supply and a DC-DC converter that generates a lower-level DC voltage such as 12 V DC and 5 V DC from the 32 V DC voltage. Unit 410, a backup power supply unit 420 for supplying a power supply voltage to the internal RAM of the game microcomputer 111 at the time of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring signal for notifying the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of the power failure. And a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a reset signal and a reset signal.

  In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, You may comprise so that it may be provided on a board | substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, as in the present embodiment, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on the power supply device 400 or a board different from the main board. Is provided, the cost can be reduced by excluding it from the replacement.

  The backup power supply unit 420 can be constituted by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (especially the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, so that the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or after the power is cut off. That is, the game control device 100 can store and retain information on the game even if a power failure occurs and power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, and can resume the game based on the stored information after the power failure is restored. Of game information storage and holding means. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32 V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops to 17 V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the reset signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, at the time of turning on the power or recovering from the power failure, the reset signal is output after a lapse of a predetermined time from that point.

  Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated. Based on the signal, the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 are forcibly initialized. Processing is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of a forced interrupt signal, and resets the entire control system.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (read only memory) 111B, and a RAM (random access memory) 111C that can be read and written at any time.

  The ROM 111B stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, various random number determination values, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores a work area of the CPU 111A and a storage area for various signals and random numbers during game control. Used as An electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used as the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C.

  The ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect contents, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to determine a variation pattern by referring to variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as start-up memory. In addition, the variation pattern table includes a variation variation pattern table selected when the result is incorrect, a large variation pattern table selected when the result is a large hit, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include tables for determining the latter half variation pattern which is the variation pattern after the reach state (the latter half variation group table, the latter half variation pattern selection table, etc.), and the variation before the reach state. A table for determining a first-half variation pattern that is a pattern (a first-half variation group table, a first-half variation pattern selection table, and the like) is included.

  Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes a gaming state (special gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the special result mode is reached, a part of the plurality of display results has already been derived at a stage where the display result has not been displayed yet. It refers to a display state in which the displayed result satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state deviates from the display condition of the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses to a stage before the display result is derived and displayed. No display mode. Then, for example, a state in which a variable display is performed by a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining a state in which special result modes are aligned (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device has progressed to a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It means a display state in which at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfy a condition for a special result mode.

  Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game fluctuates a plurality of pieces of identification information in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas on the display device for a predetermined time. In the case where the variable display is stopped in the order of left, right and middle after the display and the result mode is displayed, the state where the condition for the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, any one of the left, middle, and right variable display areas satisfies the condition for the special result mode (for example, the same state). The state that has become the identification information (excluding the special result mode) may be the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state.

  The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and reach effects having different possibilities (different expected values) of deriving special result modes include a normal reach (N reach), a special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premium reach are set. Note that the expected value increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. The reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when a special result mode is derived (a big hit) in the special figure variable display game. In other words, the special display mode may be included in the variable display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (in the case of a loss). Therefore, the state in which the reach state has occurred is a state in which the jackpot is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the reach state does not occur.

  The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and to generate and output drive signals for solenoids and display devices, and output the game machines. 10 overall control. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 has a jackpot random number for determining the hit of the special figure change display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the big hit symbol, and a change pattern (various types) in the special figure change display game. A random number generating circuit for generating a random number of a fluctuation pattern for determining a reach or non-reach variable display game (including an execution time of a variable display game), a hit random number for determining a hit of a normal map variable display game, and the like. And a clock generator that generates a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) for the CPU 111A and a clock that gives an update timing of the random number generation circuit to the CPU 111A based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. I have.

  Further, the CPU 111A obtains any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the process related to the special figure variation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result (big hit, small hit or miss) of the special figure change display game, the probability state of the special figure change display game as the current game state (low probability state or high probability state), Any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables is selected and acquired from the plurality of variation pattern tables based on the number of start storages. Here, when executing the special figure change display game, the CPU 111A constitutes a change distribution information obtaining means for obtaining any one change pattern table from among a plurality of change pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B.

  The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like. The payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100, and Control for paying out is performed. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball loan request signal from the card unit, and performs control for paying out the ball rental.

  The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a board radio wave sensor 62 for detecting emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a starting port 1 switch 36 a in the first starting winning port 36, and a starting port 2 switch in the normal variable winning device 37. 37a, a start opening 3 switch 97a in the second start winning opening 97, a winning opening switch 35a, and a plurality of (1 to x, two in this embodiment) large winning opening switches disposed in the special variable winning device 38. 38a, connected to the gate switches 34a in the normal starting gate 34, a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from these switches is input, and a positive logic signal of 0V-5V An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 is provided for converting the data into an I / F. The proximity I / F 121 has an input range of 7V to 11V, so that the lead wires of the sensor and the proximity switch are short-circuited incorrectly, the sensor and the switch are disconnected from the connector, and the lead wire is cut off and floated. It is configured to detect an abnormal state as described above and output an abnormality detection signal.

  The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the start port 3 switch 97a, the winning port switch 35a, the special winning port switch 38a, and the gate switch 34a are the second input. Input to port 123. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, a detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 and an abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124. Further, the third input port 124 has a detection signal of a fraudulent detection magnetic sensor 61 provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the gaming machine 10 or a glass frame opening detection provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the gaming machine 10. A detection signal of the switch 63 and a detection signal of a body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (body frame) 12 of the gaming machine 10 and the like are also input. Note that a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the gaming machine, and a detection signal may be input to the third input port 124.

  Further, of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the main substrate 100 to a not-shown test test device via the relay substrate 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, and the starting port 3 switch 97a are input to the second input port 123 and the gaming microcomputer 111. It is configured.

  As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, a voltage of 12 V is supplied to the proximity I / F 121 from the power supply device 400 in addition to a voltage of, for example, 5 V required for normal operation of the IC. Has become.

  The data held by the second input port 123 is read out by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123 to assert (change to an effective level) the enable signal CE2. be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124 and a first input port 122 described later.

  Also, the input unit 120 includes a frame radio wave unauthorized signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on detection of a radio wave by the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12), a payout busy signal (payout control device). Signal indicating whether or not 200 is ready to accept a command), abnormal payout status signal (status signal indicating abnormal payout), shot ball out switch signal (signal indicating lack of game balls before payout), overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of the game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (fullness)), a touch switch signal (input to a touch switch provided on the operation unit 24). A first input port 122 is provided for taking in a signal based on the input signal and supplying it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

  Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting a signal such as a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 or the like. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and are taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit on the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 for receiving signals from outside.

  On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to a reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. The reset signal RESET is output directly to the relay board 70 without passing through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test test signal held in a port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test test apparatus. It is configured as follows. Further, the configuration may be such that the reset signal RESET can be output to the trial test apparatus via the relay board 70. Note that the reset signal RESET is not supplied to each of the ports 122, 123, and 124 of the input unit 120. The data set to each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset in order to prevent a malfunction of the system, but each data of the input unit 120 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 disposed on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication route from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. Note that the one-way communication is such that no signal can be input to the game control device 100 from the effect control device 300 side.

  Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data indicating the special symbol information of the variable display game to the test shooting test device of the accredited organization (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the big hit, and the like via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko game machine as an actual machine (mass production sale product) installed in a game store. A detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a start-up switch, output from the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the trial test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

  On the other hand, a detection signal which cannot be supplied to the test shooting test device as it is, such as the magnetic sensor 61 or the board radio wave sensor 62, is once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. It is supplied from the data bus 140 to the trial test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that it is not possible. The relay board 70 is provided with a port for taking in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplying the signal to the test test apparatus, a connector for relaying and transmitting the signal line of the detection signal of the switch without passing through the buffer, and the like. ing. The chip enable signal CE output from the game microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the trial shooting test apparatus.

  In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and outputs a second winning opening solenoid 38b for opening the special variable winning device 38 and a second opening / closing data for the general-purpose solenoid 37c for opening the normal variable winning device 37. An output port 134 is provided. The output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of a segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the collective display device 50. A fourth output port 136 for outputting on / off data of a digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected is provided.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information about the gaming machine 10 such as big hit information to the external information terminal board 71. The external information terminal plate 71 is provided with a photorelay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device (a hall computer)) installed in a game arcade. It can be supplied to an external device. Further, a firing permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

  Further, a first driver (drive circuit) 138a that generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal in response to an opening / closing data signal of the special winning opening solenoid 38b or the general-purpose solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134 is output to the output unit 130. , A second driver 138 b for outputting an on / off drive signal for the segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the third output port 135, and a current for the collective display device 50 output from the fourth output port 136 A third driver 138c that outputs an on / off drive signal for the lead-in digit line, and a fourth driver 138d that outputs an external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device to the external information terminal board 71. Is provided.

  The first driver 138a is supplied with 32V DC from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage so as to drive a solenoid operated at 32V. In addition, 12 V DC is supplied to the second driver 138 b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for extracting the digit line corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

  The dynamic driving method is achieved by supplying a current to the anode terminal of the LED via a segment line by the second driver 138b outputting 12V, and extracting a current from the cathode terminal via the segment line by the third driver 138c outputting the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the sequentially selected LEDs to light them. The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with DC12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be communicable with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since such data transmission / reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

  Although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the first starting winning port 36, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, and the starting port 3 in the second starting winning port 97 The switch 97a, the winning opening switch 35a, the winning opening switch 38a, and the gate switch 34a are provided with a coil for detecting magnetism, and detect a game ball using a phenomenon that a magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil. Type magnetic proximity sensors (hereinafter referred to as proximity switches) are used. Also, a micro switch having mechanical contacts is provided for a glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the gaming machine 10 or a body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (body frame) 12 or the like. Can be used.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
The effect control device 300 includes a main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 composed of an amusement chip (IC), like the game microcomputer 111, and a video display on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. A video display processor (VDP) 312 as a graphic processor for performing image processing of the above, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling sound output for reproducing various melodies and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

  The main control microcomputer 311 stores a program ROM 321 composed of a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing programs to be executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 for providing a work area, and memory contents even if power is not supplied during a power failure. A FeRAM 323 that can be held and an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a clock unit that generates information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day of the week, time, and the like) are connected. Note that a RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the game microcomputer 111, determines the contents of the production, instructs the VDP 312 on the contents of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to reproduce sound, turns on the decoration lamp, And processes such as drive control of the solenoid and management of the production time.

  The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing an image. The VDP 312 includes an image ROM 325 storing character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 are connected.

  Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in a parallel manner, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission.

  From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronizing signal VSYNC for synchronizing the video of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamp provided on the glass frame 15 or the game board 30, and a synchronizing signal for giving data transmission timing STS is input. Note that the VDP 312 notifies the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of the interrupt signals INT0 to INT and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing to the VRAM. Signal WAIT and the like are also input.

  The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 in the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. The video data, the horizontal synchronizing signal HSYNC, and the vertical synchronizing signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313. The video generated by the VDP 312 is transmitted to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

  A sound ROM 327 in which sound data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 includes an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving an upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and a lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and is provided with a sound source LSI 314. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

  Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100. Through this command I / F 331, the decoration special figure reservation number command, the decoration special figure command, the fluctuation command, the stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 are converted into the production control command signal (production command). ). Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC3.3V, the command I / F 331 has a signal level conversion function. I have.

  In addition, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), and a glass frame 15. A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 or the like) having the provided LED (light emitting diode), a board effect provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A board effect movable body control circuit 334 that drives and controls the device 44 (for example, a movable character or the like that enhances effect effects in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41) is provided. These control circuits 332 to 334 for driving and controlling a lamp, a motor, a solenoid, and the like are connected to a main control microcomputer 311 via an address / data bus 340. In addition, even if a frame effect device provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating an effect device) is provided on the glass frame 15 and a frame effect movable body control circuit for controlling the drive of the frame effect device is provided. good.

  Furthermore, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 29 provided on the glass frame 15, an initial position of a motor in the board effect device 44, and the like. The function of detecting the on / off state of the effect switch 47 (effect motor switch) for detecting the state and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300 And a switch input circuit 336 for detecting the input and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 drives a motor and a solenoid to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration and to electronic components controlled by the same. In addition to DC32V, a display device 41 composed of a liquid crystal panel, a DC12V for driving a motor and an LED, a DC5V for a power supply voltage of a command I / F 331, and a DC15V for driving a motor, an LED and a speaker are generated. It is configured to Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC-DC for generating 3.3 V DC or 1.2 V DC based on 5 V DC is used. A DC converter is provided in effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

  The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to reset the device. In addition, control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET) for driving and controlling a VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), a sound source LSI 314, an amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving a speaker, a lamp, a motor, and the like are output from the main control microcomputer 311. Signal) to reset them. Further, a cooling FAN 45 for cooling various parts of the gaming machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

[Game state transition diagram (game flow)]
Next, transition (transition) of a game state by game control of the game control device 100 will be described. FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating a game state transition diagram (game flow) showing a transition of the game state in the present embodiment. The game state includes a normal game state ST1, a first specific game state ST2, a second specific game state ST3, a third specific game state ST4, a fourth specific game state ST5, and a fifth specific game state ST6. In addition, other special game states include a first special game state based on a first special result (big hit) and a second special game state based on a second special result (small hit). In each game state, the special figure probability from which the first special result to be controlled by the game control device 100 is derived, an effect mode controlled by the effect control device 300 to determine the effect mode of the game, The main starting area, which is the starting area to be targeted, the main fluctuation special figure, which is the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be mainly executed, and the launch direction of the game ball are determined.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to aim at a prize in the first starting winning opening 36 by left-handing, and to aim at a prize to the normal variable winning device 37 and the second starting winning opening 97 by right-handed. I can do it. That is, it is possible to select a starting area to be aimed at by a player's intention. Further, in each game state, the game is designed on the assumption that the game progresses mainly in one of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, and the player plays the game according to this design. In order to progress, it is configured such that it is more advantageous for the player to progress the game mainly with one special figure variable display game that is determined to be the main in the design. In the following description, one special figure variation display game determined to be main in each game state may be referred to as main variation, and the other special figure variation display game may be referred to as irregular variation.

  The normal game state ST1 is a state in which the special figure probability is low, and there is no Tokuden support for improving the open time per unit time of the ordinary fluctuation winning device 37 to facilitate prize winning. This is a state in which there is no time reduction to shorten the fluctuation time of the figure fluctuation display game. The effect mode that defines the effect mode is a normal mode. The main fluctuation special figure is a special figure 1 fluctuation display game. The main starting area is a first starting winning opening 36, and the shooting direction is left-handed to aim at the first starting winning opening 36. That is, the special figure 1 variable display game is designed to be the main change, and the special figure 2 variable display game is to be the irregular change. As described later, in the normal game state ST1, a very long fluctuation time is set for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. As a result, the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes inefficient in time, so that the player does not select the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game aiming at the small hit in the normal gaming state ST1. .

  The first specific game state ST2 is a state in which the special figure probability is a high probability state, and a state in which there is a general-purpose support for improving the opening time per unit time of the ordinary variable prize winning device 37 to facilitate winning. If there is a public figure support, there is also a time reduction to shorten the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game or the general figure fluctuation display game. The effect mode that defines the effect mode is a chance mode. The main fluctuation special figure is the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, but the main starting area is the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and the firing direction is right-handed in order to aim at the normal fluctuation winning device 37. That is, the special figure 1 variable display game is designed to be the main change, and the special figure 2 variable display game is to be the irregular change. In the first specific game state ST2, the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is shorter than that in the normal game state ST1, and the time is right-handed to aim at the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and the special figure 1 is displayed. It is more advantageous for the player to play the variable display game.

  The second specific game state ST3 is the same as the first specific game state ST2 except that the special figure probability is a low probability state. In the third specific game state ST4, the effect mode that defines the effect mode is the probable change mode, and the end condition of the general-purpose support is the start of the special figure change display game in which the falling lottery is won or the big hit is started. This is the same as the one specific game state ST2.

  In the fourth specific game state ST5, the special figure probability is a high probability state, and there is no Toden support for improving the open time per unit time of the ordinary variable prize device 37 to facilitate winning, and the special figure variable display. It is a state where there is a time reduction to shorten the fluctuation time of the game. The effect mode that defines the effect mode is a small hit RUSH. The main fluctuation special figure is a special figure 2 fluctuation display game, and the main starting area is the second starting winning opening 97, and the firing direction is right-handed in order to aim at the second starting winning opening 97. That is, the special figure 2 variable display game is designed to be the main change, and the special figure 1 variable display game is to be the irregular change.

  In the fourth specific game state ST5, the time required for the fluctuation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is shorter than that in the normal game state ST1. Playing the two-variation display game is more advantageous for the player. In the special figure 2 variable display game, the small hit probability is higher than the special figure 1 variable display game, and the small hit is more likely to be won than the big hit. It occurs frequently and increases the player's ball holding. Since the small hit occurs at a high frequency, the effect mode is a mode called a small hit RUSH.

  The fifth specific game state ST6 is the same as the fourth specific game state ST5 except that the special figure probability is a low probability state. The effect mode that defines the effect mode is a small hit RUSH similar to that of the fourth specific game state ST5. However, in the fifth specific game state ST6, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes long and the small hit occurs. Can hardly hope. The main fluctuation special figure is a special figure 2 fluctuation display game, and the main starting area is the second starting winning opening 97, and the firing direction is right-handed in order to aim at the second starting winning opening 97. That is, the special figure 2 variable display game is designed to be the main change, and the special figure 1 variable display game is to be the irregular change.

  Of the six gaming states, the normal gaming state ST1 is the most disadvantageous state for the player. The second specific game state ST3 is a state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state ST1 because of the presence of the ordinary power support. Since the first specific game state ST2 and the third specific game state ST4 are high probability states, This is a more advantageous state for the player than the gaming state ST1 and the second specific gaming state ST3. Further, the fourth specific game state ST5 is a state in which the number of balls held by the player increases due to frequent small hits, so that the normal game state ST1, the first specific game state ST2, the second specific game state ST3, and the third specific state. This is a more advantageous state for the player than the gaming state ST4. The fifth specific game state ST6 has almost the same advantage as the normal game state ST1, but may be more advantageous than the normal game state ST1 in that the special figure variation display game in which the result is a big hit is executed. I can say.

  The transition of the gaming state is to end the special gaming state based on the derivation of the special result, exhaust the specified number of games, win the falling lottery that is a transition lottery to the low probability state, start the special figure change display game that becomes a big hit It is performed by Basically, if the special result that has triggered the start of the special game state is a probability change big hit to be a high probability state after the end of the special game state, the process proceeds to the first specific game state ST2, In the case of a normal big hit in which the low probability state is set after the end of the gaming state, the process shifts to the second specific gaming state ST3.

  In the second specific game state ST3, when the special figure change display game is executed 100 times (the number of times of support) from the end of the special game state, the process shifts to the normal game state ST1. In addition, when the player has won the falling lottery in the first specific game state ST2, the process shifts to the second specific game state ST3. In this case, the period of staying in the second specific game state ST3 is a period from the end of the special game state to the execution of 100 special figure change display games including the number of games executed in the first specific game state ST2. . In the first specific game state ST2 and the second specific game state ST3, the effect mode is the same chance mode, so that it is difficult for the player to grasp that the mode has shifted.

  In the first specific game state ST2, when the special drawing variation display game is executed 100 times without winning the drop lottery and without deriving the special result, the process shifts to the third specific game state ST4. Here, the effect mode is the probable change mode, so that the player can recognize that the state is the high probability state. If the player has won the falling lottery in the third specific game state ST4, the game shifts to the normal game state ST1. In the third specific game state ST4, when the special figure change display game which is a big hit is started without winning the falling lottery, the process shifts to the fourth specific game state ST5.

  The fourth specific game state ST4 stays only during the period of executing the special figure change display game which is a big hit. If the special figure 1 variable display game is a special figure variable display game with a big hit, the special game state based on the small hit is executed after the small hit is derived in the special figure 2 variable display game. Since the variable display game is interrupted, the user stays for a period including the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game and the interruption period.

  By providing the fourth specific game state ST5, it is possible to provide a period in which the player's ball is increased by a small hit before the special game state based on the big hit is started, and in the fourth specific game state ST5. With the increase in the number of balls held by the player and the subsequent increase in the number of balls held in the special game state, many benefits can be provided to the player. In particular, the situation in which the game can shift to the fourth specific game state ST5 is a so-called fit in which the next big hit is not derived even if the special figure change display game is executed 100 times after the special game state based on the probability change big hit is completed. In such a situation, it is possible to give a profit to the player in such a situation, so that it is possible to eliminate the dissatisfaction that the big hit is not derived. On the other hand, it is possible to give the player an expectation of the fitting state, which is not present in conventional gaming machines.

  If the player has won the falling lottery in the fourth specific game state ST5, the process proceeds to the fifth specific game state ST6. Since the effect mode is the same as the fourth specific game state ST5, there is no apparent change, but in the fifth specific game state ST6, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game has a long fluctuation time, so the special figure 1 fluctuation In both the display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, the variable display is performed, and the occurrence of small hits is almost not expected. This state continues until a big hit is derived in the special figure 1 variable display game.

  In other words, the special figure variation display game in which the result is a big hit has already been started at the time of transition to the fourth specific game state ST5, and the special figure probability in the fourth specific game state ST5 is not so great for the player. It makes no sense. However, by shifting to the fifth specific game state ST6 in which little win can hardly be derived due to the winning of the falling lottery, new gaming properties by the falling lottery can be provided and the interest of the game can be provided. Can be improved.

  In the above-described example, in the case where the falling lottery is won during the fourth specific game state ST5, the state shifts to the low probability state and shifts to the fifth specific game state ST6. However, the fourth specific game state ST5 is maintained. In this case, the frequency of derivation of small hits may not be changed so that the player can surely obtain profits during the period of execution of the special figure variable display game in which the result is a big hit. In the case where the falling lottery is won during the fourth specific game state ST5, the process shifts to the fifth specific game state ST6, but may shift to the normal game state ST1. In the fifth specific game state ST6, the effect mode is set to be the same as the fourth specific game state ST5. However, an effect mode set only in the fifth specific game state ST6 may be provided.

  22 and 23 show an example of the progress of the game. FIG. 22 (a) shows a case in which a falling lottery is won before the specified number (here, 100 times) of the special figure change display game is executed after the probability change big hit occurs. In this example, first, the game mode is the normal game state ST1 with the low probability state and no ordinary power support, and the effect is the normal mode effect corresponding to the normal game state ST1. Since the normal game state ST1 is a state in which the game is progressed by performing left-handing, the game control device 100 turns off the first game state display unit 56. Further, effect control device 300 does not perform right-turn instruction notification for instructing right-turn.

  The result of the special figure 1 variable display game executed in the normal game state ST1 is a probability variable jackpot that forms the first special result, and the state is the first special game state after the end of the special figure 1 variable display game (t11). . In the first special game state, the special variable prize winning device 38 is opened and a large amount of prize balls can be obtained. Further, the effect state is a first special game effect corresponding to the first special game state. The first special game state is a state in which the game is progressed by right-handing. Therefore, the game control device 100 sets the first game state display unit 56 to a lighting state. Further, effect control device 300 performs right-handed instruction notification to instruct right-handedness.

  When the first special game state ends, a first specific game state ST2 is set in which the high probability state and the ordinary power support are provided (t12). In the first specific game state ST2, it is easy to win a prize in the normal variable prize device 37, and thus the game proceeds mainly with the special figure 1 variable display game. Further, the variation time of the special figure 1 variable display game is shorter than that in the normal game state ST1, and a large number of special figure variable display games can be executed in a short time. In this first specific game state, the effect state is a chance mode effect. Since the first specific game state ST2 is a state in which a game is made to proceed by right-handing, the game control device 100 sets the first game state display unit 56 to a lighting state. Further, effect control device 300 performs right-handed instruction notification to instruct right-handedness.

  In this example, a drop lottery is won in the first specific game state ST2, and based on this, the state shifts to the low probability state to be the second specific game state ST3 (t13). Puden support will remain as it is. Also in the second specific game state ST3, it is easy to win the normal variable winning device 37, so that the game proceeds mainly with the special figure 1 variable display game. Further, the variation time of the special figure 1 variable display game is shorter than that in the normal game state ST1, and a large number of special figure variable display games can be executed in a short time. Even in the second specific game state, the effect state is a state in which the chance mode effect is maintained, making it difficult to grasp that the player has won the falling lottery. Since the second specific game state ST3 is a state in which the game is progressed by right-handing, the game control device 100 sets the first game state display unit 56 to a lighting state. Further, effect control device 300 performs right-handed instruction notification to instruct right-handedness.

  Thereafter, in the second specific game state ST3, when the number of executions of the special figure variable display game from the end (t12) of the first special game state reaches a specified number, the general power support ends and the normal game state ST1 is established ( t14). In this example, since the probability state is already in the low probability state, the low probability state is maintained. In addition, the game control device 100 turns off the first game state display unit 56 because the state is set so that the game progresses by performing left-handing with the shift to the normal game state ST1. Further, effect control device 300 ends the right-handing instruction notification for instructing right-handing. The satisfaction of the transition condition here is that the 101st special figure change display game is started in the normal probability state counted from the end of the first special game state. In this case, with the start of the 101st special figure change display game in which the transition condition is satisfied, the firing direction in which the game proceeds and the notification mode of the firing direction are changed so as to correspond to the shifted game state. ing.

  FIG. 22 (b) shows a case in which a predetermined number of special figure change display games are executed after a certain-variable big hit has occurred and the falling lottery has not been won. In the normal game state ST1, the probability change jackpot is derived and becomes the first special game state (t21). After the first special game state ends, the first specific game state becomes ST2 (t22), which is the same as FIG. 22 (a). It is.

  In this example, the number of times of execution of the special figure change display game from the end (t22) of the first special game state while the first specific game state ST2 is not won in the first specific game state ST2 without winning the fall lottery. Here, it has reached 100 times) (t23). In this case, the game shifts to the third specific game state ST4 after the end of the special figure variable display game having the specified number.

  Also in the third specific game state ST4, the high probability state and the general-purpose support are provided, and in the second specific game state ST3, it is easy to win the ordinary variable prize device 37. Therefore, the game progresses mainly in the special figure 1 variable display game. I do. Further, in the third specific game state, the effect state is the probable change mode effect, and it is possible to clearly grasp that the player is in the high probability state. Since this third specific game state ST4 is a state in which the game is made to proceed by right-handing, the game control device 100 sets the first game state display section 56 to the lighting state. Further, effect control device 300 performs right-handed instruction notification to instruct right-handedness.

  Thereafter, when the player wins the drop lottery in the third specific game state ST4, the state shifts to the low probability state, the general-purpose support ends, and the state shifts to the normal game state ST1 (t24). The winning of the falling lottery is performed at the start of the special figure change display game. When the falling lottery is won, a transition effect (first specific effect) is performed from the start of the special figure change display game. As will be described later, this transition effect is executed commonly in the case of starting the special figure variable display game in which the big hit occurs in the third specific game state ST4 and in the case of winning the falling lottery in the third specific game state ST4. In this way, it is not possible to immediately understand that the player has won the falling lottery or that the player has won a big hit, thereby raising the player's sense of anxiety and expectation, and improving the interest of the game.

  In addition, the game control device 100 turns off the first game state display unit 56 because the state is set so that the game progresses by performing left-handing with the shift to the normal game state ST1. Further, effect control device 300 ends the right-handing instruction notification for instructing right-handing. Therefore, the right-turn instruction is not notified in the transition effect.

  FIG. 23A shows a case where the first special result is derived in the first specific game state ST2. In this case, even if the special figure change display game as the first special result is started (t31), the probability state remains the high probability state and the general power support remains. The production state is also kept as the chance mode production. Then, when the special figure change display game ends, the special game state is started (t23). With the start of the special game state, the state shifts to the low probability state, and the public telephone support ends (t32). Further, in this example, the normal jackpot that forms the first special result is derived, and when the first special game state based on the first special result ends, the second specific game state in which the low probability state and the general power support are provided. ST3 is reached (t33).

  In addition, since the first specific game state ST2, the first special game state, and the second specific game state ST3 are all states in which a game is made to proceed by right-handing, the game control device 100 (1) The game state display section 56 is maintained in the lighting state. Further, effect control device 300 maintains right-handing instruction notification for instructing right-handing.

  Similarly, when the first special result is derived in the second specific game state ST3, the probability state remains the low probability state even when the special figure variable display game that is the first special result is started. Puden support is also left as it is. Furthermore, the production state is also kept as the chance mode production. Then, with the start of the special game state, the low probability state is maintained, and the general power support ends. That is, the game state does not change even if the special figure variable display game as the first special result is started in the first specific game state ST2 or the second specific game state ST3.

  FIG. 23B shows a case where the first special result is derived in the third specific gaming state ST4. In this case, when the special figure change display game as the first special result is started, the probability state is kept in the high probability state, but the general power support ends, and the fourth specific game state ST5 is set (t40). . By ending the Toden support, winning in the second starting winning opening 97 becomes possible, and in the fourth specific game state ST5, the game proceeds mainly with the special figure 2 variable display game. The effect state is a small hit RUSH effect corresponding to the fourth specific game state. This fourth specific game state ST5 is continued until the end of the special figure 1 variable display game.

  At the start of the fourth specific gaming state ST5, a transition effect is performed. The transition effect is executed in the case of a big hit in the third specific game state ST4 or in the case of winning the falling lottery, but in the case of winning the falling lottery as shown in FIG. Right notification instruction notification is not performed from the start of the special figure change display game. Therefore, when the right-handed instruction is notified in the transition effect in the case of a big hit, the player can understand that the big hit will be made based on the notification. Therefore, the right-handed instruction notification is temporarily not displayed during execution of the transition effect (t40 to t41).

  However, the first game state display unit 56 is maintained in a lighting state corresponding to the game state. That is, during the transition effect period, the display of the first game state display unit 56 and the execution of the right-hand instruction notification do not correspond to each other. Therefore, for the player who knows the display of the first game state display unit 56, the player transitions to the fourth specific game state ST5 earlier than the player who does not know the display, that is, knows that a big hit will occur. Can be.

  In addition, the timing (t41) at which the right strike instruction notification is restarted is, for example, a timing at which it is determined that a transition to the fourth specific game state ST5 is made in the transition effect. Of course, the present invention is not limited to this timing. For example, if the right-handed instruction notification is restarted earlier than this timing, it is possible to suggest that the transition to the fourth specific game state ST5 is made by the right-handed instruction notification, that is, a big hit. .

  The fourth specific game state ST5 is a game state in which a special figure 2 variable display game in which the probability of a small hit is higher than that of the special figure 1 variable display game can be executed with high frequency. In the example of FIG. 23B, after the start of the fourth specific game state ST5 (t40), the second starting winning opening 97 is won and the special figure 2 variable display game is started (t42). This special figure 2 variable display game is over with the result out. After that, the special start 2 change display game is started by newly winning the second start winning opening 97 (t43). The special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit in which the result is a second special result, and the special special figure 2 variable display game is brought into a second special game state with the end of the special figure 2 variable display game (t45 to t46). In the second special game state, the special variable prize winning device 38 is opened so that a prize ball can be obtained. Since the second special game state is also a state in which the game proceeds by right-handing, the game control device 100 keeps the first game state display section 56 in the lighting state. Further, effect control device 300 maintains right-handing instruction notification for instructing right-handing.

  The special figure 1 variable display game is suspended due to the derivation of the small hit in the special figure 2 variable display game (t44), and the special figure 1 variable display game is restarted with the end of the second special game state (t46). . Since the variable time does not progress during the interruption, the execution time of the special figure 1 variable display game is set to the time set at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game and the stop display time per small hit of the special figure 2 variable display game. And the period of the second special game state. Further, the special figure 1 variable display game that is the first special result started in the third specific game state ST4 is longer than the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game that is the first special result in the first specific game state ST2. It has been long. Therefore, it is possible to secure a sufficient period of the fourth specific gaming state ST5.

  After the second special game state ends, when a game ball newly wins in the second starting winning opening 97, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed (t47). After that, there are a plurality of executions of the special figure 2 variable display game and the occurrence of the second special game state, so that a large amount of prize balls can be obtained.

  Then, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends, the first special result is stopped and displayed (t48), and when the stop display time ends, the special figure 1 variable display game ends (t49). Accordingly, the fourth special game state ST5 ends and the first special game state starts (t49). In addition, with the first special result being derived in the special figure 1 variable display game, the running special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly ended with a loss result (t48).

  As described above, by setting the fourth specific game state ST5 before the first special game state, a prize ball that can be acquired based on the small hit generated in the fourth specific game state ST5, and the first special game state The player can obtain a large amount of prize balls by the prize balls obtainable by the player.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 23B, in the third specific game state ST4, the general-purpose support is ended along with the start of the special figure change display game, which is a big hit, as shown in FIG. 22B. Thus, in the third specific game state ST4, the change in the general power support is the same as in the case where the falling lottery is won. Thereby, it is possible to notify that the end of the general-purpose support in the third specific gaming state ST4 causes the occurrence of one of a falling lottery winning event and an event of a big hit, which is greatly different in value for the player. Gives a sense of anxiety and expectation to the game, and can enhance the interest of the game.

  In particular, in both the case of starting the special figure fluctuation display game in which the big hit occurs in the third specific game state ST4 and the case of winning the falling lottery in the third specific game state ST4, the fixed figure fluctuation display game is constant. By executing a common transition effect for the time and not informing the right-handing instruction, it is possible to prevent the player from immediately knowing that he / she has won the falling lottery or that it is a big hit. The feeling of anxiety and expectation can be increased, and the interest of the game can be further improved.

  FIG. 24 shows an example of display on the display device 41. FIG. 24A shows an example of a display in the normal gaming state ST1. In the center of the display area of the display device 41, a first decorative special figure 1 game display unit for displaying a decorative special figure variable display game related to the special figure 1 variable display game among the first decorative games forming the decorative special figure variable display game. 85a are provided. Here, the decoration special figure variation display game is displayed by variably displaying the identification information in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas and then stopping the display. The result is displayed in a result mode constituted by a combination of three pieces of identification information, and a result mode of a big hit, a small hit, or a loss is displayed according to the result of the special figure change display game. In the normal gaming state ST1, the special figure 1 variable display game is the main change, so that the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game that is an irregular change is not displayed but displayed. Is also good.

  In addition, a first storage display unit 83a that displays a decoration special figure start storage display corresponding to the first start memory is provided at the lower center of the display area. The decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the first memory display unit 83a is one-to-one corresponding to the first start memory and is displayed side by side in the storage order. Here, there are three first start memories. It is shown that. The decorative special figure start storage display at the left end is the decorative special figure start storage display corresponding to the first start memory stored first, and shifts to the left every time the display is completed. In addition, it is possible to suggest the result of the pre-reading such as the result of the special figure 1 change display game and the change pattern corresponding to each start memory by the display mode. In FIG. 24A, a look-ahead effect in which the display mode of the decoration special figure start storage display is changed for the first start memory having the first digestion order is performed.

  On the left side of the first storage display unit 83a, there is provided an execution storage display unit 84 that displays information about the start storage corresponding to the currently executed special figure change display game. At the start of the special figure change display game, the decoration special figure start storage display at the left end of the first storage display section 83a shifts to the running storage change display section 84, and the result and the change of the special figure change display game to be executed are displayed. A pattern or the like is suggested by its display mode.

  In the upper right portion of the display area, a first start storage number display section 86a for displaying the first start storage number is provided. In the first start storage number display section 86a, the number of first start memories is displayed by numerals, and FIG. 24A shows that there are three first start memories. An effect mode display section 87 for displaying the current effect mode is provided at the upper left of the display area. Here, the normal mode, that is, the normal game state ST1 is shown.

  In this embodiment, since the second start memory for holding the start of the special figure 2 change display game is not generated, a start memory display unit for displaying the second start memory is not provided. When the second start memory for holding the start of the display game is generated, the second start memory is displayed similarly to the first memory display unit 83a and the first start memory number display unit 86a.

  Also, the display in the first specific game state ST2, the second specific game state ST3, and the third specific game state ST4 is basically different from the display of FIG. A similar display is performed.

  FIG. 24B shows an example of display in the fourth specific game state ST5 and the fifth specific game state ST6. In the upper right portion of the display area of the display device 41, a first start memory number display section 86a for displaying the number of first start memories, and a special figure 1 variable display of the first decorative game forming the decorative special figure variable display game. A first special special figure 1 game display section 85a for displaying a special special figure change display game related to the game, and a special special figure change display game related to the special special figure 1 change display game among the second decorative games forming the special display special figure change display game Is displayed on the display unit 88a.

  In the first start storage number display section 86a, the number of the first start storage is displayed by a numeral, and FIG. 24B shows that the first start storage is zero. The first decorative special figure 1 game display section 85c displays the decorative special figure variable display game by variably displaying the identification information in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas and then stopping and displaying the identification information. The second decorative special figure 1 game display section 88a displays the decorative special figure variable display game by variably displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information and then stopping the display. The result is displayed in a result mode constituted by one piece of identification information, and one of “○” indicating a big hit, “Δ” indicating a small hit, and “X” indicating a loss is displayed.

  At the lower right of the display area, a first decorative special figure 2 game display unit 85b for displaying a decorative special figure variable display game related to the special figure 2 variable display game among the first decorative games forming the decorative special figure variable display game, A second decorative special figure 2 game display section 88b for displaying a decorative special figure variable display game related to the special figure 2 variable display game among the second decorative games forming the decorative special figure variable display game is provided.

  The first decorative special figure 2 game display section 85b displays the decorative special figure change display game in the same manner as the first decorative special figure 1 game display section 85a. In addition, the second decorative special figure 2 game display section 88b displays the decorative special figure change display game in the same manner as the second decorative special figure 1 game display section 88a. In this embodiment, since the second start memory for holding the start of the special figure 2 variable display game is not generated, the second start memory number display unit for displaying the number of the second start memories is not provided. When the second start memory for holding the start of the special figure 2 variable display game is generated, the second start memory for displaying the number of the second start memories in the same manner as the first start memory number display section 86a. A number display section is provided.

  In the center of the display area, an effect display unit 89 for effect display by a character or the like is provided. The effect display section 89 mainly displays an effect according to the fluctuation pattern and the result of the special figure 2 variable display game, which is the main fluctuation. And the results can be understood.

  In the fourth specific game state ST5 and the fifth specific game state ST6, a display in which the identification information is largely displayed as in the first decorative special figure 1 game display section 85a of FIG. 24A is not performed. The result mode may be displayed in a large size only when it is derived. For example, the identification information is enlarged from the first decorative special figure 1 game display unit 85a or the first decorative special figure 2 game display unit 85b corresponding to the special figure variable display game from which the result is derived, and displayed in the center of the display area. In such a manner, the display is performed such that the identification information is reduced on the original display unit at the end of the stop display time. Even during such a display, the display of the first decorative special figure 1 game display unit 85a and / or the first decorative special figure 2 game display unit 85b is maintained.

  The effect mode display section 87 indicates that the small hit RUSH mode is set, that is, the fourth specific game state ST5 or the fifth specific game state ST6. Further, at the lower left of the display area, there is provided a prize ball number display section 91 indicating the number of prize balls acquired in the second special game state during execution of the second special game state. Here, it is shown that 30 prize balls have been obtained in the second special game state. Further, in the lower left portion of the display area, the total number of prize balls indicating the number of prize balls acquired from the start of the fourth specific game state ST5 at the end of the third specific game state ST4 to the transition to the first special game state. A display unit 92 is provided. Here, it is shown that 600 prize balls have been acquired so far.

  The accumulated number of prize balls in the first special game state is also added in the total number of prize balls display section 92, and the first special game state is started from the start of the fourth specific game state ST5 following the end of the third specific game state ST4. The number of prize balls acquired until the end of the state may be indicated. Furthermore, the number of prize balls acquired in the first specific game state ST2, the second specific game state ST3, and the third specific game state ST4 are also added, and are obtained from the end of the normal game state ST1 to the return to the normal game state ST1. The number of awarded balls may be indicated. However, in the first specific game state ST2, the second specific game state ST3, and the third specific game state ST4, although a certain number of prize balls are obtained, the ball is consumed more than that, so the first specific game state ST2. The number of prize balls in the second specific game state ST3 and the third specific game state ST4 may not be added.

  At the lower center of the display area, there is provided a continuous number display section 96 that starts when a predetermined start condition is satisfied and displays the number of big hits in a specific period that ends when a predetermined end condition is satisfied. The continuous number display section 96 can be displayed in a game state other than the normal game state ST1. FIG. 24B shows that three big hits have occurred.

  The start condition of the specific period is established when a big hit is derived in the normal game state ST1, and the end condition of the specific period is established by returning from the game state other than the normal game state ST1 to the normal game state ST1. Therefore, in principle, the continuous number display section 96 displays the number of jackpots generated before returning to the normal game state ST1 as the first hit in the normal game state ST1, which is the jackpot in which the start condition of the specific period is satisfied. Is displayed.

  However, in a specific case, exceptionally, even in the case of the jackpot derived in the normal game state ST1, the addition result up to that point is taken over without being set as the first time. As a specific case in the present embodiment, a jackpot is derived in the special figure variation display game that has been won in the fall lottery, or the other one started before the end of the one special figure variation display game that has won the fall lottery There is a case where the special figure change display game becomes a big hit and shifts to the specific game state again.

  For example, when the special drawing change display game in the third specific game state ST4 wins the fall drawing, the game shifts to the normal game state ST1 at the start of the special figure change display game. During the execution of the variable display game, a first specific effect for indicating or notifying that the player has won the falling lottery is performed. In the first specific effect, since it is clearly notified that the special drawing variable display game has been won just before the end of the special figure variable display game, the player is notified that the special drawing variable display game has been won until the special variable display game ends. I do not know it clearly and still play games, believing that it is still in a high probability state. Further, in this case, there may be an effect of suggesting or notifying that the special figure change display game which is a big hit is being executed in parallel. Also, when a special figure change display game that has won the falling lottery results in a big hit, the fact that the first lottery has won the falling lottery as a result of the first specific effect may not be clearly notified. For this reason, if the value of the continuous number display section 96 is reset only on the condition that the game mode has shifted to the normal game state ST1, a player who thinks that the specific period has continued may have a distrust.

  For this reason, if a special figure change display game that has won the falling lottery or a special figure change display game that is started before the end of the special figure change display game that has won the fall lottery, Even when the result is derived in the normal gaming state ST1, it is treated in the same manner as the big hit derived in the specific gaming state. Addition is carried over.

  Similarly, when the accumulated prize ball number display section 92 shows the number of prize balls acquired from the end of the normal game state ST1 to the return to the normal game state ST1, similarly, the special figure fluctuation display won in the fall lottery If a jackpot is derived in a game or a special figure change display game that is started before the end of the special figure change display game that has won the falling lottery, it is treated in the same way as the big hit derived in the specific game state. The addition is performed by taking over the number of award balls before shifting to the state ST1.

  In other words, effect control device 300 can set a specific period that is started when a predetermined start condition is satisfied and ends when a predetermined end condition is satisfied. (The number of big hits and the number of acquired prize balls) can be accumulated and reported. In addition, in a specific case, the information before shifting to the normal gaming state ST1 is taken over and the addition is performed.

  In addition, a right-handing instruction notification 99 for instructing right-handing is displayed at the lower right of the display area. This right strike instruction notification 99 includes a first specific game state ST2, a second specific game state ST3, a third specific game state ST4, and a first special game state, in addition to the fourth specific game state ST5 and the fifth specific game state ST6. And the second special game state. In the state where the game proceeds with the left strike, the right strike instruction information 99 is not displayed, but in the state where the game proceeds with the right strike, the right strike instruction information 99 may not be displayed (for example, t40 to t41 in FIG. 23B). ). That is, the fact that the right-handed instruction notification 99 is not displayed is not a state that clearly indicates that the vehicle is left-handed.

  FIGS. 24 (c) to (h) show an example of a transition effect executed when a falling lottery is won or a big hit occurs in the third specific game state ST4. When the special figure 1 variable display game is started as shown in FIG. 24 (c), the variable display is started in the first decorative special figure 1 game display section 85a, and thereafter, transition is made as shown in FIG. 24 (d). The production starts. This transition effect is an effect in which the ally character 89a and the enemy character 89b fight, and the result of the battle notifies the result of the special figure change display game and the presence / absence of the drop lottery. In addition, the special-figure-variation display game and the start memory display are performed in the same manner as that shown in FIG.

  With the start of the transition effect, the right-handed instruction notification 99 ends. As described above, this is performed when the transition effect is a big hit (maintain right-handed) or when the player has won the falling lottery (shifted to left-handed). This is because they can be grasped.

  As shown in FIG. 24 (e), an effect in which the character fights is performed, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the result of the battle is shown. If the result is a loss or a small hit in the special figure change display game that has won the falling lottery, the result is that the ally character 89a is defeated as shown in FIG. Thereafter, the process proceeds to the effect of the normal game state ST1 as shown in FIG. In addition, an instruction display for instructing to return to the left-handing when performing the effect in the normal gaming state ST1 is performed. On the other hand, when the result is a big hit in the special figure change display game, the result is that the ally character 89a wins as shown in FIG. After that, the process proceeds to the effect of the fourth specific game state ST5 as shown in FIG. 24 (b), and the right strike instruction notification 99 is restarted.

  Further, when the result is out of place or a small hit in the special figure change display game without winning the falling lottery, a transition effect may be performed as a so-called gaseous effect. In this case, after the character performs an effect of fighting as shown in FIG. 24 (e), the result of the draw is made as shown in FIG. 24 (h). After that, the process returns to the effect of the third specific game state ST4 as shown in FIG.

  Note that the transition timing to the fourth specific game state is at the start of the special figure change display game that is a big hit, but it is sufficient that the special figure change display game that is a big hit is being executed, and even after the start. good. In addition, regardless of the execution of the special figure change display game that becomes a big hit, the game may shift to the fourth specific game state when a predetermined shift condition is satisfied. The predetermined transition condition includes winning the transition lottery, executing a predetermined number of games, and deriving a specific result in the special figure variable display game.

  Further, when a plurality of second start memories, which are the execution right of the special figure 2 variable display game, can be stored, it is determined whether or not a big hit occurs before the corresponding special figure 2 variable display game starts with respect to the second start memory. Is determined in advance, and if it is determined that there is a second start memory that becomes a big hit, the fourth specific game state is set before the start of the special figure 2 variable display game based on the second start memory that becomes the big hit. The transition may be made.

  Further, the high probability state is ended by winning the falling lottery, but the high probability state may be ended by executing a predetermined number of special figure change display games after the end of the special game state. The high probability state may be set until the next derivation of the first special result.

  From the above, a game in which a variable display game is executed based on a winning of a game ball in a start winning opening and a special game state advantageous to a player is generated when a result of the variable display game is a special result. In the machine, a control means (game control device 100) for controlling a game, a start winning port, and a closed state where a game ball cannot be won and an open state where a game ball can be easily won can be converted. And a normal variable prize device 37 capable of generating a variable display game execution right by winning. The control means changes the operation state of the normal variable prize device 37 to a first operation state and a first operation state. The control is performed in any one of the second operation state in which the winning is easy, and the probability state in which the result of the variable display game is a special result is a low probability state and a high probability state higher than the low probability state. If set to any one and the state is in a high probability state In addition, each time the variable display game is executed, a falling lottery for shifting to the low probability state is performed, and if the falling lottery is won in the second operating state, the state shifts to the first operating state. It is possible to shift to the first operation state when executing the variable display game with a special result even if the falling lottery has not been won in the second operation state. Becomes Therefore, it is possible to make the change of the operation state of the ordinary variable prize device 37 the same between the case where the winning lottery is won and the case where the big hit is derived, and it is difficult to distinguish between them, thereby improving the interest of the game. it can.

  In addition, the control means can set the second operation state for a predetermined period from the end of the special game state to the execution of the variable display game a predetermined number of times, and after a lapse of the predetermined period, the second operation state is set to a high probability state. In a certain case, the second operation state can be set. During a predetermined period, even if the player selects the falling lottery in the second operation state, the second operation state is not shifted to the first operation state, and the second operation state is set. Even if a variable display game with a special result is executed without winning the falling lottery, the first operating state is not shifted. If the high probability state continues after a predetermined period, the falling lottery is won. In this case, the transition to the first operation state is made based on the fulfillment of one of the conditions, that is, the case where the variable display game which has a special result without winning the falling lottery. Therefore, it is possible to make the change of the operation state of the ordinary variable prize device 37 the same between the case where the winning lottery is won and the case where the big hit is derived, and it is difficult to distinguish between them, thereby improving the interest of the game. it can.

  In addition, a first winning prize port 36 serving as a starting prize port, and a starting prize arranged at a position downstream of the normal variable prize apparatus 37 and at which a prize can be made via a path through which the normal variable prize apparatus 37 can be awarded. The control means executes a first variable display game as a variable display game based on a winning of a game ball to the first start winning port 36 or the normal variable winning device 37. Executing a second variable display game as a variable display game based on a winning of a game ball into the second start winning opening, wherein the first variable display game and the second variable display game can be simultaneously executed, and at least the second variable display game is executed. The game result includes a second special result with a constant derived probability regardless of the gaming state, and the result of the second variable display game becomes the second special result during the execution of the first variable display game. First in favor of the When the special game state is executed, and it is configured to interrupt the first variable display games in the second running of the special game state. Therefore, a large number of second variable display games having a high probability of a small hit can be executed based on the start of the special figure variable display game that is a big hit, and a profit can be given to the player. Can be improved.

  In the high-probability state, the execution time of the variable display game is made shorter than in the low-probability state, and the special result includes a first special result capable of changing the probability derived according to the gaming state. There is a second special result whose probability is derived irrespective of the game state, and the probability that the second special result in the second variable display game is derived is higher than the probability that the first special result is derived. When the result of the variable display game is the first special result, the first special game state is executed as a special game state advantageous to the player, and the result of the variable display game is the second special result. In this case, the second special game state is executed as a special game state advantageous to the player, and the result of the second variable display game becomes the second special result during the execution of the first variable display game, and the second special game state is executed. If the state runs, Interrupting the first variable display game during execution of the second special game state, and that it is configured to resume the second the Upon termination of special game state first variable display game. Therefore, a large number of second variable display games having a high probability of a small hit can be executed based on the start of the special figure variable display game that is a big hit, and a profit can be given to the player. Can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, when the result of the other variable display game is the second special result during the execution of the one variable display game and the second special game state is executed, the other variable display game is executed. While one variable display game is interrupted from the time when the second special result is stopped and the second special result is stopped after the variable time ends, the stop display time of the other variable display game is stopped. One variable display game may be interrupted from the time when the second special game state is ended and the second special game state is started to the time when the second special game state is ended. The same applies to a modified example described later.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the result of the other variable display game is the first special result and the first special game state is executed during the execution of the one variable display game, the other variable display game is executed. When the first special result is stopped and displayed after the fluctuation time of one of the variable display games is stopped, the one of the variable display games is forcibly stopped with the result of the loss, but the stop display time of the other variable display game ends and When the first special game state is started, one of the variable display games may be forcibly stopped as a result of a loss. The same applies to a modified example described later.

  In addition, the start time of the suspension or the forced stop may be made different between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 so that the selection is made from when the special result is stopped and displayed and when the special game state is started. You may do it. Further, the start of the interruption or the forced stop is not limited to the time when the special result is stopped and displayed or the time when the special game state is started, and may be started at another timing. The end of the suspension may be at a timing other than the end of the special game state. Also, the interruption state may be generated when the result of the other variable display game is the first special result and the first special game state is executed during the execution of the one variable display game. Further, for each of the special maps 1 and 2, when the first special result or the second special result is derived, it is possible to arbitrarily set whether to suspend or forcibly stop.

  The normal variable winning device 37 of the present embodiment has a game ball retaining function of retaining game balls on the upper surface of the movable member 37b, so that the game balls are placed on the movable member 37b while the movable member 37b is in the closed state. When the movable member 37b is in the open state, the game ball can be swallowed (the game ball staying on the movable member 37b can be dropped and made to enter the general winning opening 37d). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of game balls that fail to win the ordinary variable prize device 37, that is, the number of game balls that have not arrived at the ordinary variable prize port 37d despite arriving at the ordinary variable prize device 37.

  In addition, since the second starting winning opening 97 is provided below the normal variable winning device 37, a game ball that fails to win the normal variable winning device 37 can enter the second starting winning opening 97. . In the case of the present embodiment, since the number of game balls that fail to win a prize in the ordinary variable prize device 37 is reduced by the game ball stagnation function of the ordinary variable prize device 37, the game state in which the main starting area is the general electric winning prize port 37d (No. In the first specific game state ST2, the second specific game state ST3, and the third specific game state ST4), it is possible to make it difficult to win the second start winning opening 97.

  The main start area of the first specific game state ST2, the second specific game state ST3, and the third specific game state ST4 is the general winning opening 37d, and the main start area of the fourth specific game state ST5 and the fifth specific game state ST6. Is the second start winning opening 97, so in the case of the first specific gaming state ST2, the second specific gaming state ST3, and the third specific gaming state ST4, that is, in the high / low probability support state, the second starting winning opening 97. Is impossible (difficult), and the second starting winning opening 97 can be won only in the fourth specific game state ST5 and the fifth specific game state ST6, that is, only when the high probability support is absent. Is preferred. In the first specific game state ST2, the second specific game state ST3, and the third specific game state ST4, when a game ball wins in the second start winning opening 97 and a small hit occurs, the payout rate increases from the design value. There is a risk of deviation.

The winning rate of the normal variable winning device 37 can be calculated using the following equation (1).
Winning rate [%] = Number of game balls that have won the general winning opening 37d / Number of game balls that have arrived at the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (game balls that have flowed into the starting point of the downflow path 37f) × 100 (1) )
In the present embodiment, the second start winning opening 97 is located at the lower right of the game area 32, and the normal variable winning device 37 is located above the second starting winning opening 97. Since the normal variable winning device 37 has a game ball staying function, it is possible to reduce the number of game balls that fail to win the normal variable winning device 37. Furthermore, the time from the end of the operation of the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 to the start of the operation, and the staying time of the game ball in the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (the game ball rolls from the start point to the end point of the downflow path 37f) ), The failure of the prize to the ordinary variable prize device 37 in the state of hitting the ordinary figure is reduced to almost zero, that is, the failure to the normal variable prize device 37 in the state of hitting the regular figure. The winning rate can be made almost 100%. By setting the winning rate of the ordinary variable prize device 37 in the state of hitting the ordinary figure to almost 100%, it is possible to make it difficult to win the second starting prize port 97 disposed below the ordinary variable prize device 37. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the intended performance (ball-out rate).

  On the other hand, when the high probability support is absent (the fourth specific gaming state ST5), the normal variable winning device 37 is not opened, so that a game ball can be awarded to the second starting winning opening 97, and a small hit RUSH is realized. can do. As described above, according to the present embodiment, the second starting winning opening 97 can be configured to be awarded only when the high probability support is absent (the fourth specific gaming state ST5), and the desired performance can be realized. .

  Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 25 (a), the time of the ordinary figure change (ie, the ordinary figure change time) is 200 ms, and the time of the ordinary figure stop (ie, the ordinary figure display time) is 100 msec. The time of the normal power operation (ie, the sum of the total normal power release time and the total wait time per normal touching state) is 5800 ms, and the ending time (ie, the normal power remaining sphere). When the sum of the processing time and the ordinary figure ending time is 700 ms, the time from the end of the operation of the movable member 37b to the start of the operation is at least 1000 ms (= 700 ms + 200 ms + 100 ms). In this case, the length of the downflow path 37f and the detour 37g, the number and shape of the ups and downs provided in the downflow path 37f and the detour 37g are appropriately designed, and the residence time of the game ball in the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is set to 1000 ms. , It is possible to make the winning rate to the normal variable winning device 37 in the state of hitting the ordinary figure almost 100%.

  Of course, as in the example shown here, according to the time from the end of the operation of the movable member 37b to the start of the operation, the prize winning rate to the ordinary variable prize winning device 37 in the hit state of the ordinary figure becomes almost 100%. Alternatively, the residence time of the game ball in the normal fluctuation prize device 37 may be set, or, conversely, the normal fluctuation prize device 37 in the state of hitting the ordinary figure according to the residence time of the game ball in the normal fluctuation prize device 37. The time from the end of the operation of the movable member 37b to the start of the operation may be set so that the prize winning rate becomes approximately 100%.

  That is, in the present embodiment, one of the residence time of the game ball in the normal fluctuation winning device 37 and the time from the end of the operation of the movable member 37b to the start of the operation is changed to a time corresponding to the other (substantially the same as the other). Time, the other time or the like), it is possible to increase the winning rate of game balls to the normal variable winning device 37. In addition, by increasing the residence time of the game ball in the normal fluctuation winning device 37 by increasing a portion that suppresses the power of the ball such as the rising portion or the protruding portion, during the normal power interval (from the end of the operation of the movable member 37b to the operation of the movable member 37b). Until the start), more game balls can be retained on the movable member 37b, and when the movable member 37b is in the open state, the game balls retained on the movable member 37b can be won. Therefore, the winning rate of game balls to the normal variable winning device 37 is improved.

  In the present embodiment, the normal variable winning device 37 has a game ball retaining function, and a second starting winning opening 97 and a special variable winning device 38 are disposed below the normal variable winning device 37. Therefore, the time from the launch of the game ball to the arrival at the second starting winning opening 97 or the special variable winning device 38 is set to be longer than when the normal variable winning device 37 does not have the game ball retaining function. Can be. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a hitting method that is not recommended, and it is possible to increase the degree of freedom of the opening pattern of the special winning opening (opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing member 990).

  In the normal gaming state ST1, left-handing is recommended, but in the normal gaming state ST1, when right-handed and the game ball wins the second start winning opening 97, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed. In the normal game state ST1, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is set to be longer than in the second specific game state, but by aiming (stopping, timing, and the like), the special winning opening is achieved. It is possible to aim for a prize. If the normal variable prize device 37 disposed above the special variable prize device 38 does not have the game ball staying function, when the special figure 2 variable display game is executed during the normal game state ST1. By aiming at the start of the small hitting game state (opening of the big winning opening) and starting to hit the game ball, the game ball arrives at the special variable prize winning device 38 by the end of the small hitting game state. It becomes possible to make a prize to a winning opening. Therefore, in order to execute the special figure 2 variable display game during the normal game state ST1, there is a possibility that an unrecommended hitting method (right-handing) may be performed.

  On the other hand, in the case of the present embodiment, since the normal variable prize device 37 disposed above the special variable prize device 38 has a game ball retaining function, the game ball arrives at the special variable prize device 38. It takes time to do it. Therefore, when the special figure 2 variable display game is executed during the normal game state, even if the player hits the game ball at the start of the small hitting game state (the opening of the special winning opening) and starts to hit the game ball, Cannot reach the special variable winning device 38 by the end of the small hitting game state. Therefore, since it is useless to execute the special figure 2 variable display game during the normal game state ST1, it is not recommended to execute the special figure 2 variable display game during the normal game state ST1, that is, it is not recommended in the normal game state ST1. It is possible to avoid being hit. As described above, according to the present embodiment, an illegal prize due to capture, that is, a small hit is generated by right-handing in the normal gaming state ST1, and a small hit prize is performed by aiming (a small winning prize port during the small hit period). Winning) can be prevented.

  Further, when the normal variable winning device 37 disposed above the special variable winning device 38 does not have the game ball staying function, illegal winning due to capture is prevented (a method of hitting that is not recommended is avoided. For this reason, it was necessary to limit the opening pattern of the special winning opening in the small hitting game state, for example, by performing a short opening only once. On the other hand, in the case of the present embodiment, since the normal variable prize device 37 disposed above the special variable prize device 38 has a game ball retaining function, the game ball arrives at the special variable prize device 38. It takes time to do it. Therefore, even if the big winning opening is opened a plurality of times during the small hitting game state, it is possible to prevent illegal winnings due to capture, and it is possible to increase the degree of freedom of the opening pattern of the big winning opening in the small hitting game state. it can.

  Here, for example, the normal variable prize device 37 disposed above the special variable prize device 38 does not have a game ball staying function, and arrives at the special variable prize device 38 after the game ball is launched. It takes about 2 seconds to complete. In such a case, if the opening pattern of the special winning opening in the small hitting game state is, for example, a pattern as shown in FIG. Even if the player hits the ball at the start of the game state, such as starting to hit the game ball, by the time the game ball arrives at the special variable prize winning device 38, the small hitting game state is over. I can't win.

  On the other hand, in such a case, the opening pattern of the special winning opening in the small hitting game state is, for example, a pattern as shown in FIG. .5 seconds open state → 1.0 seconds closed state → 0.5 seconds open state ”, the small hitting game state is achieved by performing an aim hit such as starting to hit the game ball at the same time the small hitting game state starts. The game ball can reach the special variable prize winning device 38 by the end of the game, so that the game ball can win the big winning opening. Therefore, in such a case, if an opening pattern or the like in which the special winning opening is opened a plurality of times is adopted as the opening pattern of the special winning opening in the small hitting game state, the illegal winning due to capture cannot be prevented. On the other hand, adopting an opening pattern or the like in which the special winning opening is opened a plurality of times as the opening pattern of the special winning opening in the small hitting game state, that is, increasing the degree of freedom of the opening pattern of the special winning opening in the small hitting gaming state. Can improve the small hit performance (increased payouts in the small hit game state), but cannot be realized by illegal winning due to capture.

  In order to both prevent illegal winning due to capture and improve small hitting performance, a staying device that delays the time from when the game ball is fired until it reaches the special variable winning device 38 (the present embodiment) In this case, it is assumed that a normal fluctuation winning device 37) is provided. If a delay of 2 seconds is given by the staying device (a delay time of 2 seconds is given), it takes about 4 seconds from when the game ball is launched until it reaches the special variable winning device 38.

  As a result, the opening pattern of the special winning opening in the small hitting game state is, for example, a pattern as shown in FIG. In the case of the pattern of “→ 1.0 second closed state → 0.5 second open state”, 3.5 seconds (= 0.5 seconds + 1.0 seconds + 0.5 seconds + 1.0 seconds) until the operation of the opening / closing member 990 is completed. Second + 0.5 second), while it takes about 4 seconds from the launch of the game ball to the arrival at the special variable winning device 38. That is, in the present embodiment, the time from when the game ball is fired to when it reaches the special variable winning device 38 is longer than the time from the start of the operation of the opening / closing member 990 in the small hitting game state to the end of the operation. In addition, the residence time of the game ball in the normal variable winning device 37 can be determined according to the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing member 990 in the small hitting game state (opening pattern of the big winning opening).

  Rather than the time from the start of operation of the opening / closing member 990 to the end of operation in the small hitting game state (3.5 seconds in this example), the time from the launch of the game ball to the arrival at the special variable winning device 38 (this time) By increasing the length of about 4 seconds in the example, even if the player hits the game ball at the start of the small hitting game state and starts hitting the game ball, by the time the game ball arrives at the special variable winning device 38, the small hitting game is started. The state has ended. Therefore, even if an opening pattern in which the big winning opening is opened a plurality of times is adopted as the opening pattern of the big winning opening in the small hitting game state, it is possible to prevent illegal winning due to capture.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, by providing a stagnation device or the like that gives a delay time to the time from when the game ball is launched to when it reaches the special variable prize device 38, it is possible to prevent illegal winning due to capture. , Small hit performance can be improved. Further, as the delay time is longer, the total time of the small hitting game state can be extended, so that the small hitting performance can be improved. In addition, the longer the delay time is, the longer it takes to arrive at the special variable prize winning device 38, the more difficult it is to win illegally due to capture. Providing such a stagnation device is effective not only for aiming during normal power support but also for aiming during small hit RUSH. Further, the longer the delay time is, the more difficult it is to aim and hit, so it is necessary to keep hitting, and stable data can be obtained even in the operation of the hall.

  Further, in the case of the present embodiment, in the normal game state ST1, a right hit is made and the second starting winning opening 97 is won, and a small hit occurs. In the case where the figure hits, the game ball that fails to win the normal variable winning device 37 can be reduced by the game ball staying function of the normal variable winning device 37, so that it is disposed below the normal variable winning device 37. It is possible to make it difficult for the special fluctuation winning device 38 to win a prize. That is, according to the present embodiment, it takes a long time for the game balls to arrive at the special variable winning device 38 by the game ball retaining function of the normal variable winning device 37, so that illegal winning due to capture can be prevented. Further, by the game ball staying function of the ordinary variable prize device 37, it is possible to reduce the number of game balls that fail to win the ordinary variable prize device 37 (it is difficult to make the special variable prize device 38 win), so that the illegal prize due to capture is obtained. Damage can be minimized.

  In addition, by improving the degree of freedom of the opening pattern of the special winning opening in the small hitting game state, it is possible to not only improve the small hitting performance (increase the number of payouts in the small hitting game state) but also open the large winning opening 38d. Since the number of times can be increased, the player can enjoy whether or not the game ball flows into the special winning opening 38d, and the interest of the game is improved. In addition, as a time from the launch of the game ball to the arrival at the special variable prize winning device 38, about 2 seconds when there is no staying device, and about 4 seconds when there is a staying device. The arrival time is an average value of the actually measured values, and there is an error in the actual arrival time.

  In addition, the alert (error notification) performed when the player hits right in the normal game state may be performed when a condition that a predetermined number of game balls have won the second start winning opening 97 is satisfied. This may be performed when the condition that a predetermined number of game balls have passed through the general-purpose starting gate 34, or when the number of game balls that have won the second starting winning opening 97 and the general-purpose starting gate 34 have passed. This may be performed when the condition that the sum with the number of game balls reaches a predetermined number is satisfied. In this way, it is possible to avoid such inconveniences that the player is immediately alerted to the right-handed by mistake and the interest is reduced, and the desire to play the game is reduced. Further, in the normal game state, the counter for counting the game balls that have won the second start winning opening 97 and the counter for counting the game balls that have passed through the general-purpose start gate 34 are configured to be cleared at a predetermined timing. Alternatively, it may be configured such that -1 is updated every time the first winning port 36 is won.

  FIG. 26 shows the probability of the big hit and the small hit, the probability of the big hit type when the big hit is won, and the probability of the small hit type when the small hit is won. The big hit is a special result with the operation of the condition device (first special result), and the small hit is a special result without the operation of the condition device (second special result). The condition device is operated when a big hit occurs in the special figure change display game (stop display of the big hit symbol). When the condition device is operated, for example, a big hit state occurs and a special electric accessory is used. This means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning device 38 is set (the accessory continuous operating device is operated). The condition device not operating means that the above-described flag is not set, for example, in a case where the small hit lottery is won. The "condition device" may be software means such as a flag which is turned on / off by software as described above, or may be hardware means such as a switch which is turned on / off electrically. In addition, the "condition device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of the electric accessory, and the same applies to the present specification. It is used as a term having various meanings.

  The jackpot probability, which is the probability of a jackpot (first special result), is common to Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2, and the probabilities in the low-probability state normal gaming state and the high-probability state specific gaming state are shown in FIG. The probability is as shown in FIG. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the special game state based on the probability change big hit (the first special game state) is set to a high probability state after the end, and a low probability state is set when the falling lottery performed every time the special figure change display game is executed is won. It is configured to be. Further, even if the high probability state is established based on the result mode of the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not changed. Both are in a high probability state.

  The small hit probability, which is the probability of a small hit (second special result), is a probability as shown in FIG. The small hit probability is higher in the special figure 2 than in the special figure 1. The small hit probability is always constant regardless of the gaming state and the big hit probability. In the big hit and the small hit lottery, the big hit and the small hit do not win twice.

  FIG. 26 (c) shows the types of big hits that can be selected in special figures 1 and 2, and the distribution probability of each big hit type. FIG. Possible small hit types, the opening time, the number of times of opening and the distribution probability of each small hit type are shown. Note that the small hit may not be provided in the special figure 1, but may be set only in the special figure 2.

  27 and 28 show the variation patterns of the special figure variation display game. FIG. 27A shows a fluctuation pattern in a case where the result is out of the normal game state and the fifth specific game state (low probability state). In the normal gaming state, the special figure 1 variable display game is designed to be the main variation, and the special figure 2 variable display game is designed to be the irregular variation. Regarding the special figure 2, a long variation in which a variation time of about 10 minutes is set is selected so that the player proceeds with the game according to this design, regardless of which variation pattern is selected. It has become. That is, in the normal gaming state, the fluctuation time that can be determined as the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game is longer than the fluctuation time that can be determined as the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game. The special figure 2 variable display game has a higher probability of small hits than the special figure 1 variable display game. The execution of the variable display game in FIG. 2 is made inefficient in time, and in the normal game state, the player plays the special figure 1 variable display game mainly. In the fifth specific game state, the special figure 2 variable display game is set as the main fluctuation. However, since it is determined that a special game state in which the game proceeds in a right-handed manner is generated, for the convenience of the player. The main variation is the special figure 2 variation display game. In the fifth specific game state, as in the normal game state, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is long, so that the occurrence of small hits can hardly be expected.

  FIG. 27 (b) shows a variation pattern when the result is out of the specific game state (first specific game state ST2, second specific game state ST3, third specific game state ST4, fourth specific game state ST5). showed that. In this case, as the variation pattern without reach in the special figure 1 variation display game, only the variation pattern in which the variation time is shorter than in the normal game state is selected. In the first specific game state ST2, the second specific game state ST3, and the third specific game state ST4, the special figure 1 variable display game is the main fluctuation, and the time saving state is shorter than the normal game state. In addition, for the special figure 2 variable display game, only the variable pan without reach can be selected. In the fourth specific game state ST5, the special figure 2 change display game becomes a main change, and a time reduction state in which the change time is shorter than in the normal game state.

  FIG. 28A shows a fluctuation pattern in a case where the result is a big hit in the normal game state. For the special figure 2, only the variation pattern that does not cause the reach state can be selected. In the normal gaming state, the fluctuation time when the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit is longer than the variable time selectable when the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit.

  FIG. 28B shows a variation pattern in a case where the result is a big hit in the first specific game state and the second specific game state. For the special figure 1 change display game, a change pattern having a change time equivalent to the normal game state is selected. Further, for the special figure 2 variable display game, a change pattern of a variable time equivalent to the SP3 reach of the special figure 1 variable display game is set.

  FIG. 28C shows a fluctuation pattern in a case where the result is a big hit in the third specific game state. For the special figure 1 change display game, a very long change time is set. As a result, it is possible to secure a sufficient time after shifting to the fourth specific game state, and it is possible to secure an opportunity to obtain a prize ball by a small hit in the special figure 2 variable display game. In addition, the longer the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is, the more chances of occurrence of small hits are increased, so that more prize balls can be obtained, which is advantageous for the player. For this reason, a plurality of types of time having different lengths can be selected as the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the interest that can be obtained may be different so as to enhance the interest of the game.

  In the special figure 2 change display game, a short change time is set. If a big hit occurs in the special figure 2 change display game that is irregularly changed in the third specific game state, even if the game is shifted to the fourth specific game state, small hits cannot occur frequently. It is to be derived. In addition, since the special figure change display game which becomes a big hit in the fourth specific game state is started in the third special game state, the special figure change display game which basically becomes a big hit is newly started. Therefore, the variation pattern in the case where the result is a big hit in the fourth specific game state is not defined.

  FIG. 28D shows a fluctuation pattern in a case where the result is a small hit in the normal game state and the fifth specific game state. In the special figure 2, a long variation in which a variation time of about 10 minutes is set without selecting a reach state is selected. FIG. 28 (e) shows the fluctuation when the result is a small hit in the specific game state (first specific game state ST2, second specific game state ST3, third specific game state ST4, fourth specific game state ST5). The pattern was shown. In either case, a reach state is not generated, and a fluctuation pattern with a very short fluctuation time is selected.

  FIG. 29 shows special variable winning devices in a special game state (first special game state) based on a big hit (first special result) and a special game state (second special game state) based on a small hit (second special result). The opening and closing pattern was shown. In the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game, when the type of big hit is a 10R certain variable big hit, the special variable winning device 38 is opened according to the special winning opening opening / closing pattern 1. In the special winning opening opening / closing pattern 1, an opening period of 29000 ms is set in the first round (1R) after a fanfare period of 5000 ms. After that, the round in which the interval period of 2000 ms and the opening period of 29000 ms are set is repeated until 10 rounds are performed, and after the ending period of 11000 ms, the special game state ends. In addition, when the type of the big hit is the 4R certain big hit or the 4R normal big hit in the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game, the special variable winning device 38 is opened according to the special winning opening opening / closing pattern 2. This opening and closing pattern is different from the opening and closing pattern of the 10R jackpot only in the number of rounds.

  Note that the time described in the interval period and the ending period in each opening / closing pattern is a time obtained by adding the remaining ball processing time and the interval time or the ending time. For example, the interval period in the special winning opening opening / closing pattern 1 is 2000 ms, of which 1400 ms in the first half is the remaining ball processing time and 600 ms in the second half is the interval time. The ending period in the special winning opening opening / closing pattern 1 is 11000 ms, of which 1400 ms is the remaining ball processing time in the first half and 9600 ms is the ending time in the second half.

  The opening / closing pattern of the small hit includes a fanfare period, an opening period, an interval period (including the remaining ball processing time) and an ending period (including the remaining ball processing time) as shown in the figure. Is released. In addition, in any of the opening and closing patterns of the big hit and the small hit, when a specified number of prizes are won in each round, the opening period of the round ends at that point. The opening time for small hits is shorter than the opening time for big hits, and the number of winnings in the special variable winning device 38 in the special game state is reduced. Therefore, a small hit has a lower game value that can be given to a player than a big hit. That is, the special result includes a first special result (big hit) that can generate the first special game state and a second special game state that has a lower game value that can be given to the player than the first special game state. A possible second special result (small hit) is included.

  In the small hit opening / closing pattern, the length of the fanfare period and the ending period differ depending on whether or not the game is in the fourth specific game state, and is longer in the fourth specific game state. In the fourth specific game state, these times are ensured in order to perform effects such as notification of small hits and notification of the number of prize balls by winning. In addition, since small hits occur frequently in the fourth specific game state, by increasing the fanfare period and the ending period, the time required for digesting the special game state is increased, and the number of prize balls per unit time is not excessively increased. I have to. The opening time of the special variable winning device is the same regardless of whether or not the game is in the fourth specific game state. Here, in the opening / closing pattern for each small hit, only one opening is performed, but it is also possible to perform multiple opening. In this case, the same applies to the interval time at which the special fluctuation winning device 38 is temporarily closed, regardless of whether the game is in the specific game state.

  Although both the length of the fanfare period and the length of the ending period are made different depending on whether or not the game is in the fourth specific game state, only one of them may be made different. Also, one or both of the length of the fanfare period and the ending period may be made different depending on whether the big hit opening / closing pattern is in the fourth specific game state.

  In the following description, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure variable display game. In addition, when there is no distinction between the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game, it is simply referred to as a decorative special figure variable display game. When a big hit (first special result) and a small hit (second special result) are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a hit (special result). Further, when there is no distinction between a first special game state which is a special game state based on a big hit and a second special game state which is a special game state based on a small hit, it is simply referred to as a special game state.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by launching a game ball (pachinko ball) from the launching device (not shown) toward the game area 32. The launched game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by a turning member such as an obstacle nail or a windmill arranged at various places in the game area 32, and the general winning opening 35, the first starting winning opening. 36, the normal fluctuation prize device 37, the second start prize port 97, and the special fluctuation prize device 38, or flow into the out port 30a provided at the lowermost portion of the game area 32 and are discharged from the game area 32. When the game ball wins in the general winning opening 35, the first starting winning opening 36, the ordinary variable winning award device 37, the second starting winning award 97, and the special variable winning award device 38, the number corresponding to the type of the winning opening that is won. The prize balls are discharged to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23 of the glass frame 15 from the payout unit controlled by the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 19).

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player adjusts the firing force and fires (so-called left-hits) a game ball to the left game area to cause the first start winning opening 36 or the first start winning opening 36. The player can aim for a prize in the general prize port 35 disposed on the left side of the game, and fires a game ball to the right game area (so-called right-handed), so that the general figure starting gate 34 and the normal variable prize device 37, special The variable winning device 38, the second starting winning opening 97, and the general winning opening 35 disposed above the second starting winning opening 97 can be aimed at winning.

  The winning ball to the first starting winning port 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 is detected as the starting winning ball of the special figure 1 variable display game by the internally provided starting port 1 switch 36a or starting port 2 switch 37a. One start memory is stored up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four). In the state where the special figure 1 variable display game can be started and the first starting memory number is 0, when a game ball wins in the first starting winning port 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, the starting right is generated. Accordingly, the first start memory is stored, the first start memory number is incremented by one, and the special figure 1 change display game is immediately started based on the first start memory. The number is decremented by one. On the other hand, when the special figure 1 variable display game cannot be started immediately, for example, when the special figure 1 variable display game has already been played and the special figure 1 variable display game has not ended, or when the special game state is set. When a game ball wins in the first start winning port 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, if the first start storage number is less than the upper limit number, the first start storage number is incremented by one and the first start storage is one. Will be remembered. Then, in a state where the first start storage number has become 1 or more, the special figure 1 variable display game can be started (the previous special figure 1 variable display game ends or the special game state ends). The start memory number is decremented by one, and the special figure 1 variable display game is started based on the stored first start memory.

  The winning ball to the second starting winning opening 97 is detected as a starting winning ball of the special figure 2 variable display game by a starting opening 3 switch 97a provided inside. If there is a prize in the second start winning opening 97 in a state where the special figure 2 variable display game can be started, the special figure 2 variable display game is immediately executed based on the winning. Also, a state in which the special figure 2 variable display game cannot be started immediately, for example, a state in which the special figure 2 variable display game has already been played and the special figure 2 variable display game has not ended, or a special game state. Even if a game ball wins the second start winning opening 97, the second start memory is not generated. Note that if a winning in the second start winning opening 97 occurs in a state in which the special figure 2 variable display game can be started, a second start memory is temporarily generated for the sake of processing, but the second start memory is not stored. Since the game is immediately consumed, the second start memory for suspending the start of the special figure 2 variable display game does not occur.

  At the time of detection of the starting winning ball, a jackpot random number, a jackpot symbol random number, and a fluctuation pattern random number are respectively extracted as start storage information, and the extracted random numbers are stored in the game control device 100 (see FIG. 19). In the special map storage area (part of the RAM), a predetermined number of times (for example, a maximum of four times for the first start memory) is stored as the special map start memory. Then, the storage number of the special figure start storage is displayed on the storage display unit 53 (special figure 1 hold display) for notifying the start winning number of the collective display device 50 and also on the display device 41 of the center case 40. It is displayed as a decoration special figure start memory display.

  The game control device 100 performs the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display 51 (first variable display device) based on the first start memory, and based on the winning in the second start winning opening 97, A special figure 2 variable display game is performed on the FIG. 2 display 52 (second variable display device). The special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed at the same time, but during execution of one special figure variable display game, the other special figure variable display game becomes the first special result (big hit). In this case, the one special figure change display game is ended as a result other than the special result (missing result). In addition, during the execution of the one special figure change display game, if the other special figure change display game has a second special result (small hit), the one special figure change display game will continue until the end of the special game state based on the small hit. The special figure change display game is interrupted.

  That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 sets the special map based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening 37d (first starting winning region) or the first starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning region). It constitutes a first execution control means for controlling the execution of the one-variation display game (first special-figure variation display game). Further, the game control device (game control means) 100 controls the special figure 2 change display game (second special figure change display game) based on the winning of the game ball in the second start winning opening 97 (second start winning area). A second execution control means for performing the execution control of

  In the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, after performing the fluctuation display, the predetermined result mode is stopped and displayed. When the result of the special figure change display game is a big hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 becomes a special result mode (big hit result mode) corresponding to the first special result. Jackpot and a first special game state (so-called big hit state). When the result of the special figure change display game is a small hit, a special result mode (small hit result mode) in which the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 corresponds to the second special result. Becomes a small hit and a second special game state (so-called small hit state). In other words, the special figure 1 display 51 can display the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37. It forms a display means. Further, the special figure 2 display 52 constitutes a second variable display means capable of displaying a second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) based on winning of a game ball into the second starting winning opening 97.

  Further, after the big hitting game state (first special game state) is over, the game control device (game control means) 100 sets a situation that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state (the hit probability is high, It is possible to perform a control for generating a game state (specific game state) in which the game can proceed in the presence of support. That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 forms a specific game state generation means.

  In addition, in response to the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game, a decorative special figure change in which a plurality of types of decorative identification information (numerals, symbols, character designs, etc.) are variably displayed on the display device 41. The display game is executed. The decorative special figure variable display game on the display device 41 includes a decorative special figure 1 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game, and a decorative special figure 2 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game. And these are displayed in separate display areas. Then, the fluctuation display is performed in accordance with the fluctuation of the corresponding special figure fluctuation display game, and the display corresponding to the result is performed along with the derivation of the result mode in the corresponding special figure fluctuation display game.

  In other words, the display variation display game (variable display game) in which the display device 41 variably displays the decoration identification information corresponding to the first variation display game (the special figure 1 variation display game) and the second variation display game (the special figure 2 variation display game). (A decoration special figure variation display game). Note that different display devices may be used for the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game, or only one decorative special figure variable display game may be displayed. In addition, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may not be provided in the gaming machine 10, and the special figure change display game may be executed only by the display device 41.

  In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the special figure 2 variable display game has a higher probability of a small hit, but when the normal game state is a low probability state, the variable time is set as the variable pattern of the special figure 2 variable display game. Very long (about 10 minutes) length variations are selected. As a result, in the normal game state, the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game is temporally inefficient, and the player does not select the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game aiming at small win in the normal game state. I have to. Therefore, in the normal game state, it is more advantageous for the player to perform a special figure 1 variable display game by aiming at the first starting winning opening 36 by performing a left-hand shot. The time for the long fluctuation is about 10 minutes, but may be longer or shorter (5 minutes, 50 minutes, 10 hours, etc.).

  From the above, the game is executed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning port (the first starting winning port 36, the second starting winning port 97, the normal variable winning device 37), and the result of the game is the special result. A game control means (game control device 100) for comprehensively controlling the game in the gaming machine 10 which generates a special game state advantageous to the player when the player becomes a player, and a special variable prize winning device opened in the special game state. (Special fluctuation winning device 38), and the game control means includes a fanfare period from the start of the special game state to the start of opening of the special fluctuation winning device, and the last special fluctuation winning device in the special game state. And the ending period, which is the period from the end of the opening of the special game state to the end of the special game state, and even if the special game state is based on the same special result, The fact that as it is possible to vary the one or both of the length of the fanfare period and ending period according to the game state when the fruit was derived. Therefore, the execution mode can be set according to the game state, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Also, a first starting winning opening 36 serving as a starting winning opening, a normal variable winning device 37, a second starting winning opening 97 forming a starting winning opening, and a game ball to the first starting winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37. The first variable display game execution control means (game control device 100) for executing the first variable display game based on the winning of the game, and the second variable display game based on the winning of the game ball into the second start winning opening 97. Second variable display game execution control means (game control device 100) and a specific game state (fourth specific game state) in which the execution time of the second variable display game is set to be shorter than the normal state Game state generating means (game control device 100), wherein the game control means specially sets the length of one or both of the fanfare period and the ending period in the special game state based on the same special result. The fact that the game state when the fruit was derived was such that as better if the gaming state when the special result was derived than not the specific gaming state is a specific game state becomes longer. Therefore, the execution mode can be set according to the game state, and the interest of the game can be improved. For example, in the specific game state, the time for executing the effect can be secured, and when the game is not in the specific game state, the game can be rapidly advanced.

  In addition, the special result includes a first special result that can change the probability derived according to the game state, and a second special result that has a constant probability derived regardless of the game state, The probability that the second special result is derived is set to be higher than the probability that the first special result is derived. Therefore, the execution mode can be set according to the game state, and the interest of the game can be improved. In particular, by making the length of one or both of the fanfare period and the ending period different for the second special result that does not change the probability, the execution mode can be changed without changing the derived probability.

  Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the game microcomputer 111 mainly includes a main process shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, and a timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 32 performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing]
First, the main processing will be described. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIG. 30, first, a process for disabling an interrupt (step X1) is performed, and then a stack pointer which is a head address of an area for saving a value of a register or the like when an interrupt occurs. Is performed (step X2). Next, the register bank 0 is designated (step X3), and an upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (for example, a D register) (step X4). In the case of the present embodiment, the range of the address of the RAM is 0000h to 01FFh, and 00h or 01h is taken as the higher order. In step X4, the leading 00h is set. Next, a firing stop signal is output and the firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state (step X5). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a signal to stop firing, and the firing of game balls is prohibited.

  Thereafter, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step X6), and processing for setting a power-on delay timer is performed (step X7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, the program of the slave control means (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) that performs various controls in accordance with an instruction from the game control device 100 serving as the main control means is executed. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for normal startup is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily starts up and sends a command to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up. Can avoid dropping commands. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (the game control device 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control devices (the payout control device 200, the effect control device 300, and the like). It forms a waiting means for setting a waiting time.

  The timing of the power-on delay timer is performed using a storage area (a RAM area or a register that is not a target of validity determination) of the RAM that is not a target of validity determination (calculation of a checksum). Thus, when calculating the check data such as the checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area, so that it is possible to prevent the control at power-on from becoming complicated.

  Note that an initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122. By reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time, the operation of the initialization switch 112 can be reliably performed. Can be detected. That is, if the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the elapse of the standby time, the initialization switch 112 is operated after the elapse of the standby time, or the initialization switch 112 is operated from the power-on until the elapse of the standby time. You need to keep doing it. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, the operation can be detected immediately after the power is turned on without performing such a troublesome operation, and the initialization operation performed when the power is turned on can be detected. Can be prevented.

  After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step X7), the process of measuring the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps X8 to X12) are performed. First, the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read via a port and a data bus to set the number of times of checking (for example, two times) (step X8), and it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. Perform (Step X9).

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step X9; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal has been on for the number of checks set in step X8 (step X10). If the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal has not continued for the number of checks (step X10; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is ON (step X9). If the power failure monitoring signal remains on for the number of checks (step X10; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the game machine waits until the power of the gaming machine is cut off. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a power failure due to noise or the like, and appropriately cope with a failure at power-on. can do.

  That is, the game control device 100 forms a power failure monitoring unit that monitors the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. Thus, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during a period in which the activation of the game control device 100 serving as the main control unit is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately cope with a malfunction at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the storage contents at the time of the previous power-off are retained, so backup processing and the like are performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. For this reason, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, there is no need to back up the RAM, and the control load can be reduced.

  On the other hand, if the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step X9; N), that is, if no power failure has occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step X11), and the value of the timer is zero. Is determined (step X12). If the value of the timer is not 0 (Step X12; N), that is, if the standby time has not expired, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (Step X8). If the value of the timer is 0 (step X12; Y), that is, if the standby time has expired, access to a readable / writable RWM (read / write memory) such as a RAM or an EEPROM is permitted (step X13). ), And outputs the OFF data to all the output ports (sets no output) (step X14).

  Next, a serial port (a port mounted in the gaming microcomputer 111 in advance, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) is set (step X15) and read first. It is determined whether the initialization switch has been turned on based on the state of the first input port 122 (step X16).

  If the initialization switch is off (step X16; N), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (step X17). If (Step X17; Y), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (Step X18). If the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step X18; Y), a checksum calculation process of calculating a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step X19), and the calculated checksum and power failure (Step X20). If the checksums match (step X20; Y), the flow shifts to step X21 in FIG. 31 to perform the process in the case of normal recovery from the power failure.

  Further, when it is determined that the initialization switch is on (step X16; Y), or when it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step X17; N or step X18; N). If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (step X20; N), the process proceeds to step X25 in FIG. 31 to perform initialization processing. That is, the initialization switch forms an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Make

  In step X21 of FIG. 31, an initial value at the time of restoration from power failure is saved in an area to be initialized (step X21). The areas to be initialized here are a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error monitoring. Note that the busy signal flag area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 is ready to accept a command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. The state is undefined. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area for storing the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and the state of the touch switch signal is changed to an undefined state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal has not been determined.

  Next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted (step X22). The interruption of the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game means that the second special result (small hit) is derived while both special figure variable display games are being executed as described later. This interrupts the special figure change display game in the resumption control in which the other special figure change display game is interrupted and restarted after the end of the special game state. If the game is interrupted, the special figure 1 game interrupt flag or the special figure 2 game interrupt flag is set according to the interrupted special figure change display game, and these flags are set to stop the power supply to the gaming machine. It is designed to be stored and stored even during the operation.

  If the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game is not interrupted (step X22; N), the process proceeds to step X24. If the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted (step X22; Y), a suspended command corresponding to the interrupted special figure is set (step X23).

  Thereafter, a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the special figure status prepared for rationally executing the special figure game processing described later is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X24). Go to X30. In the case of the present embodiment, in step X24, a plurality of commands such as a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a probability information command, a screen designation command, and a suspended command are transmitted. As the screen designation command, if the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both in the normal processing described later, that is, if the special figure change display game is not being executed or is not in the special game state, if the customer is waiting, Send the command for the waiting demo screen, otherwise send the command for the recovery screen. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, an effect number information command and a high probability number information command are also transmitted.

  On the other hand, when jumping from step X16, X17, X18, X20 to step X25, the RAM access prohibited area is set to be permitted to access (step X25), and all the areas including the busy signal flag area and the touch switch signal state monitoring area are set. The RAM area is cleared to 0 (step X26), and the RAM access prohibited area is set to access prohibited (step X27). Then, an initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in an area to be initialized (step X28). The area to be initialized here is a customer waiting demonstration area and an area related to the setting of the effect mode. Then, a command for initializing the RAM is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X29), and the process proceeds to step X30. In the case of the present embodiment, in step X29, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a probability information command, a RAM initialization command (display a customer waiting demo screen, and light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds)) , A plurality of commands are transmitted. In addition, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, an effect number information command and a support number information command which is information on the number of executions of the special figure variable display game with ordinary power support are also transmitted.

  In step X30, a process for activating a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the game microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the frequency of the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the frequency-divided signal. And a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that triggers a random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

  After the CTC activation process in step X30, a process for activating and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step X31). Specifically, the CPU 111A sets a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Further, a bit transposition pattern of a hard random number (here, a jackpot random number) generated by hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set. The bit transposition pattern is a method of transposing the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (the arrangement before the upper bit transposition) in a predetermined order and storing the extracted random number as a different bit arrangement (the arrangement after the lower bit transposition). Is a pattern that determines By exchanging the bits of the random number according to the bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be enhanced. Note that the bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. In addition, the user may be allowed to set arbitrarily.

  Thereafter, the values of predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of power-on are extracted, and various initial value random numbers corresponding thereto (in the case of the present embodiment, random numbers for determining a hit symbol of a special figure) After saving in a predetermined area of the RWM as an initial value (start value) of (big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number) (step X32), interruption is permitted (step X33). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the present embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes every time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, it is possible to break the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software, making it difficult for the player to obtain unauthorized random numbers.

  Subsequently, an initial value random number updating process (Step X34) for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers is performed. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are configured to be generated using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. However, the big hit random number is a so-called “high-speed counter” which is updated based on a clock having a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of the CPU, and the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are used as a timer interrupt process which is a processing unit of the program. The “low-speed counter” is updated based on the CTC output having the same cycle (a different CTC (CTC2) from the CTC (CTC0) of the timer interrupt process). In addition, the so-called "initial value changing method" in which the start value is changed by using each initial value random number (generated by software) each time the random number makes a round is adopted for the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number. Each of the random numbers may be a counter-type update by +1 or -1, or may be a random-type update in which all values in the range appear randomly without duplication until one cycle. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers updated by hardware and software.

  After the initial value random number updating process in step X34, the number of times (for example, two times) the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read and checked via the port and the data bus is set (step X35). It is determined whether the monitoring signal is on (step X36). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step X36; N), the process returns to the initial value random number updating process (step X34). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number updating process and the check of the power failure monitoring signal (loop process) are repeatedly performed. By permitting an interrupt (step X33) before the initial value random number updating process (step X34), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number updating process, the interrupt process is executed with priority, and the timer interrupt is executed. Is kept waiting by the initial value random number update process, thereby avoiding pressure on the interrupt process.

  The initial value random number updating process in step X34 includes a method of performing an initial value random number updating process in a timer interrupt process in addition to the main process. When such a method is adopted, both the initial value random number updating processes are performed. In order to avoid the execution of the value random number update process, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to prohibit the interrupt and then update and release the interrupt, as in the present embodiment. If the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process is not performed and only the main process is performed, there is no problem if the interrupt is released before the initial value random number update process. It has the advantage of being simplified.

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step X36; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal has been on for the number of checks set in step X35 (step X37). If the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal has not continued for the number of checks (step X37; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is ON (step X36). If the power failure monitoring signal has been on for the number of checks (step X37; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, interrupt interruption is temporarily inhibited (step X38). A process of outputting the off data to the output port (step X39) is performed.

  Thereafter, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step X40), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step X41). Further, after performing a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum when the power of the RWM is cut off (step X42) and a process for saving the calculated checksum (step X43), a process of prohibiting access to the RWM (step X44). ), And then wait for the power of the gaming machine to be turned off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum at the time of power shutdown, it is possible to determine whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shutdown is correctly backed up. It can be determined at the time of re-input.

  From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) for controlling the game in general and the sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means ), The main control means, when the power is turned on, delays the activation of the main control means and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting for the activation of the slave control device (the game control device) 100) and power outage monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power outage during the predetermined standby time.

  The power supply device 400 includes a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices. The power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when detecting the occurrence of a power failure, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) If the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is determined that a power failure has occurred.

  Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is configured such that the RAM 111C capable of storing data, an initialization operation unit (initialization switch) that can be operated from the outside, and the operation of the initialization operation unit Initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing the data stored in the RAM 111C, and reads the operation state of the initialization means before the start of the standby time.

  Also, the main control means (game control device 100) permits the access to the RAM 111C after the elapse of the standby time.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing will be described. The timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. That is, the interrupt routine is started at a predetermined cycle. When a timer interrupt occurs in the game microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process of FIG. 32 is started.

  When the timer interrupt process is started, first, the register bank 1 is designated (step X101). Switching to the register bank 1 is equivalent to performing register save processing for transferring a value held in a predetermined register (for example, a register used in the main processing) to the RWM. Next, an upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, a D register) (step X102). In step X102, the same processing as step X4 in the main processing is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, input processing from various sensors and switches and capture of signals, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (step X103) are performed.

  Then, based on the output data set in the various processes, an output process (step X104) for performing drive control of an actuator such as a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 38b, general-purpose solenoid 37c) and the like is performed. When a signal for stopping firing is output in step X5 in the main process, a signal for permitting firing is output by performing this output process, and the firing permitting signal is set to a permitted state. This firing permission signal is output to the firing control device via the payout control device. At this time, no processing of the signal or the like is performed. The firing permission signal is a first signal indicating the state of the firing permission as viewed from the game control device, and the second signal (the firing permission signal) indicating the state of the firing permission as viewed from the payout control device is also the payout control. Generated in the device and output to the launch control device. That is, two firing permission signals are output to the firing control device, and when both are permitted to fire, the game ball is configured to be ready to fire.

  Next, a payout command transmission process (step X105) for outputting the command set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200, a random number update process 1 (step X106), and a random number update process 2 (step X107) are performed. Thereafter, the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the start port 3 switch 97a, the winning port switch 35a, the monitoring of whether or not there is a normal signal input from the winning port switch 38a, setting of the prize ball, A winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step X108) for monitoring errors such as opening of the front frame and the glass frame and illegal winning of the normal variable winning device 37 and the special variable winning device 38 is performed.

  Next, a start-up switch monitoring process (step X109) for monitoring winning of the start-up 1 switch 36a, the start-up 2 switch 37a, and the start-up 3 switch 97a. In the starting port switch monitoring process, various random numbers (eg, a jackpot random number) are extracted based on the winning of game balls into the first starting winning port 36, the normal variable winning apparatus 37, and the second starting winning port 97. Then, special figure 1 game processing (step X110) for performing processing related to the special figure 1 variable display game and special figure 2 game processing (step X111) for performing processing related to the special figure 2 variable display game are performed.

  Next, a segment LED editing process (step X112) for driving a segment LED provided on the gaming machine 10 to display a special figure change display game and various information related to the game so as to display desired contents, and a magnetic sensor 61 Illegal magnet monitoring processing (step X113) for checking the detection signal from the controller to determine whether there is an abnormality, and illegal panel radio processing for checking the detection signal from the panel radio sensor 62 to determine whether there is an abnormality. A monitoring process (step X114) is performed. Further, an external information editing process (step X115) for setting a signal to be output to various external devices in an output buffer is performed, and the timer interrupt process ends.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting the interrupt) and the process of restoring the designation of the register bank (that is, the process of designating the register bank 0) are performed by interrupt return. Automatically (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Note that, depending on the CPU used, some gaming machines need to instruct execution of processing for restoring the interrupt disabled state and processing for restoring the designation of the register bank.

[Start port switch monitoring processing]
Next, details of the start-up switch monitoring process (step X109) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 33, in the starting port switch monitoring process, first, a starting port 1 (first starting winning port 36) winning monitoring table is prepared (step X491), and a hard random number acquisition process is performed (step X492). Then, it is determined whether or not there is start-port winning information set when the jackpot random number is obtained based on the winning in the first starting winning port 36 in the hard random number obtaining process (step X493).

  If the start opening winning information is not set based on the winning in the first starting winning opening 36 (step X493; N), the process proceeds to step X499. In this case, the information on no start-up winning is set. On the other hand, if the information on the presence of the start opening winning is set based on the winning in the first starting winning opening 36 (step X493; Y), it is determined whether or not the normal gaming state is being performed (step X494). If it is in the normal gaming state (step X494; Y), the flow shifts to step X497. If it is not in the normal gaming state (step X494; N), a right strike instruction notification command is prepared (step X495), and effect command setting processing is performed (step X496). After that, a table for setting the information of holding by the starting port 1 is prepared (step X497), and the special figure starting port 1 switch processing is performed (step X498).

  In the effect control device 300, based on the reception of the right-turn instruction notification command, the right-turn instruction is instructed to instruct the player to make a right-turn by display, voice, or the like. When the player is in a specific game state or a special game state, right-handed is more advantageous for the player, and the first start winning opening 36, which does not win unless left-handed, is in a specific game state or special. When a winning is detected during the gaming state, a right-hand instruction is notified.

  Next, a winning monitoring table is prepared for the starting port 2 (normal fluctuation winning device 37) (step X499), a hard random number obtaining process is performed (step X500), and a big random number is obtained based on the winning in the second starting winning port 97. Then, it is determined whether or not there is information on the presence of a winning opening set in the case of the start (step X501).

  If the start opening winning information is not set based on the winning in the second starting winning opening 97 (step X501; N), the process proceeds to step X509. In this case, the information on no start-up winning is set. On the other hand, when the information on the start opening winning is set based on the winning in the second starting winning opening 97 (step X501; Y), it is determined whether the public telephone (ordinary variable winning device 37) is operating, that is, It is determined whether or not the normal variable prize device 37 is operated to be in an open state in which a game ball can be won (step X502). If the ordinary power is operating (step X502; Y), step X504 is performed. Move to On the other hand, if the ordinary telephone is not operating (step X502; N), it is determined whether or not the illegal unauthorized transmission is occurring (step X503).

  In the determination as to whether or not the irregular fraud has occurred, it is determined that the fraud has occurred when the number of illegal winnings in the ordinary variable prize device 37 is equal to or greater than the fraud occurrence determination number (for example, 5). In the normal variable winning device 37, a game ball cannot be won in a closed state, and a game ball can be won only in an open state. Therefore, when a game ball wins in the closed state, it is a case where some abnormality or fraud occurs, and when there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as an illegal winning number. If the number of illegal winnings counted in this way is equal to or greater than a predetermined fraud occurrence determination number (upper limit), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

  In the case where unauthorized fraud has occurred (step X503; Y), the process proceeds to step X509. That is, the second start memory is not generated any more. In addition, in the case where the unauthorized illegal operation of the telephone is not occurring (Step X503; N), it is determined whether or not the normal gaming state is being performed (Step X504). Then, when it is not in the normal gaming state (step X504; N), the process proceeds to step X507. If the game is in the normal gaming state (step X504; Y), a left-turn instruction notification command is prepared (step X505), and effect command setting processing is performed (step X506). After that, a table for setting the information of the hold by the starting port 2 is prepared (step X507), the special figure starting port 2 switch process is performed (step X508), and the process proceeds to step X509.

  In the effect control device 300, based on the reception of the left-turn instruction notification command, the left-turn instruction is instructed to instruct the player to make a left-turn by display, sound, or the like. When the player is in the normal game state, the left-handed player is more advantageous to the player, and the player does not win unless the player hits the right-hand side. The batting instruction is notified.

  Next, a winning monitoring table is prepared for the starting opening 3 (second starting winning opening 97) (step X509), and a hard random number acquisition process is performed (step X510). Then, it is determined whether or not there is start-port winning information that is set when the jackpot random number is obtained based on the winning in the second starting winning opening 97 in the hard random number obtaining process (step X511).

  If the information on the presence of the start opening winning has not been set based on the winning in the second starting winning opening 97 (step X511; N), the start opening switch monitoring process ends. In this case, the information on no start-up winning is set. On the other hand, when the information on the presence of the start opening winning is set based on the winning in the second starting winning opening 97 (step X511; Y), it is determined whether or not the normal gaming state is being performed (step X512). And when it is not in the normal game state (step X512; N), it moves to step X515. When the game is in the normal gaming state (step X512; Y), a left-turn instruction notification command is prepared (step X513), and effect command setting processing is performed (step X514). Thereafter, a table for setting the information of the hold by the starting port 3 is prepared (step X515), the special figure starting port 3 switch processing is performed (step X516), and the starting port switch monitoring processing is ended.

  In the effect control device 300, based on the reception of the left-turn instruction notification command, the left-turn instruction is instructed to instruct the player to make a left-turn by display, sound, or the like. When the player is in the normal gaming state, the left-handed player is more advantageous for the player, and the player does not win unless the player hits the right-hand side. A left-hand instruction is notified.

[Special figure starting port 1 switch processing]
FIG. 34 shows the special figure starting port 1 switch processing (step X498) in the above-described starting port switch monitoring processing. In this special figure starting port 1 switch process, first, the starting port signal 1 output count, which is the number of times information on the number of winnings to the first starting winning port 36 is output to the management device outside the gaming machine 10, is loaded. Then, the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X522), and it is determined whether or not the output count overflows (step X523). If the number of outputs does not overflow (step X523; N), the updated value is saved in the region of the number of outputs of the start port signal 1 of the RWM (step X524), and the special figure 1 hold number (first start storage number) Is smaller than the upper limit (step X525). On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (step X523; Y), the process proceeds to step X525. In this case, the number of outputs can be stored up to 255, but if the number of outputs is stored up to the upper limit, the value is updated to +1 and loops to zero, so that the updated value is not saved.

  If the number of special figure 1 reservations is less than the upper limit value (here, 4) (step X525; Y), a special figure 1 information setting flag used for allocating a variation pattern in the special figure reservation information determination processing described later is set ( (Step X526), the special figure 1 reservation number is updated by +1 (step X527). Next, the address of the random number storage area (the random number storage area for the special figure 1) corresponding to the reserved number of the special figure 1 is calculated (step X528), and the big random number prepared in the hard random number acquisition processing is converted to the big random number of the RWM. Save in the storage area (step X529).

  Then, the big hit symbol random numbers are extracted and prepared (step X530), and are saved in the big hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X531). Further, the small hit symbol random number is extracted and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X532). Subsequently, the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are extracted and saved in the variation pattern random number storage area of the RWM corresponding to each random number (step X533). Then, special figure reservation information determination processing (step X534), which is a pre-reading processing, is performed to prepare a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation number (step X535), and effect command setting processing is performed (step X535). Step X536), the special figure starting port 1 switch processing ends.

  Note that the special figure starting port 2 switch processing (step X508) in the above-described starting port switch monitoring processing includes, in steps X521 to X524 relating to the starting port signal, information on the number of winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 of the gaming machine 10 The process is the same as the process shown in FIG. 34 except that the process is performed on the starting port signal 2 output to the external management device. That is, the game control device 100 (RAM 111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning port 36 and the normal variable winning device 37, and uses the predetermined random number as a first starting memory as a predetermined starting memory. The first start storage means can store up to the upper limit number.

[Special figure pending information judgment processing]
FIG. 35 shows the special figure hold information determination processing (step X534) in the above-described special figure starting port 1 switch processing. The same processing is performed in the special figure starting port 2 switch processing not shown. The special figure suspension information determination processing is a look-ahead processing of determining the result related information corresponding to the special figure 1 start storage before the start timing of the special figure 1 change display game based on the special figure 1 start storage. In this special figure reservation information determination processing, first, a big hit determination processing is performed to determine whether or not a big hit is determined based on whether or not the big random number value matches the big hit determination value (step X543). If the result of the determination is a big hit (step X544; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table is set (step X545), and stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared big hit symbol random number is acquired (step X546). A pre-read stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information is prepared (step X551).

  On the other hand, if the result of the determination is not a big hit (step X544; N), a small hit determination process is performed to determine whether or not a big hit is a small hit based on whether or not the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value (step X547). ). If the result of the determination is a small hit (step X548; Y), stop symbol information for the small hit is set (step X549), and a pre-read stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information is prepared (step X551). If the result of the determination is not a small hit (step X548; N), stop symbol information of the outlier is set (step X550), and a prefetch stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information is prepared (step X551).

  After preparing a look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information (step X551), effect command setting processing is performed (step X552). Next, a special figure 1 information setting process (step X553) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern is performed, and a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting for setting a fluctuation mode of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is performed. Processing is performed (step X554).

  Then, a prefetch variation pattern command corresponding to the first variation number indicating the first variation pattern and the second variation number indicating the second variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure 1 variation display game is prepared (step X555), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step X556), and the special figure suspension information determination processing ends. The special figure 1 information setting processing in step X553 and the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting processing in step X554 are processing executed at the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing of the special figure 1 ordinary processing. Is the same as

  By the above processing, the look-ahead stop symbol command including the result of the special figure 1 start-up display game based on the special figure 1 start-up storage and the information of the change pattern in the special figure 1 start-up display game based on the special figure 1 start-up storage are included. A prefetch variation pattern command is prepared and transmitted to effect control device 300. As a result, the determination result (pre-read result) of the result-related information (whether a big hit or a small hit or the type of a fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the special figure 1 start memory is stored in the special figure 1 fluctuation based on the corresponding special figure 1 start memory. The effect can be notified to the effect control device 300 before the start timing of the display game, and in particular, by changing the decoration special figure start storage display displayed on the display device 41, the start of the special figure 1 variable display game is started. It is possible to notify the player of the result-related information before the timing.

  That is, the game control device 100 may determine the result of the first variable display game and the variation mode information before the start of the first variable display game based on the first start memory stored in the first start storage unit. It forms a possible first determining means. In addition, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as the start memory in the start winning storage device (game control device 100) before executing the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained). Judge whether or not). In addition, the time when the random number value stored in correspondence with the start memory is determined in advance is not only at the time of the start winning where the start memory is generated, but also at any time before the variable display game based on the start memory is performed. Good.

  Note that this special figure suspension information determination processing is performed only for the special figure 1 variable display game, and for the special figure 2 variable display game which does not generate a start memory for suspending the start of the special figure variable display game. Not done. Further, in the case of the fourth specific game state, the prefetching process may not be performed. This is a state in which the special figure 2 variable display game is mainly performed during the fourth specific game state, and the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly performed by deriving a special result in the special figure 2 variable display game. This is because it is almost always stopped as a result of a miss. In other words, the notice of the prefetch result is not meaningful because most of the result is missed, or the foreseeing result that is a special result in the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly changed to the outcome result after being notified, and a notice is given. This is because a contradiction may occur.

  However, since the start memory for suspending the start of the special figure 2 variable display game is not generated for the special figure 2 variable display game, the special figure 2 variable display game is not changed during the first period of the first specific game state. There is a high possibility that only the one-variation display game will be played, and in such a case, a prefetch effect may be performed for the first start memory. Of the first start memories that perform such a prefetching effect, those that occur before the start of the fourth specific game state are executed after the start of the fourth specific game state. For those that have been subjected to such prefetching effects, prefetching processing is performed. Of course, the prefetching process may be performed irrespective of the probability state, and it may be determined in another process whether or not to perform the prefetching effect based on the result of the prefetching process.

[Special figure starting port 3 switch processing]
FIG. 36 shows a special figure starting port 3 switch process (step X516) in the above-described starting port switch monitoring process. In this special figure starting port 3 switch process, first, the starting port signal 3 output count, which is the number of times information about the number of winnings to the second starting winning port 97 is output to the management device outside the gaming machine 10, is loaded. Then, the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X562), and it is determined whether or not the output count overflows (step X563). If the number of outputs does not overflow (step X563; N), the updated value is saved in the start-up port signal 3 output count area of the RWM (step X564), and the start-up port 3 (second start winning port 97) wins Determine whether it is invalid.

  The starting opening 3 winning invalidity means that the special figure 1 variable display game which has a special result (big hit or small hit) is stopped (during a special figure display processing described later), during the first or second special game state, and The special figure 2 change display game is being executed. If the winning opening 3 winning is invalid (step X565; Y), the special figure starting opening 3 switch process is terminated. If the winning opening 3 is not invalid (step X565; N), the number of reserved special figure 2 is set to 1 (step X566), and the address of the random number storage area for the special figure 2 is calculated (step X567). ), The big hit random number prepared in the hard random number acquisition process is saved in the big hit random number storage area of the RWM (step X568).

  Thereafter, a big hit symbol random number is extracted (step X569) and saved in the big hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X570). Further, a small hit symbol random number is extracted and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X571). Subsequently, the variation pattern random numbers 2 and 3 are extracted and saved in the variation pattern random number storage area of the RWM corresponding to each random number (step X572), and the special figure starting port 3 switch processing ends. That is, the game control device 100 forms a starting winning storage unit that extracts and stores a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball into the second starting winning opening 97. Note that the variation pattern random number 1 is not used for the special figure 2 variation display game because there are few types of variation patterns.

[Special figure 1 game processing]
FIG. 37 shows the special figure 1 game process (step X110) in the timer interrupt process described above. The control of the entire process relating to the special figure 1 variable display game and the setting of the display of the special figure 1 are performed. In the special figure 1 game process, first, it is determined whether or not a special figure 1 interrupting flag that is set when the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted is set (step Y100). If the special figure 1 interrupting flag is not set (step Y100; N), that is, if the special figure 1 variable display game is not interrupted, the process proceeds to step Y101 and the subsequent special figure 1 Perform processing related to the variable display game. On the other hand, when the special figure 1 interruption flag is set (step Y100; Y), that is, when the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted, the processing related to the special figure 1 variable display game in steps Y101 to Y118. Is not performed, and the process proceeds to step Y119. As a result, during the suspension of the special figure 1 variable display game, the special figure 1 variable display game does not proceed (the special figure 1 game processing timer is not updated), and only the variable display continues.

  In step Y101, it is determined whether the special figure 2 is in the big hit / small hit, that is, whether the special figure 2 variable display game is in the special game state executed based on the big hit or the small hit. (Step Y101). If the special hit 2 is not during the big hit / small hit (step Y101; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed (step Y102). Step Y103). If the big hit / small hit in the special map 2 is being performed (step Y101; Y), the process proceeds to step Y103.

  In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, the detection of the game ball by the special winning opening switch 38a provided in the special variable winning device 38 is monitored, and the detection is transmitted to the effect control device 300 based on the winning in the special winning opening. A process of setting a winning opening count command and a process of closing the winning opening when a specified number of winnings are performed in the winning opening are performed. In the special figure 1 game process, a special winning state switch monitoring process is performed for a special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 1 variable display game being a big hit or a small hit. For the special game state executed based on the result of the game being a big hit or a small hit, a special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in a special figure 2 game process described later.

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y104). If the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y104; N), that is, if the time is not up, the flow shifts to step Y119 to perform the subsequent processing. If the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y104; Y), that is, if the time has expired or the time has already elapsed, the processing branches to the processing corresponding to the special figure 1 game processing number. Is set in a register (step Y105). Then, by using the table, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game processing number is obtained (step Y106), and a subroutine call based on the special figure 1 game processing number is performed (step Y107).

  If the special figure 1 game processing number is “0” in step Y107, the start of the change of the special figure 1 variable display game is monitored, and the setting of the start of the change of the special figure 1 variable display game, the setting of the effect, the special figure 1 A special figure 1 ordinary processing (step Y108) for setting information necessary for performing the processing during fluctuation in FIG. 1 is performed. If the special figure 1 game processing number is “1” in step Y107, the special figure for setting the stop display time of the special figure 1 and the information necessary for performing the processing during the special figure 1 display is performed. One fluctuation process (step Y109) is performed.

  In step Y107, if the special figure 1 game processing number is “2”, if the game result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, the setting of the fanfare command according to the big hit type and the setting of each big hit type A special figure 1 displaying process (step Y110) for setting the fanfare time according to the special winning opening opening pattern, setting information necessary for performing the process during the fanfare / interval, and the like is performed.

  If the special figure 1 game processing number is “3” in step Y107, the setting of the opening time of the special winning opening, the update of the opening number, the setting of information necessary for performing the special winning opening processing, and the like are performed. The processing of the fanfare / interval to be performed (step Y111) is performed. In step Y107, if the special figure 1 game processing number is “4”, if the big hit round is not the last round, an interval command is set, and if it is the last round, an ending command is set. A special winning opening opening process (step Y112) for setting information necessary for performing the remaining ball process is performed.

  If the special figure 1 game processing number is “5” in step Y107, if the big hit round is the last round, the processing for setting the time for discharging the remaining ball in the special winning opening or the special figure 1 A special winning port remaining ball processing (step Y113) for setting information necessary for performing the big hit end processing is performed. If the special figure 1 game processing number is “6” in step Y107, the special figure 1 big hit end processing (step Y114) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 1 ordinary processing (step Y108) I do.

  If the special figure 1 game processing number is "7" in step Y107, the opening time and opening pattern of the special winning opening when a small hit occurs, the setting of the fanfare command, and the processing during the small hit are performed. During the small hit fanfare (step Y115), information necessary for the setting is set. If the special figure 1 game processing number is "8" in step Y107, a small hitting middle processing (step Y116) for setting an ending command, setting information necessary for performing small hit remaining ball processing, and the like is performed. Do.

  If the special figure 1 game processing number is "9" in step Y107, the processing for setting the time for discharging the remaining ball that has won in the big winning opening during the small hitting middle processing or the small hit end A small hit remaining sphere process (step Y117) for setting information necessary for performing the process is performed. If the special figure 1 game processing number is “10” in step Y107, special figure 1 small hit end processing (step Y118) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 1 ordinary processing is performed.

  After that, a special figure 1 change control table for controlling the change of the special figure 1 display 51 is prepared (step Y119), and a pattern change control process (step Y120) related to the special figure 1 display 51 is performed. FIG. 1 The game processing ends. The special figure 1 game process performs a series of execution control for the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game).

[Special figure 2 game processing]
FIG. 38 shows the special figure 2 game process (step X111) in the timer interrupt process described above. In the special figure 2 game process, the control of the entire processing relating to the special figure 2 variable display game and the display setting of the special figure 2 are performed. The special figure 2 game processing basically performs the same processing as the above-described special figure 1 game processing for the special figure 2.

  In the special figure 2 game process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 suspended flag which is set when the special figure 2 variable display game is suspended is set (step Y130). If the special figure 2 suspension flag is not set (step Y130; N), that is, if the special figure 2 variable display game is not interrupted, the process proceeds to step Y131, and the subsequent special figure 2 is executed. Perform processing related to the variable display game. On the other hand, when the special figure 2 suspended flag is set (step Y130; Y), that is, when the special figure 2 variable display game is suspended, the processing related to the special figure 2 variable display game in steps Y131 to Y151. Is not performed, and the process proceeds to Step Y152. As a result, during the suspension of the special figure 2 variable display game, the special figure 2 variable display game does not progress (the special figure 2 game processing timer is not updated), and only the variable display continues.

  In step Y131, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is in the big hit / small hit, that is, whether the special figure 1 variable display game is in the special game state executed based on the big hit or the small hit. (Step Y131). If it is not during the big hit / small hit in the special figure 1 (step Y131; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed (step Y132), and if the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step Y132). Step Y133). If the big hit / small hit in the special map 1 is being performed (step Y131; Y), the process shifts to step Y133.

  In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, the detection of the game ball by the special winning opening switch 38a provided in the special variable winning device 38 is monitored, and the detection is transmitted to the effect control device 300 based on the winning in the special winning opening. A process of setting a winning opening count command and a process of closing the winning opening when a specified number of winnings are performed in the winning opening are performed. In the special figure 2 game processing, a special winning state switch monitoring process is performed for a special game state that is executed based on the result of the special figure 2 variable display game being a big hit or a small hit. For the special game state executed based on the result of the game being a big hit or a small hit, the special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in the above-described special figure 1 game process.

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y134). If the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y134; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step Y152, and the subsequent processing is performed. If the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y134; Y), that is, if the time has expired or the time has already expired, whether the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 or not Is determined (step Y135).

  If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y135; N), the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (step Y150), and the length is stored in the special figure 2 game processing timer area. The variation timer value (here, 60000 ms) is saved (step Y151), and the processing from step Y152 is performed.

  In order to prevent the player from intentionally executing the special figure 2 variable display game in which the small hit occurrence probability is high in the normal game state, the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game in the normal game state is very long. (For example, 10 minutes). However, since the area that can be used as the special figure 2 game processing timer is limited, it is difficult to measure the fluctuation time at once even if an upper limit is set as the timer initial value. Therefore, the variation time is measured by a plurality of times using the number of repetitions, which is the number of times the specified time (here, 60000 ms) is measured.

  If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y135; Y), the special figure 2 game sequence branch table referred to branch to the processing corresponding to the special figure 2 game processing number is set in the register. (Step Y136). Then, by using the table, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game processing number is obtained (step Y137), and a subroutine call based on the special figure 2 game processing number is performed (step Y138).

  If the special figure 2 game processing number is “0” in step Y138, the start of the change of the special figure 2 variable display game is monitored, and the setting of the start of the change of the special figure 2 variable display game, the setting of the effect, and the special setting are performed. FIG. 2 A special process 2 (step Y139) for setting information necessary for performing the process during fluctuation is performed. If the special figure 2 game processing number is “1” in step Y138, the special figure for setting the stop display time of the special figure 2 and the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 displaying process is performed. The process during two fluctuations (step Y140) is performed.

  In step Y138, if the special figure 2 game processing number is “2”, if the game result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, the setting of the fanfare command according to the type of the big hit and the setting of each big hit type The special figure 2 displaying process (step Y141) for setting the fanfare time according to the special winning opening opening pattern, setting information necessary for performing the process during the fanfare / interval, and the like is performed.

  If the special figure 2 game processing number is “3” in step Y138, the setting of the opening time of the special winning opening, the update of the number of times of opening, the setting of the information necessary for performing the special winning opening processing, etc. The processing of the fanfare / interval to be performed (step Y142) is performed. In step Y138, if the special figure 2 game processing number is "4", an interval command is set if the big hit round is not the last round, and an ending command is set if the big hit round is the last round. A special winning opening opening process (step Y143) for setting information necessary for performing the remaining ball process is performed.

  In step Y138, if the special figure 2 game processing number is "5", if the big hit round is the last round, the processing for setting the time for discharging the remaining ball in the special winning opening or the special figure 2 A special winning opening remaining ball process (step Y144) for setting information necessary for performing the big hit end process is performed. If the special figure 2 game processing number is “6” in step Y138, the special figure 2 big hit end processing (step Y145) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 2 ordinary processing (step Y108) I do.

  If the special figure 2 game processing number is “7” in step Y138, the opening time and opening pattern of the big winning opening when a small hit occurs, the setting of the fanfare command, and the processing during the small hit are performed. In the small hit fanfare processing (step Y146) for setting the information necessary for the operation is performed. If the special figure 2 game processing number is "8" in step Y138, a small hitting middle processing (step Y147) for setting an ending command, setting information necessary for performing a small hit remaining ball processing, and the like is performed. Do.

  If the special figure 2 game processing number is "9" in step Y138, the processing for setting the time for discharging the remaining ball that has won in the big winning opening during the small hitting processing or the processing for ending the small hitting A small hit remaining sphere process (step Y148) for setting information necessary for the process is performed. If the special figure 2 game processing number is “10” in step Y138, the special figure 2 small hit end processing (step Y149) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 2 normal processing is performed.

  After that, a special figure 2 change control table for controlling the change of the special figure 2 display 52 is prepared (step Y152), and a symbol change control process (step Y153) related to the special figure 2 display 52 is performed. FIG. 2 ends the game processing. The special figure 2 game process performs a series of execution control for the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game). The above-described special figure 2 game processing basically performs the same processing as the above-described special figure 1 game processing for the special figure 2. In the following description, the special figure 1 game processing and the special figure 2 game processing will be described. The corresponding processes will be described in parallel.

[Special Figure 1 Normal Processing]
FIG. 39 shows the special figure 1 ordinary processing (step Y108) in the above-described special figure 1 game processing. In the special map 1 ordinary processing, first, it is determined whether the change of the special map 1 can be started (step Y201). The state in which the special figure 1 can start to fluctuate in this determination means that the state is not from the stop of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 fluctuating display game, which is a big hit or a small hit, to the end of the special game state. It should be noted that while the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed or the special game state based on the special figure 1 variable display game cannot be started to change, in this case, the special figure 1 normal processing is not executed. Here, this need not be determined.

  If the special figure 1 cannot be changed (step Y201; N), the special figure 1 ordinary processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y217), and the special figure 1 ordinary processing ends. In addition, when the variation of the special figure 1 can be started (step Y201; Y), it is determined whether the left-handing instruction has been notified, that is, whether the left-handing instruction notification flag has been set (step Y202). If the left-handing instruction has been notified (step Y202; Y), the process proceeds to step Y206. If the left-turn instruction has not been notified (step Y202; N), a left-turn instruction notification command is prepared (step Y203), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y204). Thereafter, a left-handed instruction notification flag is set (step Y205), and it is determined whether the number of reserved special figure 1 is 0 (step Y206). The left-handed instruction notification flag is cleared when the second specific game state ends, so that the left-handed instruction notification is performed when shifting to the normal game state.

  If the number of reserved special figure 1 is 0 (step Y206; Y), the process proceeds to step Y217. If the number of reserved special figure 1 is not 0 (step Y206; N), a fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y207), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y208). Thereafter, a special figure 1 change start process for setting information relating to the special figure 1 change display game is performed (step Y210), and a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation number is prepared (step Y211). Then, effect command setting processing is performed (step Y212). At the time of performing the process of preparing the decoration special figure reservation number command (step Y210), the special figure 1 reservation number is not subtracted based on the start of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the current special figure 1 reservation is not performed. A hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number obtained by subtracting -1 from the number is prepared.

  Next, the special figure status change area is set (information addition) in the special figure status area (step Y212). Here, the special figure status indicates the state of the special figure change display game, and any one of 0 to 5 is set. The special figure status 0 indicates a state in which neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is executed, the special figure status 1 indicates a state in which only the special figure 1 variable display game is executed, The special figure status 2 indicates a state in which only the special figure 2 variable display game is executed. The special figure status 3 indicates a state in which both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are executed, and the special figure status 4 is a first special game state which is a special game state based on a big hit. The special figure status 5 indicates a second special game state which is a special game state based on a small hit. Here, since the special figure 1 change display game is started, 1 or 3 is set as the special figure status.

  Next, it is determined whether the game is in the fourth specific game state (step Y213). If the game is in the fourth specific game state (step Y213; Y), the process proceeds to step Y216. If it is not in the fourth specific game state (step Y213; N), the special figure 1 change check flag is set (step Y215). That is, when the special figure 1 variable display game is started in a state other than the fourth specific game state, the special figure 1 variable display flag is set, and the special figure 1 variable display is performed during the period when the special figure 1 variable display game is the main change. It is possible to confirm the execution of the game. Thereafter, the special figure 1 changing process transition setting processing is performed (step Y216), and the special figure 1 ordinary processing ends.

[Tokuzu 2 usual processing]
FIG. 40 shows the special figure 2 ordinary processing (step Y139) in the above-described special figure 2 game processing. In the special map 2 usual processing, first, it is determined whether the change of the special map 2 can be started (step Y221). The state in which the special figure 2 can start to change in this determination means that the state is not from the stop of the change of the special figure 1 change display game, which is a big hit or a small hit, to the end of the special game state. It should be noted that, while the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed or the special game state based on the special figure 2 variable display game is not in a state where the fluctuation can be started, in this case, the special figure 2 is a state in which the normal processing is not executed. Here, this need not be determined.

  If the special figure 2 cannot be changed (step Y221; N), the special figure 2 usual processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y237), and the special figure 2 normal processing ends. If the special figure 2 can be started to change (step Y221; Y), it is determined whether the number of reserved special figure 2 is 0 (step Y222). As described above, the special figure 2 hold (second start memory) is based on the winning when the winning in the second starting winning opening 97 is made in a state where the special figure 2 variable display game can be started. This is temporarily generated to perform the process of starting the special figure variable display game, and is not for suspending the start of the special figure variable display game as in the first start memory.

  If the number of reserved special figure 2 is not 0 (step Y222; N), a fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y223), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y224). Thereafter, a special figure 2 change start process for setting information relating to the special figure 2 change display game is performed (step Y225), and the special figure 2 is set (information addition) in the special figure status area (step Y226). Here, since the special figure 2 variable display game is started, 2 or 3 is set as the special figure status.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the game is in the normal game state (step Y227). If it is not in the normal gaming state (step Y227; N), the process proceeds to step Y230. When the game is in the normal game state (step Y227; Y), the special figure 2 change check flag is set (step Y229). That is, when the special figure 2 variable display game is started during the period in which the special figure 2 variable display game is irregularly changed, the special figure 2 change check flag is set. Thereby, it can be confirmed that the player intentionally executes the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in which the irregular fluctuation occurs. Then, the special figure 2 changing process transition setting processing is performed (step Y230), and the special figure 2 ordinary processing ends.

  On the other hand, if the special figure 2 reservation number is 0 (step Y222; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 reservation number is 0 (step Y231). If the special figure 1 reservation number is 0 (step Y231; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 is changing (step Y232). If the special figure 1 is not fluctuating (step Y232; N), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demonstration has been started (step Y233). If it has not been disclosed (step Y233; N), the customer waiting state is set. Performs processing related to settings. Also, if the special figure 1 reservation number is not 0 (step Y231; N), if the special figure 1 is changing (step Y232; Y), or if the customer waiting demonstration has been started (step Y233; Y), Then, the process proceeds to Step Y237.

  In the process related to the setting of the customer waiting state, first, a customer waiting demonstration flag is set in the customer waiting demonstration flag area (step Y234), and a customer waiting demo command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y235). A command setting process is performed (step Y236), and the process proceeds to step Y237. By making the customer waiting demonstration command correspond to the current probability state, it is possible to display different customer waiting screens according to the probability state.

  Further, if the effect control device 300 is restarted for some reason, the effect control device 300 without the backup function loses the information of the game state, so that it is impossible to perform an appropriate effect, but By making the waiting demo command correspond to the current probability state, from the reception of this command, it is possible to perform an effect according to the game state, and to transmit the probability information command based on the change of the game state. It becomes possible to return to the effect according to the gaming state earlier than waiting.

  In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed simultaneously, and the probability state may be changed by the processing for the special figure 1 variable display game. Therefore, a change start probability information command is transmitted each time the special figure change display game is started (steps Y207 and Y223). This makes it possible for the effect control device 300 to perform an appropriate effect according to the gaming state.

  In addition, by transmitting the fluctuation start probability information command every time the special figure fluctuation display game is started, even if the production control device 300 is restarted, the production according to the game state can be performed from the reception of this command. Thus, it is possible to return to the effect corresponding to the game state earlier than waiting for the transmission of the probability information command based on the change of the game state. It should be noted that the customer waiting demonstration command and the change start probability information command may include other information for enabling the effect to be returned to the effect according to the gaming state when the effect control device 300 is restarted.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation start processing]
FIG. 41 shows the special figure 1 change start processing (step Y209) in the above-described special figure 1 ordinary processing. This special figure 1 change start processing is processing performed at the start of the special figure 1 change display game. First, a fall lottery process for performing a lottery transition from the high-probability state to the normal-probability state is performed (step Y239), and a support management process for managing a period for setting a general-purpose support is performed (step Y240). Next, the special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step Y241), and the result information of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is lost. A big hit flag 1 setting process for setting information, big hit information or small hit information is performed (step Y242).

  Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step Y243) related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure which sets the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is performed. A 1-information setting process (step Y244) is performed to prepare a special-figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table that is a table in which various information relating to setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game are set. (Step Y245).

  Thereafter, a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y246) for setting a fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation mode in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is performed, and a fluctuation start information setting for setting information of a fluctuation start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is performed. The processing (step Y247) is performed. Through these processes, the result and the variation pattern (variation time) of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed are determined. Then, after that, a process for adjusting so that no inconvenience occurs between the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that can be executed simultaneously.

  The special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed at the same time, but when a special result (big hit or small hit) is derived, the other is forcibly disconnected regardless of the lottery result. As a result, it ends. In particular, the special figure 2 variable display game has a high probability of a small hit. Therefore, when the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped first, there is a high possibility that such processing is performed for the special figure 1 variable display game. . Therefore, for example, despite a high expectation effect in the special figure 1 variable display game, the game is forcibly stopped as a result of a loss, and the player has distrust. Therefore, if there is a possibility that the special figure 2 variable display game will end before the special figure 1 variable display game that is about to be started, measures such as preventing the effect with high expectation from being selected are taken. I can do it.

  For this purpose, first, it is determined whether the game is in the fourth specific game state (step Y248). If the game is in the fourth specific game state (step Y248; Y), the process proceeds to step Y257. When the game is in the fourth specific game state, the game proceeds mainly with the special figure 2 variable display game. In this state, since the variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game is short and executed at a high frequency, it is known that the special figure 1 variable display game is likely to be forcibly stopped as a result of a deviation. In the special figure 1 change display game, the effect is set in advance so that an effect with a high degree of expectation is not selected, so that no special processing is performed here.

  If it is not in the fourth specific game state (step Y248; N), it is determined whether the special figure 2 is changing (step Y249). When the special figure 2 is not fluctuating (step Y249; N), the processing shifts to step Y257. In this case, even if the special figure 2 variable display game is started from now on, the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game is an extremely long fluctuation time. Therefore, since it is unlikely that the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped, a process for preventing an effect with high expectation from being selected is not performed here.

  If the special figure 2 is changing (step Y249; Y), it is determined whether or not the result of the running special figure 2 change display game is incorrect (step Y250), and if the result is incorrect (step Y250; Y). ) Goes to step Y257. In this case, the special figure 1 variable display game is not forcibly stopped. If the result of the running special figure 2 variable display game is not losing (step Y250; N), it is determined whether the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y251). When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y251; Y), the processing shifts to step Y254. If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y251; N), it is determined whether the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 4 or more (step Y252).

  If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 4 or more (step Y252; Y), the process proceeds to step Y257. In this case, the remaining change time of the special figure 2 variable display game is sufficiently long, and the special figure 1 variable display game ends earlier, so that an effect with high expectation is not selected. No processing is performed.

  If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 4 or more (step Y252; N), the remaining variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game is calculated (step Y253), and the special figure 1 variable display to be executed from now on It is determined whether the fluctuation time of the game is less than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (step Y254). If the change time of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed is less than the remaining change time of the special figure 2 variable display game (step Y254; Y), the process proceeds to step Y257. In this case, since the special figure 1 variable display game ends earlier, the processing for preventing the effect with high expectation from being selected is not performed.

  Further, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed is not less than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game (step Y254; N), it is notified that the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is longer. A command is prepared (step Y255), effect command setting processing is performed (step Y256), and fourth specific game state setting processing for setting the fourth specific game state is performed (step Y257), and the special figure 1 starts to change. The process ends. This command includes information indicating whether the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit or a small hit. In the effect control device 300, based on receiving a command notifying that the variation time of the special figure 1 is longer, the selection of an effect with high expectation for the special figure 1 variation display game is restricted or a specific execution is performed. Processing such as setting an aspect is performed.

  In addition, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game to be executed is not less than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (step Y254; N), it is set in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y246). The process of resetting the information on the variation pattern (the first half variation pattern number or the like) may be performed, and the effect control device 300 may change the variation pattern to a variation pattern that does not select an effect with high expectation. In the process of resetting the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation time may not be changed or may be changed. Further, the process of preparing a command for notifying that the fluctuation time of Tokuzu 1 is longer (step Y255) may or may not be performed.

  That is, in the special figure 1 change pattern process (step Y246) performed by the game control device 100, when the change mode information including the change time of the first change display game is determined in the normal game state, the second change display game is executed. The first variation mode determining means is capable of determining the variation mode information of the first variation display game without referring to the variation mode information. Further, the process of resetting the above-mentioned variation pattern performed by the game control device 100 is performed when the variation mode information including the variation time of the first variation display game is determined by the first variation mode determining means. Is being executed, by referring to the variation time included in the variation mode information of the second variation display game, information on the variation pattern is determined without changing the determined variation time of the first variation display game. A second variation mode determination unit that can be determined again is provided.

  Also, instead of changing the fluctuation pattern once determined in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y246), the variable pattern is executed from now on when the fluctuation pattern is determined in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y246). A process (step Y254) of determining whether the change time of the special figure 1 change display game is not less than the remaining change time of the special figure 2 change display game is performed, and a change pattern according to the game situation is determined from the beginning. You may do it.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
FIG. 42 shows the special figure 2 change start processing (step Y225) in the above-described special figure 2 ordinary processing. This special figure 2 change start processing is processing performed at the start of the special figure 2 change display game. First, a fall lottery process for performing a lottery transition from the high-probability state to the normal-probability state is performed (step Y259), and a support management process for managing a period for setting the general-purpose support is performed (step Y260). Next, a special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step Y261), and the result information of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is lost. A big hit flag 2 setting process for setting information, big hit information or small hit information is performed (step Y262).

  Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step Y263) related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure which sets the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is performed. A 2 information setting process (step Y264) is performed to prepare a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which various kinds of information relating to setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are set. (Step Y265).

  After that, a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y266) for setting a fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation mode in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed, and a fluctuation start information setting for setting information of a fluctuation start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed. The processing (step Y267) is performed, the fourth specific game state setting processing for setting the fourth specific game state is performed (step Y268), and the special figure 2 change start processing ends.

  In the special figure 2 change start processing, the processing for adjusting the special figure 1 change display game and the special figure 2 change display game, which can be executed at the same time, so as not to cause inconvenience, is not performed. This is because the probability of a small hit in the special figure 1 variable display game is low, and there is little chance that the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly ended with a loss result. However, similarly to the special figure 1 change display game, when the game is forcibly stopped as a result of a loss, selection of an effect with high expectation may be restricted.

[Fall lottery process]
FIG. 43 shows a fall lottery process (steps Y239 and Y259) performed in the special figure 1 change start processing and the special figure 2 change start processing. In the falling lottery process, first, it is determined whether or not a high probability is being performed (step Y581). If the high probability is not being performed (step Y581; N), the falling lottery process is terminated. If the probability is high (step Y581; Y), a falling lottery random number is obtained (step Y582), and it is determined whether or not the player has won the falling lottery by referring to the determination value (step Y583).

  If the falling lottery has not been won (step Y583; N), the falling lottery process ends. In this case, the high probability state is maintained. In addition, when the falling lottery is won (step Y583; Y), processing for shifting to the low probability state is performed. First, a signal relating to the high probability end is saved in the external information output data area (step Y584). Here, it is set so that the two big hit signals are turned off. Further, a signal relating to the end of the high probability state is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y585). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is set to OFF, and the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is set to OFF. Then, the low-probability number is saved in the gaming state display number area (step Y586), and the special figure low probability flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y587). As a result, the low probability state is set from the special figure change display game that has won the falling lottery.

  Next, processing for ending the telephone support is performed. It should be noted that the general-purpose support is ended together with the winning of the falling lottery when the falling lottery is won in the third specific game state. First, it is determined whether or not the public telephone support is being performed (step Y588). If the public telephone support is not being performed (step Y588; N), the falling lottery process ends. In addition, when the normal power support is being performed (step Y588; Y), it is determined whether the number of times of support for managing the number of executions of the special figure change display game as the normal power support is 0 (step Y589).

  If the number of times of support is not 0 (step Y589; N), that is, if the specified number (here, 100 times) of the special figure change display game has not been executed since the end of the special game state (in the case of the first specific game state) Then, the state shifts to the second specific game state, and the general power support is continued, so that the falling lottery process is ended. When the number of times of support is 0 (step Y589; Y), that is, a specified number (in this case, 100 times) of the special figure change display game has been executed from the end of the special game state, but the third game is executed without winning the falling lottery. If it is in the specific gaming state, a process of ending the ordinary power support in step Y590 and thereafter is performed to shift to the normal gaming state.

  In the process for ending the general-purpose support, first, a signal relating to the end of working hours is saved in the external information output data area (step Y590). Here, it is set so that the two big hit signals are turned off. Further, a signal relating to the end of time saving is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y591). Here, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal is set to OFF, and the special symbol 2 fluctuation time reduction state signal is set to OFF.

  Then, the special figure low probability and no time saving number are saved in the game state display number area (step Y592), and the special figure low probability and no support flag are saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y593). After that, the low probability is set (step Y594), and the falling lottery process ends. As a result, the state becomes the low probability state and the state without the ordinary power support, and the state shifts to the normal game state. In addition, the information of the end of the high probability state and the end of the ordinary power support is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 performs processing such as changing the effect mode based on the information.

[Support management processing]
FIG. 44 shows the support management processing (steps Y240 and Y260) performed in the special figure 1 change start processing and the special figure 2 change start processing. In this support management process, first, it is determined whether or not the general telephone support is being performed (step Y1521). If the general telephone support is not being performed (step Y1521; N), the support management process ends. In addition, if the telephone number is being supported (step Y1521: Y), if the number of times of support for managing the number of executions of the special figure change display game as the telephone number support is not 0, -1 is updated (step Y1522). It is determined whether the number of times is 0 (step Y1523).

  When the number of times of support is not 0 (step Y1523; N), that is, when the specified number (here, 100 times) of the special figure change display game has not been executed since the end of the special game state (the first specific game state or the second specific game state) If the gaming state is continued), the support management process ends. Further, when the number of times of support is 0 (step Y1523; Y), that is, when a special figure fluctuation display game exceeding a specified number (here, 100 times) is started from the end of the special game state, or when the special game state is already set. If the special figure fluctuation display game exceeding the specified number has been executed since the end, but the third specific game state has not been won in the drop lottery, it is determined whether or not the game is in the high probability state (step Y1524).

  If the state is the high probability state (step Y1524; Y), the support management process ends because the state shifts to the third specific game state or the third specific game state continues. If the state is not the high probability state (step Y1524; N), a process of ending the ordinary power support in step Y1525 and thereafter to end the second specific game state and shift to the normal game state.

  In the process of ending the general-purpose support, first, a signal relating to the end of working hours is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1525). Here, it is set so that the two big hit signals are turned off. Further, a signal relating to the end of time saving is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1526). Here, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal is set to OFF, and the special symbol 2 fluctuation time reduction state signal is set to OFF.

  Then, the special figure low probability, no time saving number is saved in the gaming state display number area (step Y1527), and the special figure low probability, no support flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1528). After that, the low probability is set (step Y1529), the left-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (step Y1530), and the left-handed instruction is notified at the start of the next special figure change display game, and the support management processing is performed. To end. As a result, the second specific gaming state ends, and the game shifts to the normal gaming state.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
FIG. 45 shows the big hit flag 1 setting process (step Y242) in the above-described special figure 1 change start process. In the big hit flag 1 setting process, first, the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 1 area (step Y271), and the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step Y272). Next, a jackpot random number is loaded from the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for reserved number 1) and prepared (step Y273), and the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for reserved number 1) is cleared to zero. The storage number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special figure start storage having the earliest digestion order (here, the first special figure 1).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 which is the result of the big hit determination of the running special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (step Y275). If the big hit is a big hit (step Y275; Y), the process proceeds to step Y279. I do. That is, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that are executed at the same time are prevented from being a big hit. If it is not a big hit (step Y275; N), a big hit determination process is performed (step Y276) to determine whether or not the obtained big random number value is a big hit according to whether or not the big hit determination value matches.

  If the result of the jackpot determination process (step Y276) is a jackpot (step Y277; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 1 area in which the loss information has been saved in step Y272 (step Y278). ), The big hit flag 1 setting process ends. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step Y276) is not a big hit (step Y277; N), it is determined whether or not the obtained big hit random number value is a small hit according to whether or not it is a small hit. Is performed (step Y279).

  If the result of the small hit determination process (step Y279) is a small hit (step Y280; Y), the small hit information is overwritten on the small hit flag 1 area where the loss information was saved in step Y271, and the save is performed. Then (step Y281), the big hit flag 1 setting process ends. On the other hand, if the result of the small hit determination process (step Y279) is not a small hit (step Y280; N), the big hit flag 1 setting process ends. In this case, the loss information is saved in the large hit flag 1 area and the small hit flag 1 area.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
FIG. 46 shows the big hit flag 2 setting process (step Y262) in the above-described special figure 2 change start process. In the big hit flag 2 setting process, first, the shift information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area (step Y291), and the shift information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step Y292). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area of the RWM to prepare it (step Y293), and the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area is cleared to zero.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 as a result of the big hit determination of the running special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (step Y295). If the big hit is a big hit (step Y295; Y), the process proceeds to step Y299. I do. That is, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that are executed at the same time are prevented from being a big hit. If it is not a big hit (step Y295; N), a big hit determination process (step Y296) is performed to determine whether or not the acquired big hit random value matches the big hit determination value.

  If the result of the jackpot determination process (step Y296) is a jackpot (step Y297; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 2 area where the loss information was saved in step Y292 (step Y298). ), The big hit flag 2 setting process ends. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot determination process (step Y296) is not a jackpot (step Y297; N), whether the acquired jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value indicates whether the jackpot is a small jackpot or not. Is performed (step Y299).

  If the result of the small hit determination process (step Y299) is a small hit (step Y300; Y), the small hit information is overwritten on the small hit flag 2 area where the loss information has been saved in step Y291, and the save is performed. Then (step Y301), the big hit flag 2 setting process ends. On the other hand, if the result of the small hit determination process (step Y299) is not a small hit (step Y300; N), the big hit flag 2 setting process ends. In this case, the miss information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area and the small hit flag 2 area.

[Big hit determination process]
FIG. 47 shows the big hit determination processing (steps Y276 and Y296) in the big hit flag 1 setting processing and the big hit flag 2 setting processing described above. In the big hit determination process, first, a lower limit determination value of the big hit determination value is set (step Y311), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step Y312). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot determination value is a plurality of consecutive values, and when the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than a lower limit determination value that is a lower limit value of the jackpot determination value and is equal to or less than an upper limit determination value that is an upper limit value of the jackpot determination value. Is determined to be a big hit.

  If the value of the target big hit random number is smaller than the lower limit judgment value (step Y312; Y), that is, if it is not a big hit, a loss is set as the judgment result (step Y317), and the big hit judgment processing ends. It should be noted that the loss as a result of the determination indicates that the player has lost the lottery of the big hit. If the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step Y312; N), it is determined whether the state is the high probability state (step Y313).

  If it is in the high-probability state (step Y313; Y), an upper-limit determination value during high-probability is set (step Y314), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper-limit determination value (step Y316). ). If the state is not the high probability state (step Y313; N), an upper limit judgment value during the low probability is set (step Y315), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step Y316). .

  When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step Y316; Y), that is, when the big hit is not a big hit, a loss is set as a judgment result (step Y317), and the big hit judgment processing ends. When the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (step Y316; N), that is, when it is a big hit, a big hit is set as a judgment result (step Y318), and the big hit judgment processing ends.

[Small hit determination processing]
FIG. 48 shows the small hit determination processing (steps Y279 and Y299) in the above described big hit flag 1 setting processing and big hit flag 2 setting processing. In the small hit determination process, first, it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321). Note that the small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit determination value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is equal to or greater than a lower limit determination value which is a lower limit value of the small hit determination value and equal to or less than an upper limit determination value which is an upper limit value of the small hit determination value. In some cases, a small hit is determined. Also, the big hit determination value and the small hit determination value do not overlap.

  If the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step Y321; Y), that is, if it is not a small hit, an outlier is set as the judgment result (step Y326), and the small hit judgment processing ends. It should be noted that the loss as a result of the determination indicates that the lottery has been lost. If the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321; N), it is determined whether the information of the special figure 1 is being set, that is, whether the determination is for the special figure 1 variable display game. (Step Y322).

  If the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step Y322; Y), the small hit upper limit judgment value for the special figure 1 is set (step Y323), and the value of the target big hit random number is set to the small hit upper limit judgment value. It is determined whether the value is greater than (step Y325). If the information of the special figure 1 is not being set (step Y322; N), that is, if the determination is for the special figure 2 variable display game, the small hit upper limit determination value for the special figure 2 is set (step Y324). It is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step Y325).

  If the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step Y325; Y), that is, if it is not a small hit, a loss is set as the judgment result (step Y326), and the small hit judgment processing ends. If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step Y325; N), that is, if it is a small hit, a small hit is set as the judgment result (step Y327), and the small hit judgment processing ends. I do.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing]
FIG. 49 shows the special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing (step Y243) in the above-described special figure 1 change start processing. In the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step Y331), and if it is a big hit (step Y331; Y), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (the number of reservations 1) ) Is loaded with a jackpot symbol random number (step Y332). Next, the special figure 1 big hit symbol table is set (step Y333), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area (step Y334). The big hit type is selected by this process. The reason why the stop symbol of the special figure 1 variable display game is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol evacuation area instead of the special figure 1 stop symbol area is when the special result is derived in the special figure 2 variable display game. This is because the result may be forcibly changed to the result.

  After that, a special symbol 1 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step Y335), a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol pattern area (step Y336). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special figure display (here, the special figure 1 display 51) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number is obtained and saved in the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area (step Y337), and the special winning opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number is obtained. The special figure 1 large winning opening opening information area is saved (step Y338). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state. Then, an ornament special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y346).

  On the other hand, if it is not a big hit (step Y331; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step Y339), and if it is a small hit (step Y339; Y), the special figure 1 small hit symbol The small hit symbol random number is loaded from the random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) (step Y340). Next, the special figure 1 small hit symbol table is set (step Y341), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area (step Y342). The small hit type is selected by this processing. Thereafter, a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol pattern area (step Y343), and a decorative special symbol 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y346).

  If the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step Y339; N), the stop symbol number at the time of the loss is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol retreat area (step Y344), and the loss stop symbol pattern is stopped at the special figure 1 stop. The pattern is saved in the symbol pattern area (step Y345), and a decorative special figure 1 command corresponding to the stopped symbol pattern is prepared (step Y346). By the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure change display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decorative special figure 1 command is saved in the decorative special figure 1 command area (step Y347), and effect command setting processing (step Y348) is performed. The decorative special figure 1 command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stopped symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y349), and the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for reserved number 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y350). The symbol random number storage area for one small hit (for reserved number 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y351), and the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process ends.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing]
FIG. 50 shows the special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing (step Y263) in the above-described special figure 2 change start processing. The special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process is the same as the special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process for the special symbol 2. In the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step Y361), and if it is a big hit (step Y361; Y), the big hit symbol random number is stored in the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area. Is loaded (step Y362). Next, the special figure 2 big hit symbol table is set (step Y363), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 2 stopped symbol save area (step Y364). The big hit type is selected by this process. Note that the stop symbol of the special figure 2 variable display game is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol evacuation area instead of the special figure 2 stop symbol area when the special result is derived in the special figure 1 variable display game. This is because the result may be forcibly changed to the result.

  Thereafter, a special symbol 2 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step Y365), and a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol pattern area (step Y366). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special figure display (here, the special figure 2 display 52) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number is obtained and saved in the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area (step Y367), and the special winning opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number is obtained. The special drawing 2 large winning opening opening information area is saved (step Y368). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state. Then, an ornament special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y376).

  On the other hand, if it is not a big hit (step Y361; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y369). If it is a small hit (step Y369; Y), the special figure 2 small hit symbol The small hit symbol random number is loaded from the random number storage area (step Y370). Next, a special figure 2 small hit symbol table is set (step Y371), and a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stopped symbol save area (step Y372). The small hit type is selected by this processing. After that, a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol pattern area (step Y373), and a decorative special symbol 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y376).

  If the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step Y369; N), the stop symbol number at the time of the loss is saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol evacuation area (step Y374), and the non-stop symbol pattern is stopped. The pattern is saved in the symbol pattern area (step Y375), and a decorative special figure 2 command corresponding to the stopped symbol pattern is prepared (step Y376). By the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure change display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decorative special figure 2 command is saved in the decorative special figure 2 command area (step Y377), and effect command setting processing (step Y378) is performed. This decorative special figure 2 command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y379), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area is cleared to 0 (step Y380), and the special figure 2 small hit symbol random number is stored. The area is cleared to 0 (step Y381), and the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process ends.

  Through the above processing, information regarding the start of the special figure change display game is set. That is, based on the first start memory stored in the first start storage means, the game control device 100 displays the result and the change mode information of the first variable display game (the special figure 1 variable display game) in the first variable display game. Is a first determining means that can be determined before the start of. Further, the game control device 100 extracts a predetermined random number based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting winning opening 97, and based on the predetermined random number, a result of the second variable display game (the special figure 2 variable display game). And a second determining means for determining the variation mode information before the start of the second variation display game. Further, the game control device 100 constitutes a variation pattern determining means capable of determining a variation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

  From the above, the first start winning opening 36 is disposed at a position where a game ball fired on one side of the game area 32 can win, and the second start winning opening 97 is fired on the other side of the game area 32. The changed game ball is arranged at a position where a winning can be achieved, and the change mode information of the change display game includes information on a change time capable of specifying an execution time of the change display game, and in a normal state (normal game state). The variation time that can be determined as the variation time of the second variation display game by the second determination means is greater than the variation time that can be determined as the variation time of the first variation display game by the first determination means. It will be long.

  Then, the information on the start of the special figure change display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined change pattern based on the reception of the information on the start of the special figure change display game. Set the details of the effect in the decoration special figure change display game. The information related to the start of the special figure change display game includes a decoration special figure reservation number command including information regarding the number of storages to be started (the number of reservations), a decoration special figure command including information regarding a stop symbol, and a change in the special figure change display game. A fluctuation command including information on a pattern is exemplified. By transmitting the decoration special figure command before the change command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

  That is, the game control device 100 constitutes a first variable display game execution control unit capable of controlling the execution of the first variable display game (the special figure 1 variable display game) based on the determination result of the first determination unit. . In addition, it can be said that the first variable display game execution control means performs a series of execution control relating to the first variable display game from the whole of the special figure 1 game process. Further, the game control device 100 constitutes a second variable display game execution control unit capable of controlling the execution of the second variable display game (the special figure 2 variable display game) based on the determination result of the second determining unit. . Also, it can be said that the second variable display game execution control means performs a series of execution control on the second variable display game from the whole of the special figure 2 game process.

  Further, the game control device 100 controls the result and the variation mode information of the first variable display game determined by the first determination unit and the result and the variation mode information of the second variable display game determined by the second determination unit as control information. As transmission means that can be transmitted to the effect control means (effect control device 300). In addition, the game control device 100 starts measuring the variation time for each of the first variation display game and the second variation display game in response to the start of the variation display game, and when the measurement time has elapsed the variation time. It forms a measuring means for ending the measurement of the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display game.

  Note that if the result of the special figure 2 change display game in the normal game state, which is a low probability state, is a loss or a small hit, a long change with a very long change time is set. A command indicating only a long fluctuation may be transmitted without transmitting the information about the time to the effect control device 300. In the case of a long fluctuation, it is sufficient to simply perform the fluctuation display, and it is not necessary to determine the effect in detail. Therefore, the effect control device 300 starts the fluctuation display based on the reception of the command indicating the long fluctuation. The fluctuation time is managed only by the game control device 100, and a stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 based on the end of the fluctuation time, and the effect control device 300 stops the fluctuation display based on receiving the stop command. To do. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the effect control device 300.

[Fourth specific game state setting process]
FIG. 51 shows a fourth specific game state setting process (steps Y257 and Y268) performed in the special figure 1 change start processing and the special figure 2 change start processing. In the fourth specific game state setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the normal power support is being performed (step Y1501). If the normal power support is not being performed (step Y1501; N), the fourth specific game state setting process ends. I do. In addition, in the case where the general-purpose support is being performed (step Y1501; Y), it is determined whether the number of times of support for managing the number of executions of the special figure change display game as the general-purpose support is 0 (step Y1502).

  When the number of times of support is not 0 (Step Y1502; N), that is, when the specified number (here, 100 times) of the special figure change display game has not been executed since the end of the special game state (the first specific game state or the second specific game state) In the case of the game state), the fourth specific game state setting process ends. When the number of times of support is 0 (step Y1502; Y), that is, a specified number (in this case, 100 times) of the special figure change display game is executed from the end of the special game state, but the third game is executed without winning the falling lottery. If it is in the specific game state, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure change display game started this time is a big hit (step Y1503).

  If the result of the special figure change display game started this time is not a big hit (step Y1503; N), the third specific game state is continued, and thus the fourth specific game state setting process ends. If the result of the special figure change display game started this time is a big hit (step Y1503; Y), a process of ending the ordinary power support after step Y1504 is performed to shift to the fourth specific game state.

  In the processing for ending the general-purpose support, first, a signal relating to the end of working hours is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1504). Here, it is set so that the two big hit signals are turned off. Further, a signal related to the end of time saving is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1505). Here, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal is set to OFF, and the special symbol 2 fluctuation time reduction state signal is set to OFF.

  Then, the special figure high probability and the number without time saving are saved in the game state display number area (step Y1506), and the special figure high probability and no support flag are saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1507). After that, the low probability is set (step Y1508), the fourth specific game state flag is saved (step Y1509), and the fourth specific game state setting process ends. As a result, the state becomes the high probability state and the state without the ordinary power support, and the process shifts to the fourth specific game state setting.

  The fourth specific game state flag is a flag that is set to enable recognition of the fourth specific game state, and is cleared when the special game state starts. Since the fourth specific game state flag is not cleared even when the game is shifted to the fifth specific game state by winning the drop lottery during the fourth specific game state, the game state is low due to the fall in the fourth specific game state. It is possible to recognize that the game is in the fifth specific game state even when the game is in the state and no general-purpose support.

[Special figure 1 change processing transition setting processing]
FIG. 52 shows a special figure 1 changing processing transition setting processing (step Y216) in the special figure 1 ordinary processing. In this special figure 1 change processing transition setting processing, first, "1" is set as the special figure 1 game processing number (step Y601), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y602).

  Then, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step Y603), and a signal relating to the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y604). Here, the special symbol 1 changing signal is set to ON. Thereafter, the fluctuating flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step Y605), and the initial value of the blink control timer (timer of the blink cycle of the special figure 1 display 51) is stored in the special figure 1 blink control timer area (step Y605). For example, 100 ms) is set (step Y606). Further, an initial value is set in the special figure 1 changing symbol number area (step Y607), and the special figure 1 changing processing transition setting processing ends.

  The initial value to be set in the symbol number area during the fluctuating special figure 1 is 0, whereby the fluctuating display starts from a state where all the segments are turned off. Since at least one segment is lit in the state where the result mode is displayed, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variable display has started by starting the variable display from a state where all the segments are turned off.

[Special figure 2 processing transition setting processing]
FIG. 53 shows the special figure 2 change processing transition setting processing (step Y230) in the special figure 2 ordinary processing. In the special figure 2 changing processing transition setting processing, first, "1" is set as the special figure 2 game processing number (step Y611), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y612).

  Then, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step Y613), and a signal relating to the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y614). Here, the special symbol 2 changing signal is set to ON. Thereafter, the fluctuating flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step Y615), and the initial value of the blink control timer (timer of the blink cycle of the special figure 2 display 52) is stored in the special figure 2 blink control timer area (step Y615). For example, 100 ms) is set (step Y616). Further, an initial value is set in the special figure 2 changing symbol number area (step Y617), and the special figure 2 changing processing transition setting processing ends.

  The initial value to be set in the symbol number area during the change of the special figure 2 is 0, so that the variable display starts from a state where all the segments are turned off. Since at least one segment is lit in the state where the result mode is displayed, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variable display has started by starting the variable display from a state where all the segments are turned off.

  It should be noted that when the variable display is started on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, it starts from a state where all the segments are turned off, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the variable display may be started from a lighting mode different from the lighting mode of any of the result modes, and if there is a segment that is not used in any of the result modes, the variable display is started at least from a state in which the segment is turned on. You may do it. Further, the variable display may be started from a state where the same one segment is always turned on every time. In addition, the lighting mode when the change is started in the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be the same or different.

[Processing during special figure 1 fluctuation]
FIG. 54 shows the special figure 1 changing process (step Y109) in the above-described special figure 1 game process. In the special figure 1 changing process, first, the number of times of design confirmation output is updated by +1 (step Y621), and a command is loaded and prepared from the decorative special figure 1 command area (step Y622). Performed (Step Y623).

  Next, a decoration special figure 1 stop command is prepared (step Y624), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y625). In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the stop may be forcibly stopped before the change time set at the start of the change. Therefore, when the change is stopped, a stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. . Then, a display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y626). Here, a display time of 600 ms is set for a miss, 2000 ms for a big hit, and 136 ms for a small hit.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is out of place, that is, whether the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is out of place (step Y627). If the special figure 1 is out of alignment (step Y627; Y), the flow shifts to step Y647. If the special figure 1 is not out of the way (step Y627; N), that is, if it is a big hit or a small hit, it is determined whether the special figure 2 variable display game is also being executed (step Y628). Whether or not the special figure 2 change display game is running can be grasped by referring to the special figure status.

  If the special figure 2 change display game is not being executed (step Y628; Y), the flow shifts to step Y643. When the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed (step Y628; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 big hit is achieved, that is, whether the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (step Y629). ). If the special figure 1 is not a big hit (step Y629; N), that is, if the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit, the special figure 2 game interruption flag is set (step Y640), and the decoration special figure 2 interruption command is issued. Is prepared (step Y641), effect command setting processing (step Y642) is performed, and the flow shifts to step Y643.

  That is, in this case, the running of the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted based on the small figure winning of the special figure 1 variable display game. In addition, when the special figure 2 variable display game has already completed the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not been completed, it is also a target of interruption. The interrupted special figure 2 variable display game is restarted with the end of the special game state (second special game state) based on the small hit (second special result).

  On the other hand, when the special figure 1 is a big hit (step Y629; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 2 is being displayed (step Y630). That is, in this case, the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped on the result of the loss based on the special result of the special figure 1 variable display game. In addition, when the special figure 2 variable display game has already completed the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not been completed, the forced stop is also performed.

  When the special figure 2 is being displayed (step Y630; Y), the process proceeds to step Y632. If the special figure 2 is not being displayed (step Y630; N), the number of times of outputting the symbol determination times is updated by +1 (step Y631), and the display time of the special figure 1 set above as the display time of the special figure 2 is set. A display time of +4 ms is set (step Y632). By setting the display time of the special figure 1 + the display time of the special figure 2 as the display time of the special figure 2, the display times of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 end at the same time. The display time is reset even when the special figure 2 variable display game is already being displayed, and a new display time is started.

  Next, the display time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y633), and the decorative special figure 2 out-of-design symbol command is set and prepared (step Y634), and the design command is stored in the decorative special figure 2 command area. Saving is performed (step Y635), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y636). After that, a decoration special figure 2 stop command is prepared (step Y637), effect command setting processing is performed (step Y638), and processing transition setting processing 2 during special figure 2 display is performed (step Y639).

  Then, a command is loaded from the decorative special figure 1 command area and saved in the hit symbol command area (step Y643), and the special figure 1 small hit is determined, that is, the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is the small hit. Is determined (step Y644). If it is the special figure 1 small hit (step Y644; Y), the process proceeds to step Y647. If the special figure is not a small hit (step Y644; N), that is, if it is a big hit, information is loaded from the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step Y645). ), The information is loaded from the special winning opening opening information area and saved in the winning opening opening information area (step Y646).

  Thereafter, information is loaded from the special figure 1 stop symbol evacuation area, saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step Y647), and the special figure 1 in-display processing shift setting processing 1 is performed (step Y648). The displaying process ends.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation processing]
FIG. 55 shows the special figure 2 changing process (step Y140) in the above-described special figure 2 game process. In the special figure 2 changing process, first, the number of times of symbol determination output is updated by +1 (step Y651), a command is loaded and prepared from the decorative special figure 2 command area (step Y652), and the effect command setting processing is performed. Perform (step Y653).

  Next, a decoration special figure 2 stop command is prepared (step Y654), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y655). Then, a display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y656). Here, a display time of 600 ms is set for a miss, 2000 ms for a big hit, and 136 ms for a small hit.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the special figure 2 is off, that is, whether the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is off (step Y657). If the figure is out of special figure 2 (step Y657; Y), the flow shifts to step Y677. If the special figure 2 is not out of the way (step Y657; N), that is, if it is a big hit or a small hit, it is determined whether the special figure 1 variable display game is also being executed (step Y658). Whether the special figure 1 change display game is running or not can be grasped by referring to the special figure status.

  If the special figure 1 change display game is not being executed (step Y658; Y), the flow shifts to step Y673. If the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed (step Y658; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 2 big hit is reached, that is, whether the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (step Y659). ). If the special figure 2 is not a big hit (step Y659; N), that is, if the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit, the special figure 1 game interruption flag is set (step Y670), and the decorative special figure 1 interruption command is issued. Is prepared (step Y671), effect command setting processing (step Y672) is performed, and the flow shifts to step Y673.

  That is, in this case, the running of the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted based on the small figure winning of the special figure 2 variable display game. It should be noted that a case where the special figure 1 variable display game has already completed variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended is also subject to interruption. The interrupted special figure 1 variable display game is restarted with the end of the special game state (second special game state) based on the small hit (second special result).

  On the other hand, when the special figure 2 is a big hit (step Y659; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 is being displayed (step Y660). That is, in this case, the special figure 1 variable display game that is being executed is forcibly stopped with a loss result based on the fact that the special figure 2 variable display game has a special result. In addition, when the special figure 1 variable display game has already completed the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not been completed, the forced stop is also performed.

  When the special figure 1 is being displayed (step Y660; Y), the process proceeds to step Y662. If the special figure 1 is not being displayed (N in step Y660), the number of times of outputting the symbol determination number is updated by +1 (step Y661), and the process proceeds to step Y663.

  Next, the display time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y663), and a decorative special figure 1 off design command is set and prepared (step Y664). Saving is performed (step Y665), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y666). Thereafter, a decoration special figure 1 stop command is prepared (step Y667), effect command setting processing is performed (step Y668), and special figure 1 display processing transition setting processing 2 is performed (step Y669).

  Then, a command is loaded from the decorative special figure 2 command area and saved in the hit symbol command area (step Y673), and the special figure 2 small hit is determined, that is, the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is the small hit. Is determined (step Y674). If it is a special figure 2 small hit (step Y674; Y), the flow shifts to step Y677. If it is not the special figure 2 small hit (step Y674; N), that is, if it is a big hit, information is loaded from the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step Y675). ), Load the information from the special winning opening opening information area and save it in the winning opening opening information area (step Y676).

  Thereafter, information is loaded from the special symbol 2 stop symbol evacuation area, saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol area (step Y677), and the process shift setting process 1 during special figure 2 display is performed (step Y678). The displaying process ends.

[Special figure 1 display in progress transition setting processing 1]
FIG. 56 shows the special figure 1 displaying processing transition setting processing 1 (step Y648) in the above-described special figure 1 changing processing. In the special figure 1 display processing shift setting processing 1, first, a special figure 1 game processing number “2” related to the special figure 1 display processing is set (step Y681), and the processing number is set in the special figure 1 game processing number area. Is saved (step Y682).

  Next, a signal relating to the end of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y683). Here, the special symbol 1 changing signal is set to OFF. Thereafter, as a control information of the special figure 1 display 51 in the special figure 1 display 51, a stop flag relating to the stop of the change in the special figure 1 display 51 is saved in the special figure 1 change control flag area (step Y684). ), The special figure 1 changing process shift setting process 1 ends.

[Special figure 2 display processing transition setting processing 1]
FIG. 57 shows the special figure 2 displaying processing transition setting processing 1 (step Y678) in the above-described special figure 2 changing processing. In the special figure 2 display processing shift setting processing 1, first, the special figure 2 game processing number “2” related to the special figure 2 display processing is set (step Y691), and the processing number is set in the special figure 2 game processing number area. Is saved (step Y692).

  Next, a signal related to the end of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y693). Here, the special symbol 2 changing signal is set to OFF. Thereafter, as a control information of the special figure 2 change display game on the special figure 2 display 52, a stop flag relating to the change stop on the special figure 2 display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 change control flag area (step Y694). ), The special figure 2 changing process shift setting process 1 ends.

[Special figure 1 display in progress transition setting processing 2]
FIG. 58 shows the special figure 1 display processing transition setting processing 2 (step Y669) in the above-described special figure 2 changing processing. In the special figure 1 display processing transition setting processing 2, first, a special figure 1 game processing number “2” related to the special figure 1 display processing is set (step Y701), and the processing number is set in the special figure 1 game processing number area. Is saved (step Y702).

  Next, a signal relating to the end of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y703), and thereafter, as information for controlling the special figure 1 fluctuation display game on the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 1 The stop flag relating to the fluctuation stop on the display 51 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step Y704).

  The processing up to this point is the same as the above-described special figure 1 display-in-process shift setting processing 1, and thereafter, information for setting a result of a loss is set. First, the stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step Y705), and the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area is cleared (step Y706).

  Next, the special figure 1 large winning opening information area is cleared (step Y707), the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 1 area (step Y708), and the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step Y709). ). Then, the special figure 1 stop symbol evacuation area is cleared (step Y710), the stop symbol number for the special figure 1 stop symbol area is saved (step Y711), and the special figure 1 in-display process shift setting processing 2 is ended. .

[Special figure 2 display in progress process setting process 2]
FIG. 59 shows the special figure 2 displaying processing shift setting processing 2 (step Y639) in the above-described special figure 1 changing processing. In the special figure 2 display processing shift setting processing 2, first, a special figure 2 game processing number “2” related to the special figure 2 display processing is set (step Y721), and the processing number is set in the special figure 2 game processing number area. Is saved (step Y722).

  Next, a signal relating to the end of the change of the special figure 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y723), and thereafter, as information for controlling the special figure 2 change display game on the special figure 2 display 52, the special figure 2 The stop flag relating to the stop of the fluctuation on the display 52 is saved in the fluctuation control flag area of the special figure 2 (step Y724).

  Up to this point, the process is the same as the above-described special figure 2 display-in-process shift setting process 1, and thereafter, information for setting a loss result is set. First, the stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step Y725), and the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area is cleared (step Y726).

  Next, the special figure 2 big win opening information area is cleared (step Y727), the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area (step Y728), and the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step Y729). ). Then, the special symbol 2 stop symbol evacuation area is cleared (step Y730), and the special symbol 2 stop symbol area is saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number (step Y731). .

  According to the processing of FIGS. 54 to 59, when one special figure variable display game has the first special result (big hit), the other special figure variable display game is forcibly stopped with a disconnection result. Become. That is, based on the special result of the special figure 1 variable display game, a first end control process is performed in which the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped on the result of the special figure 2 and the special figure 2 variable display game is changed to the special result. As a result, a second end control process in which the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped as a result of the disconnection is performed.

  From the above, the first variable display game execution control means (game control device 100) executes the second variable display game when performing the execution control of the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game). When the second variable display game (the special figure 2 variable display game) for which the execution control is performed by the control means (game control device 100) has a first special result, the first variation for which the execution control is performed. It is possible to end the display game as a result other than the special result, and the second variable display game execution control means performs the first variable display game execution control means when performing the execution control of the second variable display game. When the first variable display game for which the execution control is performed has a first special result, the second variable display game for which the execution control is performed is ended as a result other than the special result. And thus it can be. With this, when a special result is derived in one of the variable display games, the other variable display game can be forcibly stopped with a disconnection result, so that no trouble occurs even when simultaneous fluctuation is performed. Can be

[Processing while displaying special figure 1]
FIGS. 60 and 61 show the special figure 1 displaying process (step Y110) in the above-described special figure 1 game processing. In this special figure 1 display processing, first, the small hit flag 1 set in the small hit flag 1 area in the big hit flag 1 setting processing in the special figure 1 change start processing is loaded (step Y751), and the small hit flag is set. One area is cleared (step Y752).

  Next, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 area in the big hit flag 1 setting processing in the special figure 1 change start processing is loaded (step Y753), and the big hit flag 1 area is cleared (step Y754). Then, the special figure 1 judges whether the big hit is, that is, whether the loaded big hit flag 1 is big hit information (step Y755), and if it is not a big hit (step Y755; N), the process shifts to step Y777. If it is a big hit (step Y755; Y), a test signal related to the start of the big hit (special figure 1 big hit) of the special figure 1 variable display game (for example, the condition device operating signal is turned on, The middle signal is turned on and the signal per special symbol is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y756).

  Then, a special figure 2 abnormal change release command is prepared (step Y757), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y758). That is, the abnormal change notification is ended with the occurrence of the first special game state. Thereafter, a round number upper limit table is set (step Y759), and a round number upper limit value (10 or 4 in the present embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit information is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value area. (Step Y760). Further, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit information is obtained and saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y761).

  Next, a decorative special figure command corresponding to the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern is loaded from the design command area and prepared (step Y762), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y763). Thereafter, a fanfare command is prepared (step Y764), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y765).

  Next, the special winning opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of a big hit in the special figure change display game are saved in the external information output data area (step Y766). In the case of the present embodiment, two jackpot signals and three jackpot signals are saved as signals corresponding to the state of the special winning opening information and the probability. Each ON / OFF is determined by the special winning opening opening information and the state of the probability.

  Then, a big hit fanfare time (for example, 5000 ms) corresponding to the special winning opening opening information is set (step Y767), and the set big hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y768). Then, the special winning opening illegal winning number area is cleared (step Y770), and the extra-monitoring period flag is saved in the special winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step Y771). Next, 3 is set as the processing number (step Y774) and saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y775). Further, a fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing (step Y776) is performed, and the special figure 1 displaying processing ends.

  On the other hand, in step Y755, if the special map 1 is not a big hit (step Y755; N), that is, if the big hit flag 1 is out-of-position information, it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 1 is a small hit (small hit information). (Step Y777). If the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step Y777; Y), a command is loaded and prepared from the hit symbol command area (step Y783), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y784). Further, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step Y785), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y786), and it is determined whether or not the game is in the normal game state (step Y787).

  If it is not in the normal gaming state (step Y787; N), a signal related to the left-handing instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y788). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to be turned off. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step Y789). As a result, the first game state display unit 56 is turned off, and a display for instructing left-handing is provided.

  On the other hand, if the game is in the normal gaming state (step Y787; Y), a signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y790). Here, it is set so that the firing position designation signal 1 is turned on. Then, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step Y791). As a result, the first game state display unit 56 is turned on, and a display for instructing right-handing is provided.

  Thereafter, the special winning opening illegal winning number area is cleared (step Y793), the special monitoring outside period flag is saved in the special winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step Y794), and the processing shifts to the special figure 1 small hit small fanfare processing. The process (step Y797) is performed, and the process for displaying special figure 1 ends.

  If it is determined in step Y777 that the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step Y777; N), the special figure 1 in the special figure status area is cleared (subtraction of information) (step Y806) and the special figure is changed (step Y806). FIG. 1 A normal process shift setting process 1 is performed (step Y807), and the special figure 1 displaying process ends.

[Special figure 2 display processing]
62 and 63 show the special figure 2 displaying process (step Y141) in the above-described special figure 2 game process. The special figure 2 displaying process is the same as the special figure 1 displaying process described above, except that the special figure 2 is displayed. In the special figure 2 display processing, first, the small hit flag 1 set in the small hit flag 1 area in the big hit flag 2 setting processing in the special figure 2 change start processing is loaded (step Y811), and the small hit flag is set. The two areas are cleared (step Y812).

  Next, the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 area in the big hit flag 2 setting processing in the special figure 2 change start processing is loaded (step Y813), and the big hit flag 2 area is cleared (step Y814). Then, the special map 2 judges whether the big hit is the big hit, that is, whether the loaded big hit flag 2 is the big hit information (step Y815). If the big hit is not the big hit (step Y815; N), the process proceeds to step Y837. In the case of a big hit (step Y815; Y), a test signal relating to the start of the big hit (special figure 2 big hit) of the special figure 2 variable display game (for example, the condition device in-operation signal is turned on, the accessory continuous operation device is operated) The middle signal is turned on and the special symbol 2 hit signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y816).

  Then, a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation release command is prepared (step Y817), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y818). That is, the abnormal change notification is ended with the occurrence of the first special game state. Thereafter, a round number upper limit table is set (step Y819), and a round number upper limit value (10 or 4 in the present embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit information is obtained and saved in the round number upper limit value area. (Step Y820). Further, a round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit information is obtained and saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y821).

  Next, an ornament special figure command corresponding to the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern is loaded from the design command area to prepare (step Y822), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y823). Thereafter, a fanfare command is prepared (step Y824), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y825).

  Next, the special winning opening opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of a big hit in the special figure change display game are saved in the external information output data area (step Y826). In the case of the present embodiment, two jackpot signals and three jackpot signals are saved as signals corresponding to the state of the special winning opening information and the probability. Each ON / OFF is determined by the special winning opening opening information and the state of the probability.

  After that, a big hit fanfare time (for example, 5000 ms) corresponding to the special winning opening opening information is set (step Y827), and the set big hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y828). Then, the special winning opening illegal winning number area is cleared (step Y830), and the illegal out-of-monitoring period flag is saved in the special winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step Y831). Next, 3 is set as the process number (step Y834) and saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y835). Further, a fanfare / interval mid-process transition setting process (step Y836) is performed, and the special figure 2 displaying process ends.

  On the other hand, in step Y815, if the special map 2 is not a big hit (step Y815; N), that is, if the big hit flag 2 is out-of-position information, it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 2 is a small hit (small hit information). (Step Y837). If the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y837; Y), a command is loaded and prepared from the hit symbol command area (step Y843), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y844). Further, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step Y845), effect command setting processing is performed (step Y846), and it is determined whether or not a normal game state is being performed (step Y847).

  If it is not in the normal gaming state (step Y847; N), a signal related to the left-handing instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y848). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to be turned off. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step Y849). As a result, the first game state display unit 56 is turned off, and a display for instructing left-handing is provided.

  On the other hand, when the game is in the normal gaming state (step Y847; Y), a signal relating to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y850). Here, it is set so that the firing position designation signal 1 is turned on. Then, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step Y851). As a result, the first game state display unit 56 is turned on, and a display for instructing right-handing is provided.

  Then, the special winning opening illegal winning number area is cleared (step Y853), the special monitoring outside flag period flag is saved in the special winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step Y854), and the special game 2 small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting is set. The process (step Y857) is performed, and the process for displaying special figure 2 ends.

  If it is determined in step Y837 that the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step Y837; N), the special figure status area is cleared (information subtraction) while the special figure 2 is changing (step Y866). FIG. 2 The normal process shift setting process 1 is performed (step Y867), and the special figure 2 displaying process is terminated.

  That is, based on the fact that the variable display game has the first special result, the game control device 100 generates the first special game state in which the special variable winning device is opened with the activation of the condition device. And a second special game generating means for generating a second special game state for opening the special variable winning device without operating the condition device based on the fact that the variable display game has the second special result. Eggplant

[Fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1]
FIG. 64 illustrates details of the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing (steps Y776 and Y836) in the above-described special figure 1 displaying processing and special figure 2 displaying processing. In the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing, first, a signal relating to the start of the big hit (first special game state) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y871). Here, one big hit signal output at a big hit or a small hit is set to ON. Next, a signal relating to the end of the high probability state and the time saving state (special symbol fluctuation time reduction state) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y872). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is set to OFF, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is set to OFF, the special symbol 1 change time reduction state signal is set to OFF, and the special symbol 2 change time reduction state signal is set to OFF.

  After that, the round number area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special game state is cleared (step Y873), the number with a low probability is saved in the game state display number area (step Y874), and the special figure game mode is executed. The special figure low probability flag is saved in the flag area (step Y875).

  Then, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure restoration transmission command area for saving the command output to the effect control device 300 when the power failure is restored (step Y876). As a result, the high probability state and the time saving state are completed, and the state becomes the normal state and the normal state.

  Next, the big hit information is saved in the special figure status area (step Y878), a signal related to the right-hand instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y880), and the right-hand state is displayed in the gaming state display number 2 area. The number is saved (step Y881).

  Thereafter, the release flag is saved in the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation flag area (step Y882), and the special figure 2 abnormal number area storing the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is cleared (step Y883). Further, the special figure 1 fluctuation count area is cleared to 0 (step Y884), and the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer area is cleared to 0 (step Y885), and the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing ends. That is, with the occurrence of the big hit, all the information related to the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation is cleared.

[Special figure 1 small hit fanfare middle processing shift setting processing]
FIG. 65 shows the special figure 1 small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting processing (step Y797) in the above-described special figure 1 displaying processing. In the special figure 1 small hit fanfare middle processing shift setting processing, first, “7” related to the small hit fanfare middle processing is set as the processing number (step Y891), and the processing number is set in the special figure 1 game processing number area. Save (step Y892).

  Next, the small hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y893). Here, referring to the current game state, if the game state is the specific game state, 1000 ms is set as the small hit fanfare time, and if it is not the specific game state, 4 ms is set as the small hit fanfare time. Then, the signal relating to the start of the small hit is saved in the external information output data area (step Y894). Here, one big hit signal output at a big hit or a small hit is set to ON. Further, a signal relating to the start of the special figure 1 small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y895). Here, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is set to ON.

  After that, the small hit information is saved in the special figure status information (step Y896), the small hit display pointer is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y897), and the special figure 1 small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting processing ends. I do.

[Special figure 2 Small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting processing]
FIG. 66 shows the special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting processing (step Y857) in the above-described special figure 2 displaying processing. In the special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting processing, first, “7” related to the small hit fanfare middle processing is set as the processing number (step Y901), and the processing number is set in the special figure 2 game processing number area. Save (step Y902).

  Next, the small hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y903). Here, referring to the current game state, if the game state is the specific game state, 1000 ms is set as the small hit fanfare time, and if it is not the specific game state, 4 ms is set as the small hit fanfare time. Then, the signal relating to the start of the small hit is saved in the external information output data area (step Y904). Here, one big hit signal output at a big hit or a small hit is set to ON. Further, a signal relating to the start of the special figure 2 small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y905). Here, the special symbol 2 small hit signal is set to ON.

  Thereafter, the small hit information is saved in the special figure status information (step Y906), the small hit display pointer is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y907), and the special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting processing ends. I do.

[Fanfare / interval processing]
FIG. 67 shows the fanfare / interval processing (steps Y111 and Y142) in the above-described special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing. In this fanfare / interval processing, first, the number of rounds in the special game state is updated by +1 (step Y951), round winning opening information and a round command corresponding to the number of rounds are prepared (step Y952), and a rendering command setting processing is performed. Is performed (step Y953).

  Next, the jackpot processing control pointer initial value corresponding to the special winning opening information and the number of rounds is set (step Y954), and the pointer initial value is saved in the jackpot processing control pointer area (step Y955). Then, the special winning opening opening information and the special winning opening time corresponding to the number of rounds are set (step Y956), and 4 is set as the processing number (step Y957). The opening time set here is, for example, 29000 ms.

  Next, it is determined whether or not it is a special figure 1 jackpot (step Y958). If it is a special figure 1 jackpot (step Y958; Y), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y959). ), The special winning opening time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y960). On the other hand, if it is not the big hit of the special figure 1 (step Y958; N), the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y961), and the special winning opening opening time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area. (Step Y962).

  Then, a signal relating to the opening start of the special winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y963). Here, the special electric accessory in-operation signal is set to ON. Next, in order to open the opening / closing door 38c of the special variable winning device 38, the special winning opening ON data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y964), and the number of winnings to the special winning opening is counted. The mouth count is cleared (step Y965), and the processing during the fanfare / interval ends.

(Processing while opening the big winning opening)
FIG. 68 shows the special winning opening process (steps Y112 and Y143) in the special figure 1 game processing and the special figure 2 game processing described above. In this special winning opening processing, first, it is determined whether the current round is the last round by comparing the current round number in the special game state being executed with the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit area. (Step Y1005). If it is not the last round (step Y1005; N), an interval command relating to the interval between rounds is prepared (step Y1006), and effect command setting processing (step Y1008) is performed. In the case of the last round (step Y1005; Y), an ending command relating to display control of the ending display screen at the end of the special game state is prepared (step Y1007), and an effect command setting process (step Y1008). I do.

  Next, the remaining ball processing time corresponding to the special winning opening opening information is set (step Y1009), and 5 relating to the special winning port remaining ball processing is set as the processing number (step Y1010). The remaining sphere processing time is set to 600 ms, 800 ms or 1400 ms. Then, it is determined whether it is the big hit of Toku-zu 1 (step Y1011).

  In the case of the special figure 1 jackpot (step Y1011; Y), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1012), and the remaining ball processing time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y1012). Step Y1013). On the other hand, when the special figure 1 is not a big hit (step Y1011; N), the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1014), and the remaining ball processing time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area. (Step Y1015). Thereafter, the OFF data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1016), and the processing during opening of the special winning opening is ended.

(Grand prize mouth remaining ball processing)
FIG. 69 shows the special winning port remaining ball processing (steps Y113 and Y144) in the special figure 1 game processing and the special figure 2 game processing described above. In the special winning opening remaining ball processing, first, the current round number in the special game state being executed is compared with the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit area to determine whether the current round is the last round. (Step Y1041).

  If the current round in the special game state is not the final round (step Y1041; N), a signal regarding the end of opening of the special winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1042). Here, the special electric accessory in-operation signal is set to OFF. Next, an interval time corresponding to the special winning opening information and the number of rounds this time is set (step Y1043), and 3 related to the fanfare / interval processing is set as the processing number (step Y1044).

  The interval period between rounds is a period from the end of the round when the remaining ball processing time elapses and further until the interval time elapses after the remaining ball processing time elapses. For example, in the case of the special figure 1 large winning opening opening / closing pattern 1, since the remaining ball processing time of 1400 ms and the interval time of 600 ms are set, the interval period is 2000 ms, and in this interval period, the interval effect is displayed on the display device 41 or the like. Be executed.

  On the other hand, if the current round in the special game state is the last round (step Y1041; Y), a jackpot end process shift setting process is performed (step Y1045), and an ending time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y1045). Y1046), 6 relating to the special figure 1 big hit end processing or the special figure 2 big hit end processing is set as the processing number (step Y1047).

  Then, it is determined whether or not it is the big hit of Toku-zu 1 (step Y1048). If it is a special figure 1 jackpot (step Y1048; Y), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1049), and the set time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y1048). Y1050), the special winning port remaining ball processing ends. On the other hand, if it is not the big hit of the special figure 1 (step Y1048; N), the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1051), and the set time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1051). Step Y1052), the special winning port remaining sphere process ends.

  The ending period from the end of the last round to the end of the special game state is a period from the end of the last round, when the remaining ball processing time elapses, and further, after the remaining ball processing time elapses, until the ending time elapses. For example, in the case of the special figure 1 large winning opening opening / closing pattern 1, the remaining ball processing time of 1400 ms and the ending time of 9600 ms are set, so that the ending period is 11000 ms, and the ending effect is performed on the display device 41 or the like during this ending period. Be executed.

[Big hit end process shift setting process]
FIG. 70 shows the jackpot end process shift setting process (step Y1045) in the above-mentioned winning winning port remaining ball process. In the jackpot end processing shift setting processing, first, a signal relating to the end of opening of the special winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1071). Here, the special electric accessory in-operation signal is set to OFF.

  Next, the information of the special winning opening count number area storing the number of winnings to the special winning opening is cleared (step Y1072), and the information of the round number area storing the number of rounds in the special game state is cleared (step Y1073). ), The information of the round number upper limit area for storing the upper limit value of the number of rounds in the special game state is cleared (step Y1074).

  Then, the information in the round number upper limit information area for storing the flag for determining the upper limit value of the number of rounds is cleared (step Y1075), and the flag for the special winning opening information area for storing the opening information for the special winning opening is stored. The information is cleared (step Y1076), the information in the large hit control pointer area for setting the opening / closing mode of the special winning opening is cleared (step Y1077), and the big hit end processing shift setting processing ends.

[Special figure 1 big hit end processing]
FIG. 71 shows the special figure 1 big hit end processing (step Y114) in the above-described special figure 1 game processing. In the special figure 1 big hit end processing, first, “0” is set as the processing number related to the special figure 1 ordinary processing (step Y1101), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1102).

  Next, a signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1103). Here, one big hit signal and three big hit signals are set to OFF. Then, a signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1104). Here, the condition device operating signal, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, the special symbol 1 hit signal and the special symbol 2 hit signal are set to OFF.

  Next, the number for turning off the light is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1105), the flag during the illegal monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step Y1106), and the special figure status area is cleared (step Y1106). Y1108). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status 0 indicating that neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is executed. Then, the special figure 2 game wait time value (8 ms in this case) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1109).

  By performing the special figure 1 big hit end processing, the special figure change display game can be started for both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, but in the timer interrupt processing, the special figure 2 game is executed after the special figure 1 game processing. In order to perform the process, the special figure 2 game display processing is started by the timer interrupt that has performed the special figure 1 big hit end processing, and the special figure 2 variable display game is started more than the special figure 1 variable display game. Will be able to start earlier. Therefore, in step Y1109, the special figure 2 game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area so that the start processing for the special figure 2 variable display game is delayed until the next timer interrupt processing. The variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are processed by the same timer interrupt. That is, after the game control device 100 finishes the special game state, the second variable display game execution control unit executes the second variable display game execution control unit until the first variable display game execution control unit can execute the process related to the start of the first variable display game. A game processing standby means for preventing the processing related to the start of the two-variation display game from being made executable.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special result is a probable big hit (step Y1110). If the special result is a probable big hit (step Y1110; Y), a process of setting a high probability state is performed. In this process, first, a signal relating to the start of the high probability state and the time reduction state (the special symbol fluctuation time reduction state) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1111). Here, two big hit signals are set to ON. Note that the big hit 2 signal is also ON during the special game state, and this is continued. Next, signals relating to the start of the high probability state and the time saving state are saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1112). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, the special symbol 1 change time reduction state signal, and the special symbol 2 change time reduction state signal are set to ON.

  Next, the number with high probability and working hours is saved in the gaming state display number area (step Y1114), and the special figure high probability and support flag are saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1116). Further, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y1117), and the signal related to the right-handing instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1126). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to ON. Then, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step Y1127), and the initial value (here, the number of times of support for managing the number of executions of the special figure change display game for setting the ordinary power support) is set. (The value corresponding to 100 times) is saved (step Y1128), and the special figure 1 big hit end processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is not a probability variable jackpot (step Y1110; N), a process of setting a low probability state is performed. In this process, first, signals relating to the start of the low probability state and the time reduction state are saved in the external information output data area (step Y1119). Here, two big hit signals are set to ON. Note that the big hit 2 signal is also ON during the special game state, and this is continued. Next, a signal relating to the start of the low probability state and the time saving state is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1120). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal and the special symbol 2 high probability state signal are set to OFF, and the special symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal and the special symbol 2 fluctuation time reduction state signal are set to ON.

  Next, a low probability, time saving number is saved in the game state display number area (step Y1122), and a special figure low probability, support flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1124). Further, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure restoration transmission command area (step Y1125), and the signal related to the right-hand instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1126). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to ON. Then, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step Y1127), and the initial value (here, the number of times of support for managing the number of executions of the special figure change display game for setting the ordinary power support) is set. (The value corresponding to 100 times) is saved (step Y1128), and the special figure 1 big hit end processing ends.

[Special figure 2 big hit end processing]
FIG. 72 shows the special figure 2 big hit end processing (step Y145) in the above-described special figure 2 game processing. The special figure 2 big hit end processing is the same processing except that the step Y1109 in the above special figure 1 big hit processing is not performed. First, “0” is set as a process number related to the special figure 2 ordinary processing (step Y1131), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1132).

  Next, a signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1133). Here, one big hit signal and three big hit signals are set to OFF. Then, the signal relating to the end of the big hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1134). Here, the condition device operating signal, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, the special symbol 1 hit signal and the special symbol 2 hit signal are set to OFF.

  Next, the number for turning off the light is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1135), the flag during the illegal monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step Y1136), and the special figure status area is cleared (step Y1136). Y1138). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status 0 indicating that neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is executed.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special result is a probable big hit (step Y1110). If the special result is a probable big hit (step Y1139; Y), a process of setting a high probability state is performed. In this process, first, a signal relating to the start of the high probability state and the time saving state (specified symbol fluctuation time reduction state) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1140). Here, two big hit signals are set to ON. Note that the big hit 2 signal is also ON during the special game state, and this is continued. Next, a signal relating to the start of the high probability state and the time reduction state is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1141). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, the special symbol 1 change time reduction state signal, and the special symbol 2 change time reduction state signal are set to ON.

  Next, the number with the high probability and the time reduction is saved in the game state display number area (step Y1143), and the special figure high probability and support flag are saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1145). Further, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the power failure restoration transmission command area (step Y1146), and the signal related to the right-handing instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1155). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to ON. Then, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step Y1156), and the initial value (here, the number of times of support for managing the number of executions of the special figure variable display game for setting the ordinary power support) is set. (Value corresponding to 100 times) is saved (step Y1157), and the special figure 2 big hit end processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is not a probability variation big hit (step Y1139; N), a process of setting a low probability state is performed. In this process, first, signals relating to the start of the low probability state and the time reduction state are saved in the external information output data area (step Y1148). Here, two big hit signals are set to ON. Note that the big hit 2 signal is also ON during the special game state, and this is continued. Next, a signal related to the start of the low probability state and the time saving state is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1149). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal and the special symbol 2 high probability state signal are set to OFF, and the special symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal and the special symbol 2 fluctuation time reduction state signal are set to ON.

  Next, a low probability, time saving number is saved in the game state display number area (step Y1151), and a special figure low probability, support flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1153). Further, a probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power transmission restoration transmission command area (step Y1154), and a signal related to the right-hand instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1155). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to ON. Then, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step Y1156), and the initial value (here, the number of times of support for managing the number of executions of the special figure variable display game for setting the ordinary power support) is set. (Value corresponding to 100 times) is saved (step Y1157), and the special figure 2 big hit end processing ends.

  By the special figure 1 big hit processing and the special figure 2 big hit processing, after the special game state based on the probable variable big hit is completed, the high probability state and the first specific game state with ordinary power support are set. Further, after the end of the special gaming state based on the normal big hit, the second specific gaming state with the low probability state and the ordinary power support is set. That is, after the special game state ends, the game control device 100 can set the probability that the result of the game will be the first special result among the special results to the high probability state higher than the low probability state. Make the means. Further, the game control device 100 constitutes a specific game state generating means capable of generating a specific game state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state after the end of the special game state.

[Treatment during small hit fanfare]
Next, details of the small hit fanfare middle processing (steps Y115 and Y146) in the above-described special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 73, in the small hit fanfare middle processing, first, a small hit opening command is prepared (step Y1201), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y1202). Next, a signal relating to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1203). Here, the special electric accessory in-operation signal is set to ON. Then, the special winning opening ON data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1204), and the special winning opening count number area for counting the number of winnings to the special winning opening is cleared (step Y1205).

  Thereafter, 8 for the small hitting process is set as the process number (step Y1206), and it is determined whether the small hitting type is small hit 1 (step Y1207). If the small hit type is small hit 1 (step Y1207; Y), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1208), and the small hit opening time 1 (48 ms in this case) is set as the special figure 1 The game is saved in the game processing timer area (step Y1209), and the processing during the small hit fanfare ends.

  If the small hit type is not small hit 1 (step Y1207; N), the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1210), and the release time corresponding to the small hit type is set to the special figure 2 game. The processing is saved in the processing timer area (step Y1211), and the processing during the small hit fanfare ends. The opening time corresponding to the type of small hit is set to 1000 ms for small hit 2, 1200 ms for small hit 3, and 1600 ms for small hit 4.

[Small hit processing]
FIG. 74 shows the small hitting medium processing (steps Y116 and Y147) in the above-described special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing. In the small hit processing, first, a small hit end screen command is prepared (step Y1241), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y1242). Next, the OFF data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1243), and 9 relating to the small hit remaining ball processing is set as the processing number (step Y1244).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the small hit type is small hit 1 (step Y1245). If the small hit type is small hit 1 (step Y1245; Y), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1246), and the small hit remaining ball processing time 1 (here, 600 ms) is specified. The game is saved in the game processing timer area in FIG. 1 (step Y1209), and the small hit processing ends.

  If the small hit type is not 1 (step Y1245; N), the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1248), and the small hit remaining ball processing time corresponding to the small hit type is set. The game is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1249), and the small hit processing ends. The small hit remaining ball processing time corresponding to the small hit type is set to 600 ms in the case of the small hit 2 and 800 ms in the case of the small hit 3 or 4.

[Small hit ball processing]
FIG. 75 shows the small hit remaining ball processing (steps Y117 and Y148) in the special figure 1 game processing and the special figure 2 game processing described above. In this small hit remaining ball processing, first, it is determined whether or not it is the small hit of Tokuzu 1 (step Y1271). In the case of the special figure 1 small hit (step Y1271; Y), the processing number is set to 10 relating to the special figure 1 small hit end processing (step Y1272), and the processing number is set in the special figure 1 game processing number area. Save (step Y1273). Next, the small hit ending time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y1274), and the flow shifts to step Y1278.

  If the special hit is not the small hit of the special figure 1 (step Y1271; N), 10 relating to the special figure 2 small hit processing is set as the processing number (step Y1275), and the processing number is set in the special figure 2 game processing number area. Save (step Y1276). Next, the small hit ending time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1277), and the flow shifts to step Y1278.

  Regardless of the special hits in the special maps 1 and 2, the setting of the small hit ending time (steps Y1274, Y1277) refers to the current game state, and if the specific game state is set, the small hit ending. The time is set to 1200 ms or 1400 ms, and if it is not the specific game state, the small hit ending time is set to 100 ms. As a result, the length of the ending period including the remaining ball processing time and the ending time is 2000 ms when the player is in the specific game state, and is 700 ms or 900 ms when the player is not in the specific game state.

  Then, a signal relating to the end of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1278). Here, the special electric accessory in-operation signal is set to OFF. Further, the large winning opening count number area is cleared (step Y1279), and the small hit remaining ball processing ends.

[Special figure 1 small hit end processing]
FIG. 76 shows the special figure 1 small hit end processing (step Y118) in the above-described special figure 1 game processing. In the special figure 1 small hit ending processing, first, 0 which is related to the special figure 1 usual processing is set as the processing number (step Y1301), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1302).

  Next, a signal relating to the end of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1303). Here, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is set to OFF. Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1304), the number of lights off is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1305), and the special figure status area is cleared (step Y1306). ). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status becomes 0 indicating that neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is executed.

  Next, it is determined whether the game is in the normal game state (step Y1307). If the game is not in the normal game state (step Y1307; N), the process proceeds to step Y1310. If the player is in the normal gaming state (step Y1307; Y), a signal relating to the left-handing instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1308). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step Y1309), and it is determined whether the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted (step Y1310).

  If the special figure 2 variable display game is not interrupted (step Y1310; N), the special figure 2 game interruption flag area is cleared (step Y1313), and the special figure 2 game processing timer area 8 ms is set as the special figure 2 game wait time value. (Here, 2) is saved (step Y1314), and the special figure 1 small hit end processing ends. If the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted (step Y1310; Y), a decoration special figure 2 restart command is prepared (step Y1311), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y1312). Thereafter, the special figure 2 game interruption flag area is cleared (step Y1313), and a value corresponding to the special figure 2 game processing timer area 8ms is saved as the special figure 2 game wait time value (step Y1314). The small hit end processing ends.

  As a result, the suspended special figure 2 variable display game is resumed with the end of the special game state based on the small hit in the special figure 1 variable display game. By saving a value corresponding to the special figure 2 game processing timer area 8 ms as the special figure 2 game wait time value, the start processing for the special figure 2 variable display game is delayed until the next timer interrupt processing, The variable display game in FIG. 1 and the special figure 2 variable display game are processed by the same timer interrupt.

[Special figure 2 small hit end processing]
FIG. 77 shows the special figure 2 small hit end processing (step Y149) in the above-described special figure 2 game processing. In the special figure 2 small hit ending processing, first, 0 which is related to the special figure 2 usual processing is set as the processing number (step Y1331), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1332).

  Next, a signal relating to the end of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1333). Here, the special symbol 2 small hit signal is set to OFF. Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1334), the number of lights off is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1335), and the special figure status area is cleared (step Y1335). Y1336). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status becomes 0 indicating that neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is executed.

  Next, it is determined whether the game is in the normal game state (step Y1337). If the game is not in the normal game state (step Y1337; N), the process proceeds to step Y1340. If the player is in the normal gaming state (step Y1337; Y), a signal relating to the left-handing instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1338). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step Y1339), and it is determined whether the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted (step Y1340).

  If the special figure 1 variable display game is not interrupted (step Y1340; N), the special figure 1 game interruption flag area is cleared (step Y1343), and the special figure 2 small hit end processing ends. If the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted (step Y1340; Y), a decoration special figure 1 resuming command is prepared (step Y1341), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y1342). After that, the special figure 1 game interruption flag area is cleared (step Y1343), and the special figure 2 small hit end processing ends. As a result, the suspended special figure 2 variable display game is resumed with the end of the special game state based on the small hit in the special figure 1 variable display game.

  That is, the game control device 100 is controlled by one of the first variable display game execution control means (game control device 100) and the second variable display game execution control means (game control device 100). When the execution control of the variable display game is performed, and the other variable display game whose execution control is performed by the other variable display game execution control unit has a special result, the one variable display game is executed. A resumption control means capable of executing resumption control for resuming one of the fluctuating display games which has been interrupted after the special game state based on the other fluctuating display game is terminated.

  Next, control in the effect control device 300 will be described. The main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 performs a main process shown in FIG. 78 and a timer interrupt process (not shown).

[Main processing]
As shown in FIG. 78, in the main process, first, the process at the time of starting the program is performed. In the process at the start of the program, first, the interrupt is prohibited (step C1), and the CPU is initialized (step C2). Next, the VDP 312 is initialized (step C3), and interruption is permitted (step C4). Next, generation of display data is permitted (step C5), a random number seed is set (step C6), and an initial value at power-on is saved in an area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, the power failure occurrence detected flag and the like are cleared.

  After performing the processing at the start of the program in steps C1 to C7, a loop process is performed as a main loop process. In this loop processing, first, a WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, an effect button input process (step C9) for creating input information from an input signal (rising edge) based on an operation of the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is performed. The input from the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is read in a timer interrupt process. In the effect button input process, when there is an input from the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29, a process of changing the effect content is performed.

  Then, a hall / player setting mode process for setting a changeable range of the brightness and volume of the LED and the liquid crystal and the like and accepting an operation by the player to change the brightness and volume of the LED and the liquid crystal is performed (step C10). Next, a random number updating process (step C11) for updating random numbers for determining details of the variation mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is performed.

  Next, a reception command check process (step C12) for analyzing and responding to a command from the game control device 100, and effect display editing process (step C13) for editing settings and drawing commands for controlling the progress of the effect. ) To set the preparation end of the drawing command (step C14). In these processes, various data are updated in accordance with the contents to be drawn, and the processing is finally performed until the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. If the drawing data of the screen to be drawn within 1/30 second (about 33.3 ms) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

  Then, it is determined whether or not it is the frame switching timing (step C15). In the present embodiment, in order to create a system cycle (1/30 second for one frame), it is determined that it is the frame switching timing when the V blank interrupt (1/60 second) is input twice. Note that the frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate. For example, the image update (frame switching) may be performed in 1/60 second, or the image updating (frame switching) may be performed later than 1/60 second. Switching). If it is determined in step C15 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C15; N), the process of step C15 is repeated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step C15 that the current time is the frame switching timing (step C15; Y), an instruction to draw a screen is issued (step C16).

  Thereafter, a sound control process (step C17) for controlling the output of the sound from the speakers (the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b), and a decoration control process (step C17) for controlling the LEDs of the board decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18, and the like. C18), a movable body control process for controlling the motor and the solenoid of the board effect device 44 (step C19), a board effect setting process for controlling the effect (step C20), and a process of clearing the WDT (step C8) Return to).

[Receive command check processing]
FIG. 79 shows the received command check processing in the main processing described above. In this reception command check processing, first, the value of a command reception counter that counts the number of commands received during one frame (1/30 second) is loaded as the number of command receptions (step C201), and the command reception is performed. It is determined whether the number is not 0 (step C202). If it is determined that the number of received commands is 0 (step C202; N), the received command check processing ends. When it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (Step C202; Y), the content of the command reception counter area is subtracted by the number of received commands (Step C203).

  Next, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (step C204), the command read index is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step C205), and whether or not copying of the commands for the number of received commands is completed. Is determined (step C206). As described above, in the present embodiment, the command is not directly analyzed in the reception command buffer, but the contents of the reception command buffer are copied to the command area (the RAM area for analysis), and the command is analyzed in the command area. It is configured as follows. Thus, in preparation for a case where a command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during the analysis of the command, the command (data) can be moved to make a space. In addition, the analysis of the command can be collectively performed for each round of the main processing.

  If it is determined in step C206 that command copying for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C206; N), the process returns to step C204. If it is determined that copying of the commands for the number of received commands has been completed (step C206; Y), the contents of the command area are loaded (step C207), and the received command is analyzed (step C208).

  Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands has been completed (step C210). When it is determined that the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C210; N), the process returns to step C207. When it is determined that the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands has been completed (step C210; Y), the received command check processing ends. As described above, in the received command check processing, commands received during one frame (1/30 second) are analyzed collectively. In this embodiment, the configuration is such that up to 32 commands can be stored.

[Receive command analysis processing]
FIG. 80 shows a received command analysis process in the above-described received command check process. In the received command analysis processing, first, the command upper byte is separated as MODE and the lower byte is separated as ACT (ACTION) (step C231), and it is determined whether MODE and ACT are within the normal range (step C232, step C233). ). When it is determined that MODE and ACT are within the normal range (step C232; Y, step C233; Y), it is determined whether ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C234).

  If it is determined in step C232 and step C233 that MODE or ACT is not in the normal range (step C232; N, step C233; N), or if it is determined in step C234 that ACT for MODE is not a correct combination (step C234). In C234; N), the received command analysis processing ends.

  If it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C234; Y), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235). The fluctuation command is a command for instructing a fluctuation pattern of a special figure. If the MODE is determined to be within the range of the variable command (step C235; Y), the variable command processing (step C236) is performed, and the received command analysis processing ends.

  When it is determined in step C235 that MODE is not in the range of the variable command (step C235; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of the big hit command (step C237). The jackpot-related command is a command for instructing an operation relating to a medium-size hit effect (displaying a fanfare screen, a round screen, and the like) and a command for instructing an operation relating to a medium-size hit effect (displaying a fanfare screen, an end screen, and the like). If it is determined that MODE is within the range of the big hit command (step C237; Y), the big hit command processing (step C238) is performed, and the received command analysis processing ends.

  If it is determined in step C237 that MODE is not within the range of the jackpot-related command (step C237; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the symbol-related command (step C239). The symbol-related command is a command for instructing information on the symbol of the special figure (for example, what the stop symbol of the special figure is). Then, when it is determined that MODE is within the range of the symbol command (step C239; Y), the symbol command processing (step C240) is performed, and the received command analysis processing ends.

  If it is determined in step C239 that MODE is not in the range of the symbol-type command (step C239; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of single-shot commands such as the number-of-suspended-number command and the error command. (Step C241). The one-shot command is a command that is established independently, unlike commands that make sense in combination such as symbol commands and variable commands. The single command includes a customer waiting demo command, a hold number command, a symbol stop command, a probability information command, an error / illegal command, a model designation command, and the like. If it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the single command (step C241; Y), the single command processing (step C242) is performed, and the received command analysis processing ends.

  If it is determined in step C241 that MODE is not within the range of the single-shot command (step C241; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the look-ahead design-related command (step C243). If the MODE is determined to be within the range of the pre-reading symbol-related command (step C243; Y), the pre-reading symbol-related command processing (step C244) is performed, and the received command analyzing process ends.

  If it is determined in step C243 that MODE is not in the range of the prefetching pattern command (step C243; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of the prefetch variable command (step C245). If it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the prefetch variable command (step C245; Y), the prefetch variable command processing (step C246) is performed, and the received command analysis processing ends. If it is determined in step C245 that MODE is not within the range of the prefetch variable command (step C245; N), the received command analysis processing ends.

  Note that the prefetch variation command and the prefetch symbol command are commands including information necessary for executing the prefetch effect. A look-ahead effect (also referred to as a look-ahead notice or a look-ahead notice effect) is whether or not a big hit occurs when a special-figure variation display game corresponding to a start-up memory (hold) in which the special-figure variation display game is not executed is subsequently executed In order to notify the player in advance (or what kind of fluctuation pattern) with a predetermined degree of reliability to the player, the display of the decoration special figure start display or the like displayed on the display device 41 is performed in a mode different from the normal mode. For example, an effect display is performed. The pre-reading commands (the pre-reading fluctuation command and the pre-reading symbol command) are commands for informing in advance of a fluctuation pattern and a stop symbol corresponding to the starting memory to be subjected to the pre-reading effect. It is transmitted to effect control device 300. It should be noted that ordinary variable commands and symbol commands that are not pre-read are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of variable display.

[Variable command processing]
FIG. 81 shows the variable command processing (step C236) in the received command analysis processing described above. In this variable command processing, first, it is determined whether the special figure type is undetermined (step C361). The special figure type is information indicating whether the type of the special figure is the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, and is information set in step C251 of the above-mentioned symbol command processing.

  If the special figure type is undetermined (step C361; Y), the variable command processing ends. If the special figure type is not undecided (step C361; N), that is, if the special figure type is set, the combination of the variable command and the symbol command is checked (step C362), and the variable command and the symbol type are checked. It is determined whether there is any mismatch (step C363).

  When the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent (step C363; Y), the variation command processing ends. When the variation command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (step C363; N), the variation pattern type is determined from the variation command (step C364). The symbol type means a symbol category, and the symbol type includes, for example, a missing symbol, a 10R big hit symbol, a 4R big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, and the like. The case where the fluctuation command and the symbol type are inconsistent means that when a variation command (variation pattern command) is received but a symbol command of a 10R jackpot symbol is received, the effect is performed. It means that it is a contradictory combination (combination of the fluctuation command and the symbol type).

  In the process of determining the variation pattern type from the variation command (step C364), the variation pattern type that is a rough classification of the variation display effect of the special figure is determined according to the received command. Then, a fluctuation effect setting process for setting information for performing an effect according to the fluctuation command is performed (step C365).

  Next, the special figure fluctuation is set as the P machine state (pachinko machine state) (step C366). Here, the special figure is changing means that the special figure is changing (during a customer waiting demonstration, a big hit, a fanfare, or the like). Further, if the number of prefetching effects (the number of prefetching executions) is not zero, the number of prefetching effects is updated by -1 (a process of reducing the number of prefetching effects by 1) (step C367), and the variable command processing ends.

(Variable effect setting processing)
FIG. 82 shows the fluctuation effect setting processing (step C365) in the above-described fluctuation command processing. In the fluctuation effect setting process, first, it is determined whether the fluctuation pattern type is the fluctuation without reach (step C381). If the variation pattern type is the variation without reach (step C381; Y), the first-half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, the special figure type, and the effect mode at that time is set (step C382). The effect mode corresponds to a game mode managed by the effect control device 300, and naturally differs depending on the model. Here, the effect mode includes a normal mode, a probability change mode, and the like. Further, in each mode, there are provided a plurality of modes in which the distribution ratio of the notice effect and the effect mode of the decorative special figure variable display game on the display device 41 are different.

  Next, with reference to the first-half notice distribution group address table, the address of the first-half notice distribution group table corresponding to MODE and the number of reservations of the special figure type is acquired (step C383). Thus, in the case of a change without reach, it is possible to change the lottery content of the notice effect (appearance rate of each notice effect mode) appearing during each change according to the number of reservations. Thereafter, a lottery of a notice appearing during the first half change is performed using the first-half notice distribution group table (step C386).

  On the other hand, when the variation pattern type is not the variation without reach (step C381; N), the first-half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, the special figure type, the effect mode, and the symbol type is set (step C384). Then, referring to the first-half notice distribution group address table, the first-half notice distribution group table address corresponding to the MODE and the variation pattern type is obtained (step C385), and the first-half notice distribution group table is used to change the first-half notice distribution group table. Is performed (step C386).

  Next, a preliminary announcement effect of the second half change is drawn by lottery. Note that the latter half of the special figure change display game is a so-called reach action (for example, a change display in a special result mode (a special symbol combination) in which a display area excluding a specific area among a plurality of columns of the special figure has a big hit). Is stopped and the variable display is performed only in the specific area). On the other hand, the first half change of the special figure change display game is a change display before the start of the reach action.

  First, a second-half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, special figure type, effect mode, and symbol type is set (step C387). The second-half notice distribution group address table is a table for selecting an address of the second-half notice distribution group table. Then, the address of the second-half notice distribution group table corresponding to ACT is acquired with reference to the second-half notice distribution group address table (step C388). The lottery of the appearing notice is performed (step C389).

  Thereafter, the contents of the variable effect corresponding to MODE and ACT are determined (step C390), and the contents of the effect corresponding to the preliminary lottery result are determined (step C391). As a result, an effect and a notice such as a fluctuating time and main reach content of the decorative special figure fluctuating display game are determined. Further, a stop symbol setting process for determining a stop symbol with reference to the determined change pattern (such as reach effect) of the special figure change display game, the content of the notice, and the game state is performed (step C392).

  Next, the display setting of the variable effect is performed (step C393), and the display setting of the notice effect is performed (step C394). Through these processes, it is possible to execute an effect or a notice in the decorative special figure variation display game set as described above. Thereafter, the display setting of the hold reduction corresponding to the special figure type is performed (step C395). In this process, a setting is made to decrease the decoration start memory display corresponding to the decrease in the start memory corresponding to the start of the special figure change display game.

  Then, a sound number, which is a BGM number, and a decoration number, which is a number indicating the type of effect by a decoration lamp or the like, are set (step C396), and a decoration special figure variation (variation display of identification information) corresponding to the special figure type is set. Display setting is performed (step C397). Further, in order to set a variation display of the fourth symbol for displaying the decoration special figure variation display game separately from the variation display of the identification information, the display setting of the fourth symbol variation corresponding to the special figure type is performed (step C398). Then, the variable effect setting process ends.

[Single command processing]
FIG. 83 shows one-shot command processing in the above-described received command analysis processing. In this one-shot command processing, first, it is determined whether MODE corresponds to a model designation command including information on a model set in the game control device 100 (step C261). If it is determined that the MODE corresponds to the model designation command (step C261; Y), a model setting process for rewriting the internal information to the model information corresponding to the command is performed (step C262), and the single command processing is performed. To end.

  If it is determined in step C261 that MODE does not correspond to the model designation command (step C261; N), it is determined whether MODE corresponds to the RAM initialization command indicating that the RAM 111C has been initialized. A determination is made (step C263). When it is determined that the MODE corresponds to the RAM initialization command (step C263; Y), the RAM initialization processing is performed (step C264), and the single command processing ends. In the RAM initialization processing (step C264), an area requiring initialization is initialized, and RAM initialization screen information is set. Further, RAM initialization scenario data is set to perform an effect when the RAM initialization is performed.

  If it is determined in step C263 that MODE does not correspond to the RAM initialization command (step C263; N), MODE returns to a power failure recovery command indicating that the RAM 111C has been restored from a power failure without initialization. It is determined whether it is a corresponding one (step C265). When it is determined that the MODE corresponds to the power failure restoration command (step C265; Y), the power failure restoration processing is performed (step C266), and the single-shot command processing is terminated. In the power outage restoration process (step C266), an area requiring initialization is initialized, and restoration screen information for displaying a power outage restoration screen is set. Furthermore, in order to perform an effect at the time of restoration from power failure, scenario data for power failure restoration is set.

  When it is determined in step C265 that MODE does not correspond to the power failure restoration command (step C265; N), it is determined whether MODE corresponds to the customer waiting demonstration command indicating the start of the customer waiting demonstration. (Step C267). If it is determined that the MODE corresponds to the customer waiting demonstration command (step C267; Y), the customer waiting demonstration processing is performed (step C268), and the single command processing ends. In the customer waiting demonstration process (step C268), the P machine (pachinko machine) state is set to the customer waiting demonstration, and customer waiting scenario data is set to perform a customer waiting effect.

  If it is determined in step C267 that MODE does not correspond to the customer waiting demonstration command (step C267; N), it is determined whether MODE is on hold in special figure 1 (step C269). If the MODE is the special figure 1 hold (step C269; Y), the special figure 1 hold information setting processing for displaying the decoration start storage display corresponding to the generated hold on the display device 41 is performed. (Step C270), the one-shot command processing ends. If it is determined in step C269 that the MODE does not correspond to the suspension of the special figure 1 (step C269; N), it is determined whether the MODE is the suspension of the special figure 2 (step C271). If the MODE is a special figure 2 hold (step C271; Y), the special figure 2 hold information setting processing for performing processing corresponding to the generated hold is performed (step C272), and the single command processing ends. I do. That is, the effect control device 300 constitutes a start storage display means for displaying a start storage information display for displaying information relating to the start storage by a start storage display (decorative start storage display) corresponding to each start memory.

  If the MODE is not the special figure 2 reservation at step C271 (step C271; N), it is determined whether the MODE is probability information (step C273). If MODE is probability information (step C273; Y), probability information setting processing for setting the current probability state is performed (step C274), and the single-shot command processing ends.

  If MODE is not probability information in step C273 (step C273; N), it is determined whether MODE is error / invalid (step C275). If the MODE is error / invalid (step C275; Y), an error / invalidity setting process for performing a corresponding process such as error notification is performed (step C276), and the single command processing is terminated. In the error / unauthorized setting process (step C276), a notification process when a command related to an error or an invalidity is received, a warning display process when a right-handed instruction notification command or a left-handed instruction notification command is received, and the like are performed. .

  If the MODE is not error / incorrect in Step C275 (Step C275; N), it is determined whether the MODE is effect mode switching (Step C277). If MODE is effect mode switching (step C277; Y), effect mode switching processing for switching the effect mode is performed (step C278), and the single command processing is terminated.

  If MODE is not the effect mode switching in step C277 (step C277; N), it is determined whether MODE is a symbol stop (step C279). If MODE is not a symbol stop (step C279; N), the one-shot command processing ends. If MODE is a symbol stop (step C279; Y), it is determined whether the command is a normal command (step C280). In determining whether the command is a normal command, for example, it is determined whether the target of the decorative special figure stop command is a special figure that is currently changing.

  If the command is not a normal command (step C280; N), the single command processing ends. If the command is a normal command (step C280; Y), the corresponding special figure is set to stop (step C281). If all the symbols are stopped, the game state flag is set to the normal state (step C282). Then, the one-shot system command processing ends. Thereby, the fluctuation display of the corresponding decorative special figure fluctuation display game is stopped. The game state flag is a flag indicating a current game state, and includes flags indicating states such as a changing state, a big hit, a small hit and the like in addition to a normal state, and an appropriate flag is set according to a situation.

[Big hit command processing]
FIG. 84 shows the big hit command processing (step C238) in the received command analysis processing described above. In this big hit command processing, first, it is determined whether MODE is a fanfare (step C401). That is, it is determined whether the received command is a fanfare command or a small hit fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern). If the MODE is a fanfare (step C401; Y), a fanfare effect setting process for setting a fanfare display image according to the type of the big hit and the small hit, adding the value of the continuous number display section 96, and the like is performed. (Step C402), the state of the P machine is set to the fanfare (step C403), and the big hit command processing ends.

  If MODE is not a fanfare (step C401; N), it is determined whether MODE is a round (step C404). That is, it is determined whether the received command is a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special game state. If the MODE is a round (step C404; Y), a round effect setting process for updating the number-of-rounds display information is performed (step C405), and the state of the P machine is set during the round (step C406). The big hit command processing ends.

  If MODE is not a round (step C404; N), it is determined whether MODE is an interval (step C407). That is, it is determined whether the received command is an interval command related to an interval between rounds. If MODE is an interval (step C407; Y), an interval effect setting process for setting effects during the interval is performed (step C408), and the state of the P machine is set during the interval (step C409), and the big hit is performed. Terminates system command processing. If MODE is not an interval (step C407; N), it is determined whether MODE is ending (step C410). That is, it is determined whether the received command is an ending command related to ending after the end of the final round or a small hit end screen command at the end of the small hit.

  If MODE is ending (step C410; Y), an ending effect setting process for setting an ending effect at the end of a big hit or a small hit is performed (step C411), and the P machine state is set to ending (step C411). C412), the big hit command processing ends. If MODE is not ending (step C410; N), it is determined whether MODE is a count (step C413). That is, it is determined whether or not the received command is a special winning opening count command based on winning in the special variable winning device.

  If MODE is not a count (step C413; N), the big hit command processing ends. If the MODE is a count (step C413; Y), a count effect setting process (step C414) for setting an effect corresponding to winning in the special variable winning device 38 is performed, and the big hit command process ends.

  By the processing in the effect control device 300 as described above, the effect according to the effect state as shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, the effect display on the display device 41 as shown in FIG. 24, and the like are performed. .

[First Modification]
Next, a first modification of the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment will be described. Basically, the gaming machine has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment. Hereinafter, portions having the same configuration will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. explain. The gaming machine of this modified example is different in the distribution of the variation time for the special figure variation display game which is a big hit started in the third specific gaming state ST4.

  In this modification, the variation pattern distribution shown in FIG. 85 is performed instead of the variation pattern distribution when the result is a big hit in the third specific game state shown in FIG. 28C. In the distribution of the fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 85, the distribution is made different depending on the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game executed after the end of the special game state.

  As shown in FIG. 85 (a), in the case of the 101st to 150th games after the end of the special game state, that is, in the case of within 50 games from the start of the third specific game state, the shortest fluctuation time of 150,000 ms The fluctuation pattern is selected at the highest rate. In addition, as shown in FIG. 85 (b), when the game is in the 151st to 200th games after the end of the special game state, that is, in the case of 51 to 100 games from the start of the third specific game state, the fluctuation time is the second. The shortest variation pattern of 250,000 ms is selected at the highest rate.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 85 (c), when the game is in the 201st to 250th games after the end of the special game state, that is, in the 101st to 250th games from the start of the third specific game state, the fluctuation time is the third. In this case, a short variation pattern of 300,000 ms is selected at the highest rate. Then, as shown in FIG. 85 (d), in the case of the 251st game or later after the end of the special game state, that is, in the case of 251 games or more from the start of the third specific game state, the maximum fluctuation time is 450,000 ms. The fluctuation pattern is selected at the highest rate.

  That is, the larger the number of games executed in the third specific game state, the higher the rate of selection of the long fluctuation time. The longer the fluctuation time is selected, the longer the stay period of the fourth specific game state becomes, and the number of award balls that can be acquired increases. Therefore, the fitting state in which the jackpot is not derived for a long term despite the high probability state is long. The more profits can be given to the player. Thereby, the dissatisfaction that the big hit is not derived can be eliminated. On the other hand, it is possible to give the game machine an expectation that the fitted state will continue for a long period of time, which is not present in conventional gaming machines.

  Note that the distribution shown in FIG. 85 is an example, and the division of the number of games whose tables are changed, the distribution of the fluctuation time in each table, and the like can be arbitrarily set. In order to achieve the above-described effect, the selection ratio of the long fluctuation time may be increased in the special figure fluctuation display game in which the longer the stay time in the third specific game state is, the larger the hit is. For example, the longer the cumulative value of the execution time of the special figure change display game executed in the third specific game state may be, the higher the selection ratio of the long change time in the special figure change display game that is a big hit may be increased.

  Conversely, the selection ratio of the long variation time may be reduced in the special figure variation display game in which the longer the stay time (the number of games or the execution time) in the third specific game state is, the larger the hit is. By doing so, a privilege can be given to a player who has been able to derive a special result early. Further, the selection ratio of the long fluctuation time may be the highest in the special figure fluctuation display game in which the big hit occurs when the stay time in the third specific game state is within the predetermined range. For example, the selection ratio of a long variation time may be the highest for a special figure variation display game that is a big hit in the case of 101 to 250 games from the start of the third specific game state. Further, a plurality of such periods may be provided. In this way, an advantageous period and an disadvantageous period can be provided in the third specific game state, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  From the above, the variable display game is executed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning port (the first starting winning port 36, the ordinary variable winning device 37, the second starting winning port 97), and the result of the variable display game is obtained. Is a special result, in a gaming machine that generates a special game state advantageous to the player, a control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300) for controlling a game, and a second winning opening which forms a start winning port. 1 Start winning opening 36 and a starting winning opening, which can be converted into a closed state in which game balls cannot be won and an open state in which game balls can be easily won, and a winning right to execute a variable display game is generated. A possible normal variable prize device 37 and a second start prize which constitutes a start prize port arranged downstream of the normal variable prize device 37 and at a position where a prize can be made via a path which can be awarded to the normal variable prize device. With a mouth 97 The means controls the operating state of the normal variable winning device 37 in one of a first operating state and a second operating state in which a prize is easier than the first operating state. The probability state in which the result is a special result is set to one of a low probability state and a high probability state higher than the low probability state, and a game ball is won to the first starting winning port 36 or the normal variable winning device 37. The first variable display game is executed as a variable display game based on the first variable display game, and the second variable display game is executed as a variable display game based on a prize of a game ball to the second start winning opening 97. The variable display game can be executed at the same time, in the high probability state, the execution time of the variable display game should be shorter than in the low probability state, and the special result is to change the probability derived according to the gaming state. First special available And a second special result whose probability is derived regardless of the game state. The probability that the second special result in the second variable display game is derived is the probability that the first special result is derived. If the result of the variable display game is the first special result, the first special game state is executed as a special game state advantageous to the player, and the result of the variable display game is the second special result. In the case of, when the second special game state is executed as a special game state advantageous to the player, and when the high probability state and the second operation state are to be executed, a variable display game which has a special result is executed. One operating state is selected, and the execution time of the variable display game is selected according to the number of times the variable display game has been executed since the end of the previous special gaming state. Therefore, the profit given to the player can be made different depending on the number of times the variable display game has been executed since the end of the special game state, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Second Modification]
Next, a second modification of the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment will be described. Basically, the gaming machine has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment. Hereinafter, portions having the same configuration will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. explain. The gaming machine of the present modification differs in the transition of the gaming state.

  FIG. 86 shows the transition of the game state in this modification. In this modified example, the third specific game state ST4 is not set, and in the first specific game state ST2, the falling lottery is not won, and the special figure variation display game is executed 100 times without any special result being derived. Shifts to the fourth specific game state ST5. Then, in the fourth specific game state ST5, when the player wins the falling lottery, the game shifts to the normal game state ST1. In addition, when the probability change big hit is derived in the fourth specific game state ST5, the process proceeds to the first specific game state ST2 after the special game state, and when the normal big hit is derived, the second specific game state is performed after the special game state. The process proceeds to ST3.

  FIG. 87 shows a variation pattern selected in the fourth specific game state ST5 of this modification. FIG. 87 (a) shows a variation pattern of the special figure variation display game in which the result is out of order and the winning lottery is not won. FIG. 87 (b) is a case where the result is a small hit and the falling lottery is executed. This is a variation pattern of a special figure variation display game that is not won. In each case, the fluctuation time is shorter than in the normal game state. Further, as shown in FIG. 87 (c), for a special figure change display game in which the result is out of place or a small hit and the falling lottery is won, the same change time is set and a common specific effect is provided. Be executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 87 (d), in the special figure variable display game in which the result is a big hit, when the special figure 1 variable display game in which the irregular fluctuation is performed is not won in the falling lottery, 20,000 ms is required. When a win is selected in the fall lottery, 10000 ms is set, and when the result is out of place or a small hit, a specific effect common to that in the case of winning in the fall lottery is set. In addition, for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game that is the main fluctuation, 10,000 ms is set irrespective of the presence or absence of the winning of the falling lottery, and the same as the case of winning the falling lottery when the result is out of place or a small hit. A specific effect is set.

  The fluctuating time of the special figure fluctuating display game that has won the falling lottery is shorter than the fluctuating time (see FIG. 28) of the fluctuating special figure fluctuating display game in the normal gaming state ST1. Therefore, if the special figure change display game that has won the falling lottery is started first or started at the same time, the special figure change display game that has won the falling lottery always ends first. As a result, when at least the special figure variable display game that has won the falling lottery is started first or at the same time, it is possible to determine the effect contents without referring to the variable time of both special figure variable display games, thereby simplifying the processing. Can be

  Note that the falling lottery is performed at the start of the special figure change display game, and thereafter the change pattern is determined. Therefore, in FIGS. 87 (c) and (d), the change pattern of the special figure change display game that has won the fall lottery is shown. Strictly speaking, this is a variation pattern selected in the normal gaming state ST1, but is described as a variation pattern in the fourth specific gaming state ST5 for easy understanding.

  FIG. 88 and FIG. 89 show how the effect is performed when the fourth specific game state ST5 ends. FIG. 88 (a) shows a case where the lottery is won in the special figure fluctuation display game in which the result is out of order. In the state of the fourth specific game state ST5, a small hit RUSH effect is set. In the fourth specific game state ST5, the game proceeds mainly with the special figure 2 variable display game (t71, t72). If the small hit is derived with a high probability and the small hit is derived (t73), the second special game state is set (t73 to t76), and the special variable winning device 38 is opened (t74 to t75). Will be

  Then, when the new special figure 2 variable display game is started, the player has won the falling lottery, the probability state is set to the low probability state (t76), and the gaming state is the normal gaming state ST1. A fixed time (here, 10000 ms) is set as the fluctuation time for the special figure variable display game that has won the falling lottery (t76 to t77), and the first specific effect is performed during the execution of the special figure variable display game. After the end of the special figure change display game, a normal mode effect corresponding to the normal game state ST1 is made (t78).

  Further, the continuous number display section 96 maintains the state of displaying the number of big hits (here, three times) until the end of the special figure change display game that has won the falling lottery. The display is ended with the end, and the number of big hits is cleared to zero. That is, at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game that has won the falling lottery, the game shifts to the normal game state ST1, and the end condition of the specific period for accumulating the game information is satisfied, but the display is maintained at this time. The display is terminated with the end of the special figure change display game. Thereby, it can be prevented that the winning in the falling lottery is known first.

  Further, in the gaming machine of this modified example, in the special figure fluctuation display game that has won the falling lottery, a state in which the game progresses by right-handing is maintained even in the normal game state ST1. Therefore, in the special figure fluctuation display game, the first game state display unit 56 maintains the lighting state, and also keeps the right-hand instruction notification (t76 to t78). In addition, since the game progresses in the right-handed state, even if there is a winning in the second start winning opening 97 during this period, the left-handed instruction notification command is not transmitted. It should be noted that the left-handing instruction notification command may be transmitted even in the special figure variation display game that has won the falling lottery, and the effect control device 300 may not perform the left-handing instruction during this period.

  Then, when the special figure change display game ends (t78), the first game state display unit 56 is turned off according to the game state, and the right-hand instruction notification ends. By doing in this way, it is possible to prevent the fact that the player has won the drop lottery by the display of the first game state display unit 56, the right-handed instruction notification, and the left-handed instruction notification, thereby preventing the interest of the game from being lowered. Can be prevented.

  FIG. 88 (b) shows a case where the player has won the falling lottery in the special figure variation display game in which the result is a big hit. In this case as well, as in FIG. 88 (a), when the new special figure 2 variable display game is started, the player has won the falling lottery, the probability state is set to the low probability state (t81), and the game state is normally The game state ST1 is set. A fixed time (here, 10,000 ms) is set as a fluctuation time for the special figure fluctuation display game that is a big hit (t81 to t82). During the execution of the special figure change display game, a first specific effect is performed (t81 to t83). Then, after the end of the special figure change display game, the game enters the first special game state and the first special game effect is provided (t83). When the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, a fixed time (here, 10000 ms) is set as the variable time regardless of whether or not the falling lottery is won, and the first specific effect is executed. .

  In addition, in the continuous number display section 96, the state of displaying the number of big hits (here, three times) until the special figure change display game won in the drop lottery is finished. In this example, since the special figure change display game is a big hit, the number of big hits is updated by +1 with the end of the special figure change display game. That is, at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game that has won the falling lottery, the game shifts to the normal game state ST1, and the end condition of the specific period for accumulating the game information is satisfied, but the display is maintained at this time. You. Further, in this case, the jackpot is derived in the special figure fluctuation display game that has won the falling lottery, and the start condition of the specific period is satisfied. Therefore, the number of jackpots before the transition to the normal game state ST1 is taken over as a specific case and added. To do. As a result, it is possible to prevent a discrepancy between the accumulated game information and the player's recognition from occurring, and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

  In addition, in the special figure fluctuation display game that has won the falling lottery, the state in which the game proceeds with right-handing is maintained even in the normal game state ST1. Therefore, in the special figure change display game, the first game state display unit 56 maintains the lighting state, and also keeps the right-handed instruction notification (t81 to t82). Further, even if there is a winning in the second starting winning opening 97 during this period, the left-handed instruction is not notified. In this example, the result is a special result, and the first special game state in which the game proceeds in a right-handed manner is attained, so that the first game state display section 56 and the right-handed instruction notification are maintained even after the special figure variable display game is completed. Will remain.

  By doing in this way, it is possible to prevent the fact that the player has won the drop lottery by the display of the first game state display unit 56, the right-handed instruction notification, and the left-handed instruction notification, thereby preventing the interest of the game from being lowered. Can be prevented. Also, if the player is caused to return to the left-handed play once, the right-handed start in the first special game state may be delayed, so that the start of winning in the special variable winning device 38 may be delayed. By maintaining the state, it is possible to prevent the start of winning the special variable winning device 38 from being delayed.

  FIG. 89 (a) shows a case where the player has won the falling lottery in the special figure fluctuation display game in which the result is a small hit. In this case as well, as in FIG. 88 (a), when the new special figure 2 variable display game is started, the player has won the falling lottery, the probability state is set to the low probability state (t91), and the game state is normally The game state ST1 is set. A fixed time (here, 10000 ms) is set as the fluctuation time for the special figure fluctuation display game that has won the falling lottery (t91 to t92). During the execution of the special figure change display game, a first specific effect is performed (t91 to t93). When the special figure change display game ends, the second special game state is set (t93), but the first specific effect is also continued in the second special game state (t93 to t94). After that, the normal mode is set with the end of the second special game state (t94).

  Further, the continuous number display section 96 maintains the state of displaying the number of big hits (here, three times) until the end of the special figure fluctuation display game won in the drop lottery and the end of the second special game state. Then, the display is ended with the end of the second special game state, and the number of big hits is cleared to zero. That is, at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game that has won the falling lottery, the game shifts to the normal game state ST1, and the end condition of the specific period for accumulating the game information is satisfied, but the display is maintained at this time. The display is also maintained in the second special game state based on the small hit derived in the special figure change display game. Then, the display is ended with the end of the second special game state. Thereby, it can be prevented that the winning in the falling lottery is known first.

  In addition, in the special figure fluctuation display game that has won the falling lottery, the state in which the game proceeds with right-handing is maintained even in the normal game state ST1. Therefore, in the special figure fluctuation display game, the first game state display unit 56 maintains the lighting state, and also keeps the right-hand instruction notification (t91 to t93). Further, even if there is a winning in the second starting winning opening 97 during this period, the left-handed instruction is not notified. Further, in the second special game state based on the small hit, the state in which the game proceeds by right-handing is maintained (t93 to t94). With the end of the second special game state (t94), the first game state display section 56 is turned off according to the gaming state, and the right-handed instruction is also notified.

  By doing in this way, it is possible to prevent the fact that the player has won the drop lottery by the display of the first game state display unit 56, the right-handed instruction notification, and the left-handed instruction notification, thereby preventing the interest of the game from being lowered. Can be prevented. Also, if the player is caused to return to the left-handed once, the start of right-handed in the second special game state may be delayed and the start of winning in the special variable winning device 38 may be delayed, but the game proceeds with right-handed. By maintaining the state, it is possible to prevent the start of winning the special variable winning device 38 from being delayed. Particularly, in the second special game state based on the small hit, since the opening time of the special variable prize winning device 38 is short, it is possible to surely make a prize by maintaining a state in which the game proceeds with right-handed.

  FIG. 89 (b) shows a case in which a special lot change display game in which the result is a small hit wins a falling lottery, and a special figure change display game in which a big hit is made during execution of the special figure change display game starts. The case was shown. In this case as well, as in FIG. 88 (a), when the new special figure 2 variable display game is started, the player has won the falling lottery, the probability state is set to the low probability state (t111), and the game state is normally The game state ST1 is set. A fixed time (here, 10000 ms) is set as a fluctuation time for the special figure fluctuation display game that has won the falling lottery (t111 to t113), and during the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game (t111 to t114) and the second special During the gaming state (t114 to t115), the first specific effect is performed. The content of the first specific effect is the same as the first specific effect in the case shown in FIG.

  In this example, during the execution of the first specific effect, the special figure 1 variable display game that is a big hit has been started (t112). Along with this, the second specific effect for suggesting and notifying the start of the special figure 1 variable display game to be a big hit is added to the first specific effect and started (t112). The second specific effect is continued until the end of the special figure 2 variable display game (t114), and then the second special effect state is set.

  The special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted due to the derivation of the small hit in the special figure 2 variable display game (t113 to t115), and the special figure 1 variable display game is restarted with the end of the second special game state (t115). ). When the special figure change display game which is a big hit is not executed, the effect of the normal mode is performed with the end of the second special game state as shown in FIG. 89 (a). The third specific effect is executed over a period during which the variable display game is being executed (t115 to 116). As a result, it is possible to suggest or notify the player of a big hit, and it is possible to prevent the player from quitting the game by winning the falling lottery. After that, the first special game state is set with the end of the special figure 1 variable display game (t117).

  Further, the continuous number display section 96 also displays the number of big hits (here, three times) in the second special game state after the special figure variable display game that has won the falling lottery, as in FIG. 89 (a). The state is maintained. After that, the game temporarily goes into a non-display state, but is restarted in a state where the number of big hits is updated by +1 with the end of the special figure change display game which becomes a big hit. That is, at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game that has won the falling lottery, the game shifts to the normal game state ST1, and the end condition of the specific period for accumulating the game information is satisfied, but the display is maintained at this time. You. Furthermore, with the end of the special figure change display game, which is a big hit started before the end of the special figure change display game, the number of big hits before shifting to the normal game state ST1 is taken over and added. The special figure change display game that is a big hit is a special figure change display game that is a big hit started before the end of the special figure change display game that has won the falling lottery. As a result, it is possible to prevent a discrepancy between the accumulated game information and the player's recognition from occurring, and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

  In addition, in the special figure fluctuation display game that has won the falling lottery, the state in which the game proceeds with right-handing is maintained even in the normal game state ST1. Therefore, in the special figure change display game, the first game state display unit 56 maintains the lighting state, and also keeps the right-hand instruction notification (t111 to t114). Further, even if there is a winning in the second starting winning opening 97 during this period, the left-handed instruction is not notified. Further, in the second special game state based on the small hit, the state in which the game proceeds by right-handing is maintained (t114 to t115), and with the end of the second special game state (t115), the first game state display unit. 56 is turned off according to the gaming state, and the right-handed instruction is also notified. In addition, when there is a winning in the second starting winning opening 97, a left-handed instruction is notified.

  In this example, the first special game state in which the game progresses by right-handing due to a special result later is provided, but with the end of the second special game state, the effect state is obtained by adding the third specific effect to the normal mode effect. Since it is an effect (t115 to t116), it is temporarily determined that the game progresses by left-handing corresponding to the normal game state, and it is found from the firing direction that the special result is derived in the first special figure variable display game. To prevent them from getting lost.

  As described above, by performing the first specific effect in the case of winning in the drop lottery or in the case of a big hit, it is possible to realize that either the transition to a low probability or the derivation of the big hit, which is a value that is greatly different for the player, occurs. It can inform and give the player a sense of anxiety and a sense of expectation, thereby improving the interest of the game. In addition, when the special figure variation display game which is a big hit is started during the execution of the first specific effect, the second specific effect and the third specific effect are performed, and the falling lottery is won by the first specific effect. Can notify the player of the possibility of a big hit, and can prevent the player from quitting the game due to falling.

  In addition, if the special figure change display game that has won the falling lottery has a big hit, or if the special figure change display game that has a big hit has started before the end of the special figure change display game that has won the fall lottery, Even when the derivation is in the normal game state ST1, the same as the big hit derived in the specific game state is handled in the same manner, and the value of the continuous number display section 96 is added by inheriting the number of big hits before shifting to the normal game state ST1. Like that. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the inconsistency with the player who is still in the specific game state due to the execution of the first specific effect, the second specific effect, and the third specific effect, thereby preventing the interest of the game from lowering. can do.

  In addition, in the special figure fluctuation display game that has won the falling lottery, even if the game has shifted to the normal game state ST1, the state in which the game progresses by right-handing is maintained, so that it is quickly known that the falling lottery has been won. Can be prevented.

  FIG. 90 shows an example of display on the display device 41. FIGS. 90 (a) to 90 (g) show an example of the first specific effect which is executed in the case where the falling lottery is won in the fourth specific game state ST5 or when a big hit occurs. When the special figure 2 variable display game is started as shown in FIG. 90 (a), the variable display is started on the first decorative special figure 2 game display section 85b and the second decorative special figure 2 game display section 88b. , The first specific effect is started. The first specific effect is an effect in which the ally character 89a and the enemy character 89b fight, and notifies the result of the special figure change display game and the presence or absence of the drop lottery based on the result of the battle.

  In addition, a right-handing instruction notification 99 for instructing right-handing is displayed at the lower left of the display area. The right-turning instruction notification 99 here is a notification mode different from the right-turning instruction notification 99 in the state where the first specific effect is not performed in the fourth specific game state ST5 as shown in FIG. ing. When the first specific effect is performed, the game may have already fallen into the normal game state ST1. In the special figure change display game in which the falling lottery has been won, the firing direction for proceeding the game is right-handed even in the normal game state ST1, but the normal game state ST1 originally proceeds with the left-handed game. It is in a state to do. As described above, when there is a possibility that the original launch direction corresponding to the game state and the launch direction to be instructed may not match, the notification mode of the right strike instruction notification 99 is made different.

  As shown in FIG. 90 (b), an effect in which the characters fight is performed, and when the fluctuation time ends, the result of the battle is shown. In the case where the result is out of order in the special figure fluctuation display game that has won the falling lottery, the result is that the ally character 89a is defeated as shown in FIG. 90 (c). In addition, the first decoration special figure 2 game display section 85b and the second decoration special figure 2 game display section 88b also display the result form of the loss.

  In the special figure fluctuation display game that has won the falling lottery, the state in which such a first specific effect is being executed has already shifted to the normal game state ST1, but the state in which the game proceeds with right-handing is maintained. Also, during the execution of the first specific effect, a right-turn instruction notification 99 for instructing a right-turn is displayed in the lower right of the display area.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 90 (d), a display in which the shutter display 93 which is a display imitating a shutter is closed is performed, and as shown in FIG. 90 (e), the shutter display 93 is completely closed and the fourth specific game state is established. The end of ST5, the notification of the number of prize balls acquired in the fourth specific game state ST5, and the notification of the number of big hits notified on the continuous number display section 96 are performed. That is, the shutter display 93 forms an image notifying that the player has won the falling lottery. Then, the process proceeds to the effect display in the normal gaming state ST1. In addition, with the transition to the effect display in the normal game state ST1, the right-handed instruction notification 99 ends. If the result is out of order, the right-handed instruction notification 99 may be terminated at the stage of FIG. 90 (c).

  When the result is a small hit in the special figure fluctuation display game that has won the falling lottery, the result is that the ally character 89a is defeated as shown in FIG. 90 (c), and the first decorative special figure 2 game display unit 85b and the second In the 2 decoration special figure 2 game display section 88b, the result mode of the small hit is displayed. After that, the second special game state is maintained with the display of FIG. 90 (c), and the display of FIGS. 90 (d) and (e) is performed at the end of the second special game state.

  If the result of the special figure change display game is a big hit regardless of the presence or absence of the winning of the falling lottery, after the character performs an effect of fighting as shown in FIG. 90 (b), the ally as shown in FIG. 90 (f) As a result, the character 89a wins. In addition, the result mode of the big hit is displayed on the first decorative special figure 2 game display unit 85b and the second decorative special figure 2 game display unit 88b. After this, the special game state is started.

  In this way, when the result is a big hit, the number of big hits displayed on the continuous count display section 96 is updated by +1 and is updated from three times shown in FIG. 90 (b) and the like to four times. If the special drawing change display game that is a big hit does not win the falling lottery, it is a big hit in the fourth specific game state ST5, and since it is a big hit generated during a specific period in which game information is accumulated, the continuous number display section 96 Is updated by +1.

  Further, when the player has won the falling lottery in the special figure change display game that is a big hit, the game temporarily shifts to the normal game state ST1. Instead of the second time, the result of the previous addition is taken over and added. As described above, during the execution of the special figure change display game that has won the falling lottery, the first specific effect indicating or notifying that the falling lottery has been won is performed. Since the player does not know clearly that he / she has won the falling lottery, it is possible to make the notification without a sense of incongruity by taking over the addition results up to that point and adding the results. In addition, since the right strike instruction notification 99 is also performed continuously, it is possible to make the user not conscious of falling into the normal game state ST1.

  In addition, when the result is out of place or a small hit in the special figure fluctuation display game without winning the falling lottery, the first specific effect may be performed as a so-called gaseous effect. In this case, after the character performs an effect of fighting as shown in FIG. 90 (d), the result of the draw is made as shown in FIG. 90 (g). In addition, the first decoration special figure 2 game display section 85b and the second decoration special figure 2 game display section 88b also display the result mode of the loss or the small hit.

  FIG. 91 shows an example of the second specific effect and the third specific effect. Here, an example in which the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit as shown in FIG. 89 (b) has been described, but the same applies to the case where the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is out of order. As shown in FIG. 91 (a), the special figure 2 variable display game which has won the falling lottery is started to start the first specific effect, and as shown in FIG. 91 (b), during the execution of the first specific effect. When the special figure 1 variable display game that is a big hit is started, a band 94 displaying “Warning !!” is displayed as the second specific effect so as to overlap the front side of the first specific effect. This band 94 is also displayed when the result is shown in the first specific effect as shown in FIG. 91 (c), so as to indicate that there is another result different from the result shown by the first specific effect. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 91 (d), the band 94 is not displayed during the execution of the second special game state. Then, when the second special game state ends and the special figure 1 variable display game, which is a big hit, is restarted, as shown in FIG. A band 95 is displayed. At this point, the right-handed instruction notification 99 is terminated. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 91 (f), the shutter display 93 is opened to allow the normal mode effect to be seen. As shown in FIG. 91 (g), the band 95 is also displayed when the variable display is performed in the normal mode effect. Continue to be displayed. Then, a jackpot result mode is displayed as shown in FIG. 91 (h), and a first special game state is set as shown in FIG. 91 (i). With the start of the first special game state, a right-handed instruction notification 99 is started.

  As shown in FIG. 91 (f), the display of the continuous number display section 96 is temporarily ended when the normal mode effect, which is the effect of the normal game state ST1, is reached, but as shown in FIG. The display is started when the effect of the gaming state is reached. In this case, the special figure change display game started before the end of the special figure change display game that has won the falling lottery is a big hit, and once the normal game state ST1 is entered, the number of big hits before the fall is reached. Is added, and it is updated from three times before the fall to four times. In addition, although the display of the continuous number display section 96 is temporarily ended when the normal mode effect is set, the display may be continued also here. Thereby, it is possible to suggest or notify that there is a possibility of a big hit.

  Although the second specific effect and the third specific effect are displayed in a band shape, other displays may be used. In addition, the second specific effect and the third specific effect are displayed so as to overlap the front side of the first specific effect, but the second specific effect and the third specific effect are performed instead of the first specific effect. Is also good. Further, only one of the second specific effect and the third specific effect may be performed.

  From the above, the variable display game is executed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning port (the first starting winning port 36, the ordinary variable winning device 37, the second starting winning port 97), and the result of the variable display game is obtained. When a special result is obtained, the gaming machine that generates a special gaming state advantageous to the player includes control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300) for controlling the game, and the control means When it is determined that the game state is changed in accordance with the establishment of one condition, a first specific effect for notifying the change of the game state can be executed, and the second condition is satisfied during execution of the first specific effect. When it is determined that the game state is changed due to the second condition, the second condition for notifying the change of the game state accompanying the establishment of the second condition in addition to or instead of the first specific effect is provided. It is possible to execute a specific effect And thus. Therefore, even if the second condition is satisfied after the start of the first specific effect, a change in the game state based on the satisfaction of the second condition can be notified, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, a first starting opening (first starting winning opening 36, a normal variable winning winning device 37) and a second starting opening (second starting winning opening 97), which form a start winning opening, are provided, and the control means controls the first starting opening. A first variable display game is executed as a variable display game based on a prize of a game ball to the mouth, and a second variable display game is executed as a variable display game based on a prize of a game ball to a second start port. The display game and the second variable display game can be executed at the same time, and when the first condition is satisfied and the game state is determined to be changed with the execution of one of the variable display games, the change in the game state is notified. The first specific effect can be executed, and during the execution of the first specific effect, if the second condition is satisfied with the execution of the other variable display game and it is determined to change the game state, the second specific effect is determined. 1 In addition to the specific performance or the first Instead of a constant effect, and thus a change in the game state associated with the establishment of the second condition is capable of executing a second specific effect of informing. Therefore, even if the second condition is satisfied after the start of the first specific effect, a change in the game state based on the satisfaction of the second condition can be notified, and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, even when two variable display games are simultaneously changed, a change in the game state based on the execution of each variable display game can be notified, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, the control means executes a third specific effect for notifying a change in the game state accompanying the establishment of the second condition during a period from the end of the first specific effect to the change of the game state accompanying the establishment of the second condition. It will be possible. Therefore, a change in the game state based on the establishment of the second condition can be notified, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In FIG. 92 (a), the special figure variation display game in which a special game state has a big hit is started, but the special figure variation display game in which the falling lottery is won during the execution of the special figure variation display game is started. Thus, an example is shown in which the game has fallen to the normal game state ST1 and the special figure change display game that has won the fall lottery ends earlier than the special figure change display game that is a big hit.

  In the example shown in FIG. 92 (a), the special figure 1 variable display game which is a big hit in the fourth specific game state ST5 has been started (t121). Then, during the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game, the special figure 2 variable display game which has won the falling lottery has been started (t122). With the start of the special figure 2 variable display game, the probability state shifts to the low probability state, and the gaming state becomes the normal gaming state ST1.

  Since a fixed time (here, 10000 ms) is set as the fluctuation time for the special figure variable display game that has won the falling lottery, the time when the special figure 2 variable display game that has won the falling lottery is started is started in the gaming machine. It is possible to know which one ends first from the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game. Here, it is understood that the special figure 2 variable display game that has won the falling lottery ends earlier than the special figure 1 variable display game that is a big hit and ends with a deviation result.

  Thereafter, the special figure 2 variable display game that has won the falling lottery ends before the special figure 1 variable display game, which is a big hit, and ends with a deviation result (t124), and a new special figure 2 variable display game is started. In the special figure variation display game that has won the falling lottery, the state in which the game proceeds with right-handing is maintained even in the normal game state ST1, and the first game state display unit 56 maintains the lighting state and gives the right-handing instruction. The notification is also maintained (t122 to t124). Further, even if there is a winning in the second starting winning opening 97 during this period, the left-handed instruction is not notified. Then, at the end (t124) of the special figure fluctuation display game that has won the falling lottery, the game is made to proceed in a left-handed manner, the first game state display unit 56 is turned off, and the right-handed notification is ended. I do.

  After that, as the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game that becomes a big hit ends, the running special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped as a result of a loss (t125). Thereafter, when the stop display time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends, the first special game state is started (t126). Along with the start of the first special game state, the game proceeds in a right-handed manner, the first game state display unit 56 is turned on, and the right-handed notification is started.

  In the example as shown in FIG. 92 (a), one of the effect state 1 and the effect state 2 can be executed as an effect. The effect state 1 is an effect as shown in FIG. First, in the fourth specific game state ST5, since the game proceeds with the special figure 2 variable display game as the main change, the effect state does not change at the time (t121) when the special figure 1 variable display game, which is a big hit, is started. The game proceeds. Then, when the special figure 2 variable display game that has won the falling lottery is started (t122), the first specific effect is started. The content of the first specific effect is an effect in which the ally character 89a and the enemy character 89b fight as shown in FIGS. 91 (a) to 91 (e). The effect that the ally character 89a is defeated, the shutter display 93 is closed, and the fourth specific game state ST5 ends is performed (t122 to t124).

  During the execution of the first specific effect and at a predetermined timing during the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game that has won the falling lottery (t123), the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game that results in a big hit is suggested or notified. A second specific effect is added. The second specific effect is continued until the end of the special figure 2 variable display game. The content of the second effect is an effect of displaying a band 94 on which “Warning !!” is displayed as shown in FIGS. 91 (b) and (c).

  Thereafter, the third specific effect is started with the end of the special figure 2 variable display game that has won the falling lottery (t124). The content of the third specific effect is an effect of displaying a band 95 on which "Waiting for intense heat!" Is displayed as shown in FIGS. 91 (f) and 91 (g). By setting such an effect state 1, it is possible to suggest or notify the player of a big hit, and it is possible to prevent the player from quitting the game by winning the falling lottery.

  Then, when the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game that becomes a big hit is stopped (t125), as shown in FIG. 91 (h), the decorative special figure 1 game display unit 85a stops with a display corresponding to the result and the big hit Is shown. Further, during the stop display time (t125 to t126), the result mode is clearly displayed as shown in FIG. 91 (i).

  Since the display of the continuous number display section 96 is a normal mode effect which is an effect of the normal game state ST1 as shown in FIG. 91 (f) by the end (t124) of the special figure fluctuation display game which has won the falling lottery, The display is started when the effect of the first special game state as shown in FIG. 91 (i) is reached. In this case, the special figure change display game started before the end of the special figure change display game that has won the falling lottery is a big hit, and once the normal game state ST1 is entered, the number of big hits before the fall is reached. , And the number is updated from three times before the fall to four times.

  The effect state 2 is an effect in which the first specific effect for indicating or notifying that the player has won the falling lottery with respect to the effect state 1 is not performed. FIG. 93 shows an example of this effect state 2. In the fourth specific game state ST5, the game proceeds with the special figure 2 variable display game as the main change, and therefore, at the time when the special figure 1 variable display game that becomes a big hit is started (t121 in FIG. 92 (a)), As shown in FIG. 93 (a), the effect state does not change and the game proceeds.

  Thereafter, at the time when the special figure 2 variable display game that has won the falling lottery is started (t122 in FIG. 92 (a)), as shown in FIG. 93 (b), the staging state does not change and the game proceeds. At a predetermined timing of the special figure 2 variable display game (t123 in FIG. 92 (a)), a second time for suggesting or notifying the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game which is a big hit as shown in FIG. 93 (c). The two specific effects are started by being added to the first specific effect. The second specific effect is continued until the end of the special figure 2 variable display game (t124 in FIG. 92 (a)). The content of the second effect is an effect of displaying a band 94 on which “Warning !!” is displayed as shown in FIGS. 93 (c) and 93 (d).

  Thereafter, the third specific effect is started with the end of the special figure 2 variable display game that has won the falling lottery (t124 in FIG. 92 (a)). As shown in FIG. 93 (e), the content of the third specific effect is an effect of displaying a band 95 in which “Waiting for intense heat!” Is displayed. In addition, the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game that becomes a big hit is suggested or notified according to the content of the dialogue of the character 89a. By setting such an effect state 2, it is possible to suggest or notify a big hit without making the player aware that the player has won the falling lottery.

  Then, when the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game that becomes a big hit is stopped (t125 in FIG. 92 (a)), as shown in FIG. 93 (f), the first decorative special figure 1 game display section 85a, the second decorative The special figure 1 game display unit 88a stops at the display corresponding to the result, and the character 89a indicates that a big hit has occurred. Further, at the stop display time (t125 to t126 in FIG. 92 (a)), the result mode is clearly displayed as shown in FIG. 93 (g), and the effect of the first special game state as shown in FIG. 93 (h). Is started.

  The right strike notification ends when the special figure 2 variable display game that has won the falling lottery ends as shown in FIG. 93 (e), and the first special game state starts as shown in FIG. 93 (h). It is started with. In this effect state 2, even if the player has won the falling lottery and transitioned to the normal game state ST1, the small hit RUSH effect is continued, so that the right-handed notification is continued without being terminated. Even if there is a winning in the second start winning opening 97, the left-handed instruction may not be notified.

  The display of the number-of-consecutive-times display section 96 is maintained even after the special-figure variable display game that has won the falling lottery, and the display is updated by +1 when the first special game state is reached. In this case as well, although the game temporarily shifts to the normal game state ST1, the addition is continued to the number of jackpots before the fall, and is updated from three times before the fall to four times.

  In other words, this is a case where the end condition is satisfied during the execution of one of the special figure variable display games started during the specific period (winning of the falling lottery), and the other started before the one variable display game starts. When the start condition of the new specific period is satisfied (the big hit is derived) after the end condition is satisfied by the variable display game, the end effect (first specific effect) may not be executed. In addition, a specific effect (second specific effect, third specific effect) can be executed in addition to or instead of the end effect.

  It should be noted that the execution mode of the effect is not limited to the above-described one. For example, it is known that a big hit occurs later at the start of the special figure change display game that has won the falling lottery. An effect that indicates a big hit as shown in (f) may be performed from the start of the special figure change display game that has won the falling lottery.

  In FIG. 92 (b), the special figure change display game in which a big hit is made in the specific game state is started, but the special figure change display game in which the falling lottery is won during the execution of the special figure change display game is started. This is an example of the case where the game has fallen into the normal game state ST1 and the variation time of the special figure variation display game which is a big hit ends earlier.

  In the example shown in FIG. 92 (b), the special figure 1 variable display game which is a big hit in the fourth specific game state ST5 has been started (t131). Then, during the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game, the special figure 2 variable display game which has won the falling lottery has been started (t132). With the start of the special figure 2 variable display game, the probability state shifts to the low probability state, and the gaming state becomes the normal gaming state ST1. At this point, it is known that the special figure 1 variable display game that is a big hit in the gaming machine ends the variable time before the special figure 2 variable display game that has won the falling lottery.

  Thereafter, the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game that becomes a big hit ends earlier than the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game that has won the falling lottery. Is stopped as a result (t133). Thereafter, when the stop display time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends, the first special game state is started (t134).

  In such a case, at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game that has won the falling lottery, it is selected not to perform the first specific effect indicating or notifying that the falling lottery has been won, and FIG. 93 (c) The second specific effect for suggesting or notifying the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game which is a big hit as shown in FIG. By setting such an effect state, it is possible to suggest or notify a big hit without making the player aware that the player has won the falling lottery.

  Also in this example, the special figure change display game in which the big hit is started in a state other than the normal game state ST1 is started, but the special figure change display game that wins the falling lottery during the execution of the special figure change display game is started. In the case where the game has fallen to the normal game state ST1 and the game has temporarily shifted to the normal game state ST1 due to the winning of the drop lottery, the value of the continuous number display section 96 is added continuously to the number of big hits before falling. It has become.

  In addition, in the special figure change display game that has won the falling lottery, a state in which the game proceeds with right-handing is maintained even when the game is shifted to the normal game state ST1, and the first game state display section 56 maintains the lighting state, The batting instruction notification is also maintained (t132 to t134). Also, even if there is a winning in the second starting winning opening 97, the left-handed instruction is not notified. Therefore, in this example, the state in which the game proceeds with right-handing is maintained.

  As described above, during the specific game state or the special game state that is the specific period, the game proceeds with right-handed play, and in the normal game state ST1 that is not the specific period, the game proceeds with left-handed play. , It becomes possible for the player to know whether or not it is a specific period. Therefore, when the value of the continuous number display section 96 is continuously added to the number of big hits before the fall, the current firing direction of the game ball is not clearly indicated, or the value is specified even during the period of transition to the normal game state ST1. By indicating the launch direction in the game state as it is, it is possible to make the player unaware of the fall.

  In the above description, handover of the display of the continuous count display unit 96 at the end of the specific period due to the end of the fourth specific game state ST5 has been described. However, the first specific game state ST2, the second specific game state ST3, Similarly, at the end of the specific period due to the end of the third specific game state ST4, in a specific case where the start condition of the specific period is immediately satisfied, the value of the continuous number display section 96 may be inherited and added. good.

  It should be noted that the state in which the game progresses by right-handing until the end of the special figure fluctuation display game that has won the falling lottery is maintained, but the state in which the game progresses by right-handing until the middle of the special figure fluctuation display game is maintained. You may do it. For example, a state in which the game proceeds in a right-handed manner from the start of the special figure change display game to a predetermined time is maintained, and when the predetermined time is reached, it is clear that the player has fallen in the first specific effect. good. By doing so, it is possible to prevent early recognition of the winning in the drop lottery, and it is possible to change the firing direction according to the gaming state as soon as possible.

  Further, the game control device 100 keeps the state in which the game progresses by right-handing until the end of the special figure change display game won in the drop lottery, and the first game state display section 56 lights up until the end of the special figure change display game. The state may be maintained, but the effect control device 300 may end the right strike instruction notification 99 without interlocking with the display of the first game state display unit 56. For example, the process may end when it is clear that a fall has occurred in the first specific effect.

  In addition, as in the example shown in FIG. 89 (b), when the special figure 1 variable display game is started during the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game that has won the falling lottery (t112), the right-handed instruction notification is given. 99 may be ended, or the game may be shifted to a state in which the game proceeds with left-handed. That is, when the special figure 1 variable display game that can be started in the original launch direction corresponding to the normal game state ST1 is started, the player starts left-handed in anticipation of the normal game state ST1. , And the game may be shifted to a state in which the game progresses by ending the right-handed instruction notification 99 and / or left-handed.

  Under such conditions, it is possible to shift to a state in which the game progresses by ending the right-handed instruction notification 99 or left-handed, so that the player falls down temporarily by left-handed during the execution of the first specific effect. It is possible to give a new game property that it is possible to know whether or not the player is playing. Further, in the case where the game is in the high probability state despite the execution of the first specific effect, that is, when the special result is obtained, even if the special figure 1 variable display game is started by left-handing, the right-handed instruction notification 99 Without ending the game, the state in which the game proceeds with right-handing is also maintained. Thereby, it is possible to give a new game property that it is possible to know whether or not a special result is obtained by temporarily left-handing during execution of the first specific effect.

  In addition, when the special drawing 1 fluctuation display game in which the irregular fluctuation is performed in the fourth specific game state ST5 wins the falling lottery, the left-handed game proceeds with the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game. And the right-handed instruction notification 99 may be ended and the right-handed game progresses until the end of the special figure 1 variable display game that has won the falling lottery similarly to the special figure 2 variable display game. May be maintained, and the right-handed instruction notification 99 may be maintained.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 92 (a), during the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game in which the irregular fluctuation is performed in the fourth specific gaming state ST5, the falling lottery is performed in the special figure 2 variable display game in which the main fluctuation is performed. If the special figure 1 variable display game becomes a big hit when the player wins, the state in which the game proceeds with right-handing is maintained while the special figure 2 variable display game selected in the fall lottery ends and the right-hand instruction is notified. 99 may be maintained. That is, during the period from t124 to t126 in FIG. 92 (a), the state in which the game proceeds with right-handing may be maintained, and the right-hand instruction notification 99 may be maintained.

  In the above example, the case where the player has won the falling lottery has been described. However, as shown in FIG. 22A, in the second specific game state ST3, 100 times from the end of the first special game state. Similarly, in the case where the special figure change display game is executed, in the special figure change display game (the 101st special figure change display game) which has shifted to the normal game state ST1, the state in which the game progresses by right-handing is maintained. May be. In addition, although not present in the transition of the above-mentioned gaming state, in a case where there is a transition from a state in which the game proceeds with left-handing to a state in which the game proceeds with right-handing without going through the special gaming state, In the shifted special figure fluctuation display game, a state in which the game proceeds with left-handed play may be maintained.

  Further, as the instruction of the firing direction to be continuously displayed, only the right-handed instruction information 99 is provided, but only the left-handed instruction information may be provided, or the right-handed instruction information 99 and the left-handed instruction information may be provided. May be displayed according to the game state.

  Further, the configuration of the second modification may be applied to the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above. For example, the first specific effect described above may be performed when the special figure change display game that is a big hit in the third specific game state ST4 is started, and the transition to the fourth specific game state ST5 may be performed. good. Further, when the special figure variation display game which does not cause a big hit in the third specific game state ST4 is started, the first specific effect may be performed as a gaseous effect. In addition, in the fourth specific game state ST5, when the player wins the falling lottery and shifts to the fifth specific game state ST6, the second specific effect or the third specific effect is performed to indicate or notify that a big hit will occur. You may do it. In the case of transition to the fifth specific game state ST6, an effect mode as shown in FIG. 93 may be adopted. Further, in the case of transition to the fifth specific game state ST6, the value of the continuous number display section 96 and the value of the total number of prize balls display section 92 may be the value before the transition to the fifth specific game state ST6. Alternatively, it may be cleared to 0.

  From the above, the variable display game is executed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning port (the first starting winning port 36, the ordinary variable winning device 37, the second starting winning port 97), and the result of the variable display game is obtained. Is a special result, a game control means (game control device 100) for controlling a game, and an effect control means (a game control device (a game control device 100) for controlling an effect of a game, in a gaming machine generating a special game state advantageous to the player. Effect control device 300), a first starting opening (first starting winning opening 36, a normal variable winning opening device 37) and a second starting opening (second starting winning opening 97) forming a starting winning opening. The means executes a first variable display game as a variable display game based on a winning of a game ball to the first starting port, and executes a second variable display game as a variable display game based on a winning of a game ball to the second starting port. Execute the first variable display game And the second variable display game can be simultaneously executed, and the effect control means can set a specific period that is started when a predetermined start condition is satisfied and that ends when a predetermined end condition is satisfied. It is possible to accumulate and notify the information of the game from the start to the end of the period, and when the end condition is satisfied during the execution of one of the variable display games started during the specific period, If the start condition of a new specific period is satisfied after the end condition is satisfied by the other variable display game started before the end of the variable display game, the specification that is newly started based on the establishment of the start condition In the period, the game information can be accumulated following the game information accumulated in the specific period set at the start of the one variable display game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the accumulated information of the game from being inconsistent with the player's recognition, and to prevent the interest of the game from decreasing.

  Further, the game control means can execute an end effect (first specific effect) for notifying that the end condition has been satisfied, and the end condition is satisfied during execution of one of the variable display games started during the specific period. If the start condition of the new specific period is satisfied after the end condition is satisfied by the other variable display game started before the start of the one variable display game, the end effect is not executed. It will be possible. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the accumulated information of the game from being inconsistent with the player's recognition, and to prevent the interest of the game from decreasing.

  Further, the game control means can execute an end effect that notifies that the end condition has been satisfied, and the case where the end condition is satisfied during execution of one of the variable display games started during the specific period, If the start condition of a new specific period is satisfied after the end condition is satisfied by the other variable display game started before the start of the one variable display game, in addition to the end effect or in place of the end effect A specific effect can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the accumulated information of the game from being inconsistent with the player's recognition, and to prevent the interest of the game from decreasing.

  Further, when the end condition is satisfied during the execution of the variable display game started during the specific period, and when the start condition of the new specific period is satisfied with the end of the variable display game being executed, In a specific period newly started with the end of the variable display game, the game information may be accumulated following the game information accumulated in the specific period set at the start of the variable display game. It will be possible. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the accumulated information of the game from being inconsistent with the player's recognition, and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

  Further, the game area 32 is provided with a game area 32 through which the game ball can flow, and the game ball is transferred to a start winning port (a first starting winning port 36, a normal variable winning apparatus 37, a second starting winning port 97) provided in the game area 32. A game control means (game control device 100) for controlling a game in a gaming machine that generates a state advantageous to a player when a game is executed based on a winning and a result of the game is a special result. And an effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the effect of the game, wherein the game area includes one side of the game area and the other side of the game area, and the player controls the firing force of the game ball. By adjusting, it is configured to be able to select which one of the game area and the other side of the game area flows down, and the game control means can set one game state from among a plurality of game states That the predetermined transition condition is satisfied. It is configured to shift the game state, and for each game state, it is determined in advance which one of the game area on the one side and the game area on the other side to advance the game by firing the game ball, The effect control means can execute a launch direction instruction notification for instructing a game area in which a game ball is to be fired in accordance with the set game state, and in a game in which a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, the transition of the game state is performed. Is performed, the launch direction instruction notification corresponding to the game state before the transition can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the state of the game has been changed from being found at an early stage and the interest of the game from being reduced.

  Further, the game control means is configured such that, even if the game state is to be fired in the game in which the predetermined transition condition is satisfied, the game area corresponding to the game state before the transition even if the transition of the game state is performed. It will be. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the state of the game has been changed from being found at an early stage and the interest of the game from being reduced. In addition, it is possible to prevent inconsistency in the notification of the launch direction specified by the game control device 100 and the launch direction by the effect control device 300.

  Further, the predetermined transition condition is to perform a transition of a game state accompanied by a change of a game area in which a game ball is to be fired, and the effect control means determines that the game in which the predetermined transition condition is satisfied and the result is a special result. In other games, a common specific effect can be executed. Therefore, by performing the common specific effect, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game by suggesting that either the establishment of the transition condition or the derivation of the special result, and the transition condition during the execution of the common specific effect. , Or derivation of the special result.

  Further, the effect control means can make the notification mode different between the case where the launch direction instruction notification corresponding to the current game state is performed and the case where the launch direction instruction notification not corresponding to the current game state is performed. It will be. Therefore, it is possible to indicate that the launch direction instruction notification does not correspond to the current game state.

  In the state where the transition of the game state is performed in the game in which the predetermined transition condition is satisfied and the launch direction instruction corresponding to the game state before the transition is executed, When the launch of the game ball corresponding to the state is detected, the launch direction instruction notification is changed to correspond to the game state after the transition. Therefore, when the player knows the actual launch direction, it is possible to prevent the launch direction instruction notification from being performed.

  Further, a first starting port (first starting winning port 36) serving as a starting winning port is provided in one game area, and a second starting port (second starting winning port 97) serving as a starting winning port is provided in the other game area. ) Is provided, and the game control means executes the first game (special figure 1 variable display game) as a game based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port, and based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port. A second game (special figure 2 variable display game) is executed as a game, and the first game and the second game can be executed simultaneously. The special results include a first special result (big hit) and a second special result (small hit). ) Is included, and the probability that the result of the game is the first special result is the same probability in the first game and the second game, and includes the low probability state and the high probability state higher than the low probability state. If it is set to any one and the state is in the high probability state, it will shift to the low probability state every time the game is executed. The probability that the result of the game will be the second special result is the same in both the low-probability state and the high-probability state, and the game is transferred to the game area on the other side. In the game state in which the ball is fired to progress the game, the fluctuation time of the second game is set shorter than in the game state in which the game ball is fired to one side of the game area and the game proceeds. Therefore, the playability can be varied depending on the firing direction, and the interest of the game can be improved. In the above-described embodiment, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 serving as the first starting port is provided also in the right game area, but the first starting port may not be provided in the right game area.

[Third Modification]
Next, a third modification of the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment will be described. Basically, the gaming machine has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment. Hereinafter, portions having the same configuration will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. explain. The gaming machine of the present modified example is different in the transition of the gaming state and the execution mode of the effect. In addition, the case where the value before the fall is inherited for the display on the continuous number display section 96 is different accordingly.

  FIG. 94 shows the transition of the game state in this modification. In the present modified example, the third specific game state ST4 is not set, as in the second modified example. In the first specific game state ST2, the falling lottery is not won, and no special result is derived. If the variable display game has been executed, the process proceeds to the fourth specific game state ST5. The probability state and the like in each game state are the same as those in the second modification. Then, in a case where the falling lottery is won in the fourth specific game state ST5, the process shifts to the normal game state ST1.

  Further, the transition destination in the case where the probability variable jackpot is derived in the first specific game state ST2, the second specific game state ST3, and the fourth specific game state ST5 is different from the second modification, and in this modification, the special game state is set. After the special game state, the game proceeds to the fourth specific game state ST5. When the normal jackpot is derived, the game proceeds to the second specific game state ST3. In other words, even if the probability change jackpot is the same, the game state to be shifted is different between the case where the game is derived in the normal game state ST1 and the case where the game is derived in the specific game state, and the value obtained for the player is different.

  The variation pattern selected in each game state in this modification is basically the same as that in the second modification, but the variation pattern selected in the fourth specific game state ST5 is partially different. In addition, the effect execution mode in this modification is basically the same as that in the second modification, but is partially different. In the present modification, the destination of the subsequent game state is different depending on the game state when the big hit is derived, so that the player clearly understands the game state when the big hit is derived, and gives a sense of incongruity and distrust. Need not be. For this reason, a part of the effect execution mode is different from that of the second modification. Hereinafter, a case different from the second modified example will be described.

  FIG. 95 shows a variation pattern selected in the fourth specific game state ST5 of this modification. FIGS. 95A to 95C are the same as those in the second modification. As shown in FIG. 95 (d), in the special figure variable display game in which the result is a big hit, 20,000 ms is set in the special figure 1 variable display game in which the irregular fluctuation is performed when the falling lottery is not won. In the case of winning in the falling lottery, 10,000 ms is set. In these cases, a specific effect that is set when the result is out of order or a small hit is a case where the lottery is won is not set.

  In addition, 10,000 ms is set for the special figure 2 variable display game, which is the main variable, regardless of whether or not the falling lottery has been won. Among them, a specific effect is set when the falling lottery is not won, and the specific effect is not set when the falling lottery is won. The reason why the specific effect is not set for the special figure change display game which is a big hit won in the falling lottery is to perform the normal mode effect in order to make the player grasp from the early stage that the player has won the falling lottery.

  FIG. 96 (a) shows a case in which a special lot change display game in which the result is a big hit wins a falling lottery. This is basically the same as the case of the second modification shown in FIG. 88 (b), except that the effect state and the display content of the continuous number display unit 96 are the same as those of the second modification shown in FIG. 88 (b). And different.

  When the new special figure 2 variable display game is started, the player has won the falling lottery, the probability state is set to the low probability state (t81), and the game state is the normal game state ST1. In addition, with the start of the special figure change display game that is a big hit that has been won in the fall lottery, the small hit RUSH effect ends and the normal mode effect is performed, and the big hit effect in the normal mode effect is executed (t81 to t81). t82).

  Further, following the transition to the normal game state ST1 after winning the falling lottery (t81), the state in which the game proceeds in the right-handed manner ends, the first game state display unit 56 is turned off, and the right-handed instruction is given. The notification ends. If there is a winning in the second starting winning opening 97, a state in which a left-hand instruction is notified is started. That is, in the fourth specific game state ST5, when the special drawing change display game which wins the falling lottery and the big hit is started, the right figure changing display game which wins the falling lottery is started. The state in which the game is advanced by hitting is ended, and the right-handed instruction notification is ended.

  As described above, the normal mode effect, the first game state display unit 56, the right-handed instruction notification, and the left-handed instruction notification also correspond to the normal game state ST1, so that the big hit is derived in the normal game state ST1. Can be clearly shown, and it is possible to prevent the player from questioning the destination of the game state after the end of the special game state. In addition, by shifting to the normal mode effect without executing the first specific effect, it is possible to suggest to the player that the situation is different from the normal state, and it is possible to increase a sense of expectation. Then, after the end of the special figure change display game, the game enters the first special game state and the first special game effect is provided (t83).

In the continuous count display section 96, the end condition of the specific period is satisfied with the transition to the normal game state ST1, so that the display is ended and the number of big hits is cleared to 0 (t81). After that, the start condition of the new specific period is satisfied with the end of the special figure change display game that becomes a big hit, so that the display of the continuous number display section 96 is started. In this case, since the gaming state when the big hit is derived is the normal gaming state ST1, the value of the continuous number display section 96 is set to 1, and the player can recognize that the big hit is derived in the normal gaming state ST1. And Thereby, it is possible to grasp that the game does not shift to the fourth specific game state ST5 immediately after the end of the first special game state.

  Note that when the small hit RUSH effect is ended and the normal mode effect is set, a result display at the time of the end of the small hit RUSH effect as shown in FIG. 91 (d) may be performed. Further, effects such as those shown in FIGS. 91 (e) to 91 (h) may be performed.

  FIG. 96 (b) shows a case where a special lot change display game in which the result is a small hit wins a falling lottery, and a special figure change display game in which a big hit is made during execution of the special figure change display game is started. The case was shown. Basically, it is the same as the case of the second modification shown in FIG. 89 (b), but the display content of the continuous count display section 96 is different from that of the second modification shown in FIG. 89 (b).

  In the continuous number display section 96, the state in which the number of big hits (here, three times) is displayed is maintained even in the second special game state after the special figure variable display game that has won the falling lottery. That is, at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game that has won the falling lottery, the game shifts to the normal game state ST1, and the end condition of the specific period for accumulating the game information is satisfied, but the display is maintained at this time. You. Then, the display is ended with the end of the second special game state, and the number of big hits is cleared to 0 (t115).

  In addition, in the special figure fluctuation display game that has won the falling lottery for performing the specific effect, the state in which the game proceeds with right-handing is maintained even when the game is shifted to the normal game state ST1. Therefore, in the special figure change display game, the first game state display unit 56 maintains the lighting state, and also keeps the right-hand instruction notification (t111 to t114). Further, even if there is a winning in the second starting winning opening 97, the left-handed instruction is not notified. Further, in the second special game state based on the small hit, the state in which the game proceeds by right-handing is maintained (t114 to t115), and with the end of the second special game state (t115), the first game state display unit. 56 is turned off according to the gaming state, and the right-handed instruction is also notified.

  Thereafter, the first special game state is started with the end of the special figure change display game that becomes a big hit, and the display of the continuous number display section 96 is started. In this case, the gaming state when the big hit is derived is the normal gaming state ST1, and a new specific period is started. Therefore, the value of the continuous number display section 96 is set to 1, and the big hit derived in the normal gaming state ST1 is It is possible for the player to know that there is something. Thereby, it is possible to grasp that the game does not shift to the fourth specific game state ST5 immediately after the end of the first special game state.

  In addition, the display device 41 performs the effect shown in FIG. 91, and the effect of the normal mode is effected with the end of the second special game state. By making the notification and the left-handed instruction notification also correspond to the normal gaming state ST1, it is possible to grasp that the state has shifted to the normal gaming state ST1. In this example, the value of the continuous number display section 96 in FIG.

  In addition, the execution time (t111 to t113) of the special figure change display game that has won the falling lottery is the change time (t112 to t113 and t115 to t116) of the special figure change display game which is a big hit started in the normal game state ST1. Total time). Therefore, if the special figure change display game that has won the falling lottery is started or started at the same time, the special figure change display game that has won the falling lottery always ends first. For this reason, before the big hit result is derived, a time for notifying the player of the normal gaming state ST1 can be secured, and the player can reliably grasp that the big hit is derived in the normal gaming state ST1. It is possible. In addition, if at least the special figure variable display game that has won the falling lottery is started or started at the same time, the effect contents can be determined without referring to the variable time of both special figure variable display games, and processing can be simplified. can do.

  In addition, following the transition to the normal gaming state ST1 after winning the falling lottery (t111), the state in which the game proceeds in the right-handed manner may be maintained and the notification of the right-handed instruction may be ended. Further, when the winning lottery is selected and the game mode shifts to the normal game state ST1 (t111), the display of the continuous number display section may be hidden and the number of big hits may be cleared to zero.

  From the above, the variable display game is executed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning port (the first starting winning port 36, the ordinary variable winning device 37, the second starting winning port 97), and the result of the variable display game is obtained. Is a special result, a game control means (game control device 100) for controlling a game in a gaming machine that generates a special game state advantageous to the player, and a first start port (a start winning port) serving as a start winning port. A first starting winning port 36, a normal variable winning device 37) and a second starting port (second starting winning port 97) are provided, and the game control means displays a variable based on a winning of a game ball to the first starting port. A first variable display game is executed as a game, and a second variable display game is executed as a variable display game based on winning of a game ball to a second starting port, and the first variable display game and the second variable display game are simultaneously executed. Possible and prescribed starting clause It is possible to set a specific period that is started by the establishment of the special display and ends when a predetermined end condition that can be established at the start of the variable display game is satisfied, and whether the derivation of the special result is during the specific period The execution time of the variable display game that satisfies the end value of the specific period is shorter than the execution time of the variable display game that is a special result that is started when the specific period is not set. It will be. Therefore, when the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied is started after the start of the variable display game in which the end condition is satisfied, a special result is derived in a state in which the specific period has ended. It is possible to prevent a discrepancy with the player's recognition from occurring, and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

  Further, the game control means can execute an end effect (first specific effect) for notifying that the end condition has been satisfied during the execution of the variable display game in which the end condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the obtained game value from being inconsistent with the player's perception, and to prevent the interest of the game from lowering.

  The start condition of the specific period can be satisfied with the derivation of the special result, but the time at which the start condition is satisfied differs depending on which period is set for the specific period. That is, when the special game state is included in addition to the specific game state as the specific period, the start condition is satisfied by the start of the special game state accompanying the derivation of the special result in the state other than the specific game state. . Also, if the special period is not included in the specific period only as the specific game state, the special game state accompanying the derivation of the special result in the state other than the specific game state ends and the specific game state is started. The condition will be satisfied.

  In FIG. 97 (a), the special figure 1 variable display game which is a big hit is started before the special figure 2 variable display game which has won the falling lottery, and the special figure 2 variable display game which has won the falling lottery is started. An example of an effect state in the case where the change time ends before the change time of the special figure 1 change display game in which the change time becomes a big hit is shown. This is basically the same as the case of the second modification shown in FIG. 92 (a), except that the effect state and the display content of the continuous number display section 96 are the same as those of the second modification shown in FIG. 92 (a). And different. The effect states 1 and 2 correspond to the effect shown in FIG. 92A, and different portions will be mainly described below.

  In the effect state 1, the display of the continuous number display section 96 is terminated with the end of the special figure variable display game that has won the falling lottery, and the number of big hits is cleared to 0 (t124). Thereafter, the first special game state is started with the end of the special figure change display game that becomes a big hit, and the display of the continuous number display section 96 is started. In this case, since the gaming state when the big hit is derived is the normal gaming state ST1, the value of the continuous number display section 96 is set to 1, and the player can recognize that the big hit is derived in the normal gaming state ST1. And

  In addition, the display device 41 performs the effect shown in FIG. 91. Since the effect is in the normal mode with the end of the special figure variable display game that has won the falling lottery, the display device 41 shifts to the normal game state ST1. Can be grasped. In this example, the value of the continuous number display section 96 in FIG.

  In the effect state 2, with the start of the special figure change display game that has won the falling lottery (t122), the small hit RUSH effect ends, the normal mode effect is set, and the second specific effect is executed. After the end of the special figure change display game that has won the falling lottery (t124), the third specific effect is performed until the end of the special figure change display game that becomes a big hit (t126), and then the first special game state is set. By setting the normal mode effect in this way, it is possible to clearly indicate that the jackpot has been derived in the normal game state ST1, and the player questions the destination of the game state after the end of the special game state. It can be prevented from having. In addition, by shifting to the normal mode effect without executing the first specific effect, it is possible to suggest to the player that the situation is different from the normal state, and it is possible to increase a sense of expectation.

  In the continuous number display section 96, the display is terminated along with the transition to the normal game state ST1, and the number of big hits is cleared to 0 (t122). Thereafter, the first special game state is started with the end of the special figure change display game that becomes a big hit, and the display of the continuous number display section 96 is started. In this case, since the gaming state when the big hit is derived is the normal gaming state ST1, the value of the continuous number display section 96 is set to 1, and the player can recognize that the big hit is derived in the normal gaming state ST1. And Note that when the small hit RUSH effect is ended and the normal mode effect is set, a result display at the time of the end of the small hit RUSH effect as shown in FIG. 91 (d) may be performed. Further, effects such as those shown in FIGS. 91 (e) to 91 (h) may be performed.

  Further, with respect to the state in which the game progresses, the display of the first game state display unit 56, and the notification of the right-handed instruction, both of the effect states 1 and 2 are selected in the drop lottery and the state is shifted to the normal game state ST1 ( At t121), the state in which the game proceeds in a right-handed game is ended, the first game state display unit 56 is turned off, and the right-handed instruction notification is ended. That is, in the fourth specific game state ST5, when the special figure change display game that wins the falling lottery and the big hit is executed, along with the start of the special figure change display game that wins the fall lottery, The right-handed game is terminated and the right-handed instruction notification is ended.

  It should be noted that the right-handed game progress may be maintained and the right-handed instruction notification may be maintained until the end of the special figure change display game (t124) that has won the falling lottery. From the execution of the variable display game to the derivation of the special result (t126), the state in which the game proceeds with right-handing may be maintained, and the right-hand instruction notification may be maintained.

  FIG. 97 (b) shows an example of an effect state in which the fluctuating time of the special figure 1 variable display game which has a bigger hit than the fluctuating time of the special figure 2 fluctuating display game which has won the falling lottery ends earlier. . This is basically the same as the case of the second modification shown in FIG. 92 (b), except that the effect state and the display content of the continuous number display section 96 are the same as those of the second modification shown in FIG. 92 (b). And different.

  With the start of the special figure 2 variable display game, the probability state shifts to the low probability state, and the gaming state becomes the normal gaming state ST1. At this point, it is known that the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable display game that is a big hit in the gaming machine ends earlier than the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game that has won the falling lottery. In this case, at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game that has won the falling lottery, the normal mode effect is selected, and it is selected not to perform the first specific effect indicating or notifying that the falling lottery has been won. A specific production is performed.

  In addition, in the continuous number display section 96, the display is terminated along with the transition to the normal game state ST1, and the number of big hits is cleared to 0 (t132). Thereafter, the first special game state is started with the end of the special figure change display game that becomes a big hit, and the display of the continuous number display section 96 is started. In this case, since the gaming state when the big hit is derived is the normal gaming state ST1, the value of the continuous number display section 96 is set to 1, and the player can recognize that the big hit is derived in the normal gaming state ST1. And Note that when the small hit RUSH effect is ended and the normal mode effect is set, a result display at the time of the end of the small hit RUSH effect as shown in FIG. 91 (d) may be performed. Further, effects such as those shown in FIGS. 91 (e) to 91 (h) may be performed.

  In addition, the state of the progress of the game, the display of the first game state display unit 56, and the notification of the right-handed instruction are described in connection with the fact that the player has won the drop lottery and has transitioned to the normal game state ST1 (t132). The progressing state ends, the first game state display unit 56 turns off, and the right-hand instruction notification ends. That is, in the fourth specific game state ST5, when the special figure change display game that wins the falling lottery and the big hit is executed, along with the start of the special figure change display game that wins the fall lottery, The right-handed game is terminated and the right-handed instruction notification is ended.

  Note that if the special figure change display game that has won the falling lottery is started within a predetermined period before the end of the special figure change display game in which the special figure change display game ends, and the normal mode effect cannot be displayed for a sufficient time, the special figure change In the stop time of the figure change display game, it may be notified that the player has won the falling lottery.

  In addition, in order to show that the big hit after winning the falling lottery is the big hit in the normal gaming state ST1, the normal mode effect is set. However, the player can recognize that the big hit in the normal gaming state ST1 is the big hit. And it is not limited to the normal mode effect. For example, the normal game state ST1 may be indicated only by performing an additional effect such as the second specific effect or the third specific effect without setting the normal mode effect, or may be indicated by voice. May be indicated. In addition, the position where the operable accessory stays in the specific game state and the normal game state ST1 is set to be different from each other, and the accessory is returned to the position of the normal game state ST1 so as to return to the normal game state ST1. You may make it show that there is.

  Also, during a specific game state or a special game state that is a specific period, a game proceeds with right-handed play, and in a normal game state ST1 that is not a specific period, a game proceeds with left-handed play. It is also possible to indicate that it has returned to the normal game state ST1. In particular, in the case shown in FIGS. 96 and 97, when returning to the normal gaming state ST1, the instruction display for instructing left-handing is emphasized and displayed, so that the player can be more strongly recognized.

  In addition, the description has been given of the handover of the display of the continuous count display unit 96 at the end of the specific period due to the end of the fourth specific game state ST5. However, the first specific game state ST2, the second specific game state ST3, and the third specific game state are described. Similarly, at the end of the specific period due to the end of ST4, the transition to the normal game state ST1 may be clearly indicated. Further, the change time of the special figure change display game in which the first specific game state ST2, the second specific game state ST3, and the third specific game state ST4 are ended is a big hit started in the normal game state ST1. The change time may be shorter than the change time of the special figure change display game.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, it is determined whether or not to enter the high probability state according to the symbol of the special result, but depending on whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area in the special game state. It may be determined whether or not to enter the high probability state.

[Fourth Modification]
Next, a fourth modification of the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment will be described. Basically, the gaming machine has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment. Hereinafter, portions having the same configuration will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. explain. The gaming machine of the present modified example can indicate the result of the special figure variable display game by the effect execution mode.

  FIG. 98 shows an execution mode and a selection ratio for SP1 reach A in SP1 reach. The SP1 reach includes SP1 reach A and SP1 reach B, and is selected at a predetermined ratio. Further, as shown in FIG. 98, the SP1 reach A has an out-of-place normal effect, a jackpot normal effect, a discomfort effect A, a discomfort effect B, a discomfort effect C, and a discomfort effect D, which are selected at a predetermined ratio. ing. As shown in FIG. 98 (b), when the result is out of order, only the out-of-box normal effect is selected. Further, when the result is a big hit as shown in FIG. 98 (c), an effect other than the normal effect is selected.

  SP1 reach A and SP1 reach B have significantly different production contents, for example, productions with different production stories. In addition, the out-of-place normal production, the jackpot regular production, the discomfort production A, the discomfort production B, the discomfort production C, and the discomfort production D included in the SP1 reach A have similar production switching timings and production contents. The production switching timing is the same, or the production of the same story is performed, but the timing of the change, the execution period, and the characters appearing are slightly different.

  As shown in FIG. 98 (a), the normal effect is an N-reach effect that forms a first predetermined effect when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the change of the special figure fluctuation display game, and when a predetermined time elapses, a second predetermined effect ( (Specific production) to develop SP reach A production. Thereafter, the fluctuation display stops as a result of the loss. On the other hand, the jackpot normal production is to perform the effect that derives the jackpot result after executing the same production contents as the outlier normal production. The time until the fluctuation stops is longer than in the normal production.

  These out-of-place normal effects and jackpot normal effects are selected with the highest probability when SP reach A is selected. Therefore, most of the SP reach A ends in the first execution period in which the big hit normal effect is executed. That is, the first effect in which the out-of-place normal effect and the big hit normal effect end in the first execution period is performed. A routine that strongly reminds the player that the content of the effect that is commonly performed in the out-of-game normal performance and the big-hit normal performance is the performance of SP reach A, because the out-of-game normal performance and the big-hit normal performance are repeatedly executed. A state can be formed. In particular, the transition timing from the N-reach production that makes the first predetermined production to the SP reach A production that makes the second predetermined production (specific production) is the same for the normal production and the big success normal production. Can be impressed strongly on the player to form a routine state.

  In the unusual effects A to D, the execution time of the big hit normal effect is the first execution period, but the execution time is longer by the second execution period. That is, the discomfort effects A to D form a second effect that is executed over the first execution period and the second execution period. The timing from the start of the change to the N-reach effect in the uncomfortable effects A to D is the same as the big hit normal effect, but there are differences in other parts. That is, there is a part where the player feels a sense of incompatibility with the production of SP reach A impressed by the player.

  In the discomfort effect A, the development timing to the SP reach A effect that forms the second predetermined effect is the same as the jackpot normal effect, but the period from the development to the SP reach A effect to the stop of the fluctuation is the second execution period. It has been long. The production content of this unusual production A is to execute the common production content in the off-normal production and the big hit normal production, and the fluctuation display continues beyond the stop timing in the off-normal production and big success normal production. This gives the player a sense of discomfort. That is, the timing of shifting to the stop display is different from the normal effect and the big hit normal effect for the discomfort effect A.

  In the discomfort effect B, the development timing to the SP reach A effect forming the second predetermined effect is earlier than the big hit normal effect. In this discomfort effect B, the N-reach state has a short period, so that the player feels discomfort. In addition, after the development to SP Reach A production, the common production contents are performed for the off-normal production and the big hit normal, but the common production for the off-normal production and the big success normal production is only for the early development to the SP reach A production. The fluctuation display is continued even after the effect contents are performed, which also gives the player a sense of discomfort.

  In the discomfort effect C, the development timing to the SP reach A effect forming the second predetermined effect is later than the big hit normal effect. In the discomfort effect C, the player has a discomfort due to the long period of the N-reach state. Also, after the development to SP Reach A production, the common production contents are executed in the off-normal production and the big hit normal, but the execution period of the SP reach A production is longer than the out-of-normal production and big success normal, and the off-normal production In addition, the fluctuation display continues even after the common effect content is performed in the big hit normal effect, thereby giving the player a sense of discomfort. In addition, if the period from the development to the SP reach A production to the suspension of the fluctuation is the same as the big hit normal production, it will be the same as the big hit normal production except that the period of the N-reach state is long, giving the player a sense of incongruity. Can not be detected as a jackpot.

  The discomfort effect D does not develop into the SP reach A effect forming the second predetermined effect, and gives an uncomfortable feeling when the N reach state continues for a long time. Note that the discomfort effect D does not evolve into the SP reach A effect, so it can be said that the discomfort effect D is a discomfort effect for N reach. Here, the fluctuation time is the same as the unusual effects A to C, so that it is included as the unusual effect of SP reach A. However, it may not be included as the unusual effect of SP reach A.

  When SP reach A is selected in the case where the result is out of order as shown in FIG. 98 (b), only the out-of-order normal effect is selected, and the result is a big hit as shown in FIG. 98 (c). When SP reach A is selected, most of the hits are in the normal state of the big hit, and the unnatural effects A to D are selected at a small ratio. As described above, when the SP reach A is selected, the unnatural effects A to D are selected with a lower probability than the normal effect or the big hit normal effect. Therefore, even when SP reach A is achieved, it hardly appears.

  The routine state impressed by the player by performing the out-of-place normal performance and the big-hit normal performance at a high frequency by enabling such uncomfortable effects A to D to be executed with a small probability when a big hit occurs. Can be formed, and by this discomfort state, it is possible to imply that a big hit has occurred.

  In addition, since the contents of the normal effect and the large hit normal effect are the same except for the timing of the fluctuation stop, the player does not know the result until immediately before the timing of the fluctuation stop. On the other hand, in the uncomfortable effects B to D, the point at which the user can feel the difference from the normal effect in the big hit is earlier than the normal effect. Therefore, it is possible to presume that the player will feel a sense of incongruity at an early stage, which will result in a big hit.

  In addition, since the unusual effects A to C execute the same effect contents as the out-of-place normal effect and the big hit normal, the player is less likely to be convinced that the unnatural effect even if he / she feels strange, and may be a big hit. Since the player will be interested in the production with an interest in the game, the interest in the game can be improved.

  FIG. 99 and FIG. 100 show examples of display on the display device 41 in each pattern of SP reach A. As shown in FIG. 99 (a), when a new first start memory is generated in a state where the first special figure change display game which is the main change in the normal game state ST1 is not executed, as shown in FIG. 99 (b). Then, the special figure 1 variable display game is started, and the variable display is started on the first decorative special figure 1 game display section 85a. When a predetermined time elapses from the start of the change of the first special figure change display game, a reach state is reached in which the same identification information is temporarily stopped in the left change display area and the right change display area as shown in FIG. This is an N-reach effect that makes a predetermined effect.

  In this N-reach effect, a state in which the variable information is displayed at high speed in a direction in which the value of the identification information increases in the medium variable display area is continued for a predetermined time, and thereafter, the speed of the variable display is reduced, as shown in FIG. In this state, the identification information of the medium fluctuation display area is displayed in a state of being displayed at a low speed while being clearly visible. The state in which the identification information of the middle fluctuation display area is displayed in a variable manner at a low speed while being clearly visible is at least two pieces of identification information (here, “2”) which is the same as the identification information stopped in the left and right fluctuation display areas. This is performed from the identification information in the foreground (here, “0”). FIG. 99D shows a state in which the same identification information as the identification information stopped in the left and right fluctuation display areas has already passed and the next identification information (here, “3”) has passed.

  In the case of the out-of-place normal production, the big hit normal production, and the uncomfortable production A, as shown in FIG. 99 (d), when the identification information next to the identification information stopped in the left and right variable display areas is passed, As shown in FIG. 99 (e), it develops into the SP reach A effect that forms the second predetermined effect. In the case of the discomfort effect B, the same identification information as the identification information stopped in the left and right fluctuating display areas as shown in FIG. 100A, which is a state before the state shown in FIG. When it is in a state, it develops into SP reach A production.

  In the case of the discomfort effect C, the identification information two points ahead of the identification information stopped in the left and right variable display areas as shown in FIG. 100 (e) which is a state after the state shown in FIG. 99 (d). When the information (here, “4”) is passed, it develops into SP reach A production. In the case of the discomfort effect D, the state in which the medium fluctuation display area is fluctuated at a low speed as shown in FIG. 99 (d) is continued as shown in FIGS. Does not evolve.

  In this way, different development timings to the SP reach A effect cause a sense of incongruity, and it is possible to infer that the player has a big hit. In addition, the value of the identification information passing in the medium fluctuation display area makes it possible to know that the transition timing to the SP reach A effect is different from the normal effect or the big hit normal effect, and it is also visually possible. It is easy to grasp. That is, the transition timing to the second predetermined production in the first production (outlier normal production and the big hit normal production) and the transition timing to the second predetermined production in the second production (here, uncomfortable productions B and C) are as follows. The display position in the variable display area where the same identification information as the temporarily stopped identification information is displayed is changed. Of course, the same identification information as the identification information temporarily stopped in the transition timing to the second predetermined production in the first production and the transition timing to the second predetermined production in the second production so that it is visually difficult to determine. The display position in the variable display area where the variable display is performed may be the same.

  After performing the SP reach A effect as shown in FIG. 99 (e) for a predetermined period of time, in the case of the out-of-place normal effect, as shown in FIG. In the case of the jackpot normal effect, the SP reach A effect continues for a longer time than the outlier normal effect, and the variable display stops in the special result mode as shown in FIG. 99 (g).

  In the case of the unusual effect A, the SP reach A effect continues longer than the big hit normal effect as shown in FIG. 99 (h), and the variable display stops in the special result mode as shown in FIG. 99 (i). . In the case of the discomfort effect B shown in FIGS. 100 (a) to 100 (d) and in the case of the discomfort effect C shown in FIGS. 100 (e) to 100 (h), as in the case of the discomfort effect A, the SP reach A effect is larger than the big hit normal effect. For a long time, and the variable display stops in the special result mode. Also, in the case of the unusual effect D shown in FIGS. 100 (i) to 100 (m), the fluctuation display is stopped in the special result mode after a longer fluctuation time than the big hit normal effect. As described above, in the discomfort effects A to D, the timing of transition to the SP reach A effect and the timing of the fluctuation stop are different from the normal effect and the big hit normal effect, and give a sense of incongruity to the player and imply that it is a big hit. can do.

  In this modified example, the selection probability of the big hit normal effect is set to be 10 times or more higher than the selection probabilities of the uncomfortable effects A to D, and in the case of a miss, the normal effect is selected with a predetermined probability. In this way, the selection probability of the uncomfortable effects A to D is deviated from the selection probability of the unusual effects A to D because the normal effect and the big hit normal selection probability are sufficiently large. You can give a sense of incongruity.

  As for the selection probabilities of the unnatural effects A to D with respect to the probability that the out-of-place normal performance and the big hit normal performance are selected, if there is a difference of at least twice or more, a difference is generated in the selection opportunity, so that an effect of giving a sense of incongruity is produced. Conversely, if there is a difference of 30 times or more, the effect of giving an uncomfortable feeling is enhanced, but the chance of selecting the unnatural feelings A to D is extremely reduced. Therefore, it is most effective that there is a difference of about 10 to 30 times. Of course, even if there is a difference of 2 to 10 times or 30 times or more, the effect is produced.

  In the above example, SP1 reach A has been described, but SP1 reach B may also include a plurality of types of patterns. Similarly, SP2 reach and SP3 reach include A and B, and these may further include a plurality of types of patterns. Similarly, a plurality of types of patterns may be included in N reach.

  In addition, when the result is a big hit, it is possible to select a big hit normal effect or a strange feeling effect A to D. However, the fluctuation time is different between the case where the big hit normal effect is performed and the case where the strange feeling effect A to D is executed. Because of the difference, it can be said that the game control device 100 selects which of the jackpot normal effect and the uncomfortable effect A to D is performed. Which of the discomfort effects A to D is selected can be executed only by the effect control device 300. Of course, the fluctuation time of the big hit normal production and the uncomfortable productions A to D may be the same fluctuation time, and in this case, it is possible to arbitrarily select the large hit normal production and the uncomfortable productions A to D only in the production control device 300. Is possible, and the degree of freedom of selection can be increased.

  That is, the effect control device 300 constitutes effect control means capable of executing an effect in connection with a game, and executes the first effect (normal out-of-game effect and the normal big hit effect) and the second effect (discomfort effects A to D). A possible effect execution means. In addition, the game control device 100 or the effect control device 300 forms an effect selection unit that can select the first effect or the second effect. Depending on the setting of the fluctuation time of the big hit normal production and the uncomfortable productions A to D, it is also possible to configure the production selection means only with the production control device 300.

  In addition, although the discomfort is caused by changing the transition timing to the SP reach A production which forms the second predetermined production, the discomfort may be generated by the difference in the transition timing to the other productions. For example, the transition timing to the first predetermined effect may be made different for each effect pattern to cause a sense of incongruity. Further, when shifting from the second predetermined effect to the third predetermined effect, the shift timing may be made different to cause a sense of incongruity. That is, in a plurality of effect patterns in which a plurality of effects are shifted in a predetermined order as the same effect content, one or a plurality of shift timings may be changed to cause a sense of incongruity.

  In addition, the transition timing is made different based on the start timing of the game, but a reference time set at an arbitrary timing in the game which is not limited to the start of fluctuation (a timing which is not common to each effect pattern may be provided) is provided. The transition timing of the effect as viewed from the reference time may be made different. At this reference time, a specific effect may be performed to indicate to the player that the time is the reference time, and the difference in the transition timing of the effect seen from the reference time may be easily grasped by the player.

  FIG. 101 and FIG. 102 show another example of the discomfort effect. FIG. 101 shows an execution mode and a selection ratio for SP1 reach A in SP1 reach. In this example, there are outlier normal effects, big hit normal effects, discomfort effects A, discomfort effects B, and discomfort effects C, which are selected at a predetermined ratio. As shown in FIG. 101 (b), when the result is out of order, only the out-of-box normal effect is selected. In addition, as shown in FIG. 101 (c), when the result is a big hit, an effect other than the normal effect is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 101 (a), the normal effect becomes an N-reach effect after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the change of the special figure fluctuation display game, and develops into an SP reach A effect after a lapse of the predetermined time. Thereafter, the fluctuation display stops as a result of the loss. On the other hand, the jackpot normal production and the uncomfortable productions A to C perform the production of deriving the jackpot result after executing the common production content with the off-normal presentation, and the production of deriving the jackpot result. Is performed, the time required for the fluctuation stop to be longer than that of the normal effect is longer.

  In the first execution period, which is a period from the start of the change to the start of the N-reach effect, the effect in which the character A appears can be executed. In the outlier normal performance and the big hit normal performance, the character A appears as a specific performance at a predetermined timing after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the change, whereas in the discomfort performance A, the specific performance is performed at a timing earlier than the predetermined timing. The character A appears as a specific effect at a timing later than the predetermined timing in the discomfort effect B. The character A does not appear in the discomfort effect C. That is, the specific effect is not executed.

  The outlier normal effect and the big hit normal effect are selected with the highest probability when SP reach A is selected. By performing these outlier normal effects and jackpot normal effects repeatedly, a routine state that strongly impresses that the effect content commonly executed in the outlier normal effects and jackpot normal effects is the SP Reach A effect is formed. can do. In particular, by strongly impressing the timing at which the character A appears as the specific effect, the routine state impressed when the unnatural effects A to C, which are selected with a lower probability than the normal effect or the big hit normal effect, is selected. Can be formed, and by this discomfort state, it is possible to imply that a big hit has occurred.

  The out-of-game normal performance and the big hit normal performance are the same performance except that the timing of the fluctuation stop is different, so that the player does not know the result until immediately before the timing of the fluctuation stop. On the other hand, in the discomfort effects A to C, the point at which the difference from the normal operation with the big hit can be felt earlier than the normal operation with the big hit. Therefore, it becomes possible to guess that the player will feel a sense of discomfort and will be a big hit. Further, in the unnatural effects A to C, only the timing of the effect in which the character A forming the specific effect appears is different and the other effects are the same, so that the player may feel uncomfortable in the first execution period. It is difficult to be convinced that the production is uncomfortable, and the player will pay attention to the production with an interest that it may be a big hit, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

  FIG. 102 shows an example of display on the display device 41 in each pattern of SP reach A. FIGS. 102 (a) to 102 (e) show examples of the display in the out-of-box normal effect and the big hit normal effect. As shown in FIG. 102 (a), when a new first start memory is generated in a state where the first special figure change display game which is the main change in the normal game state ST1 is not executed, the special figure 1 change display game starts. Then, the variable display is started on the first decorative special figure 1 game display section 85a.

  In the outlier normal effect and the big hit normal effect, an effect simulating a shooting star is performed as shown in FIG. 102 (b) after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the change of the first special figure change display game, and thereafter, FIG. 102 (c). As shown in the figure, a specific effect in which a character A imitating a star appears is performed. Then, after the specific effect in which the character A appears as shown in FIG. 102 (d) is completed, the same identification information is temporarily stopped in the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area as shown in FIG. 102 (a). It becomes a state and becomes N reach production. After that, it develops into SP reach effect A, and the result mode is derived.

  FIGS. 102 (f) to (j) show an example of display in the discomfort effect A. As shown in FIG. 102 (f), when a new first start memory is generated in a state where the first special figure change display game which is the main change in the normal game state ST1 is not executed, the special figure 1 change display game starts. Then, the variable display is started on the first decorative special figure 1 game display section 85a.

  In the unusual effect A, the effect in which the character A appears as shown in FIG. 102 (g) is performed at the timing when the effect imitating a shooting star as shown in FIG. Will be Therefore, an effect imitating a shooting star as shown in FIG. 102 (b) is not performed. As described above, since the timing of the specific effect in which the character A appears is early and the effect imitating a shooting star is not executed, the player feels a sense of discomfort. Also, as shown in FIGS. 102 (h) to (j), after the specific effect in which the character A appears, the same identification information is temporarily stopped in the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area, and the reach state is reached. You will feel uncomfortable also because the time until the production is long.

  Although the description of the unusual effect B is omitted, the effect is not performed at the timing when the effect imitating a shooting star as shown in FIG. 102 (b) is performed in the outlier normal effect and the big hit normal effect, and FIG. As shown, an effect simulating a shooting star is performed at the timing when the specific effect in which the character A appears is performed. Then, in the outlier normal effect and the big hit normal effect, a specific effect in which the character A appears at the timing when the specific effect in which the character A appears as shown in FIG. In this way, the start of the specific effect is delayed, so that the user feels strange. In addition, a short period of time from the end of the effect in which the character A appears to the time when the character A reaches the reach state causes a feeling of strangeness.

  In the discomfort effect C, as shown in FIG. 102 (l), an effect simulating a shooting star is performed at the same timing as the off-normal effect and the big hit normal effect. However, after that, a specific effect in which the character A appears is not performed, and the character A enters the reach state. In this way, the effect in which the character A appears does not occur, so that the player feels strange.

  In this example, the sense of incongruity is generated in the period from the start of the fluctuation to the N-reach state, but may be performed in other periods. In addition, it may be combined with the examples shown in FIGS.

  In addition, the execution timing of the effect in which the character A forming the specific effect appears is made different based on the start timing of the game, but is common in the common effect executed in common from the start of the change to the N-reach effect. It can also be said that the execution timing of the specific effect based on the start of the effect is different. Therefore, a predetermined common effect is executed at an arbitrary timing (a timing that is not common to each effect pattern) in a game that is not limited to the start of fluctuation, and the timing of executing a specific effect among the common effects is determined. Different things can cause a sense of incongruity. In this case, it is possible to cause a sense of incongruity due to the interval from the start of the common effect to the start of the specific effect, or the interval from the end of the specific effect to the end of the common effect.

  Further, the difference in the effect for forming the uncomfortable state is not limited to the execution timing as described above. For example, as shown in FIG. 103, a star character A having six corners may be replaced with a star character B having seven corners. . Further, the uncomfortable state may be formed by using a difference in execution timing between the voice, the display, and the LED, such as a difference in the synchronization timing of the voice, the display, and the LED. Further, the discomfort state may be formed by using the color of the display or the LED, the reproduction speed of the sound, the difference of the pitch, and the like.

  Further, in the present modified example, the effect of giving a sense of incongruity between one game and another game has been described, but an incompatibility may be given in one game. For example, a so-called pseudo-mode in which a plurality of pieces of identification information are variably displayed for a predetermined period of time in a decorative special-figure variable display game in the middle of a special figure variable display game, and then a unit variation display for temporarily stopping is performed two or more times to derive a result mode. In the case of performing the continuous variation display mode, the effect selected in each unit variation display may give a sense of incongruity. In this case, the first effect or the second effect can be executed in the unit variation display, and the selection probability of the first effect is made higher than the selection probability of the second effect (for example, 10 times or more). The first effect and the second effect execute common effect contents, but the execution timing of the effect is different. Then, by making the second effect selectable only when the result of the special figure change display game is a big hit, the occurrence of the big hit can be implied by the sense of incongruity caused by the execution of the second effect.

  In addition, the selectable discomfort effects can be made different depending on the type of the derived special result, or the selection probabilities of each discomfort effect can be different, so that a big hit can be suggested and a big hit type can be suggested. You may do it. Further, based on the information of the RTC 338, different selectable effects may be selected according to the date and time, or the selection probability of each different effect may be changed. In addition, it may be possible to store and display an effect that has appeared as game history information, so that it can be confirmed by the history information that the effect is uncomfortable.

  Also, by operating the operation means provided in the gaming machine, the derivation probability of the special result can be selected and set from a plurality of types of probability setting values. Or by making the selection probabilities of the uncomfortable feelings different from each other, it is also possible to make it possible to imply that it is a big hit and to imply a probability set value.

  In addition, an auxiliary display may be provided to make it easier for the player to understand that the effect is an unnatural effect. In the above example, the value of the identification information in the medium fluctuation display area also functions as the auxiliary display, but another auxiliary display may be performed. For example, a timer for displaying the time may be displayed so that the development timing to the SP reach A effect can be confirmed by the timer display. The value displayed on the timer may be a value obtained by adding the elapsed time from a certain reference point such as the start of fluctuation, or a value obtained by subtracting the remaining time from the certain reference point.

  Further, although an unusual effect is performed as an effect for the running special figure change display game, an unnatural effect may be performed in other effects. For example, in a look-ahead effect that notifies a preliminary determination result about a start memory, a sense of incongruity is performed in which a start memory having a high degree of expectation, such as a start memory that becomes a big hit or a start memory that becomes an SP reach, is different from a usual look-ahead effect. You may do it. As a sense of incongruity in the pre-reading effect, a display that is selected with a very low probability is provided in the display of the decoration special figure start storage display of the first storage display unit 83a, or a selection with a very low probability is performed as a change process. Or a process to be done.

  As described above, in a gaming machine including an effect control unit (effect control device 300) capable of executing an effect related to a game, the effect control unit performs the first predetermined effect (SP reach A) in the first execution period. ) Which can execute the first effect (the normal effect and the normal effect of the big hit) and the second effect (the discomfort effects A to D) which can execute the first effect or the second effect. Effect selection means (effect control device 300) capable of selecting an effect, wherein the effect selection means performs the first predetermined effect when the first predetermined effect is executed when the result of the game is lost. (See FIG. 98 (b)). In the case where the first effect is selectable to be executed and the first predetermined effect is executed when a result of the game is won, a second ratio is set. (Actual effect of the jackpot normal effect shown in FIG. 98 (c)) Ratio) or the third effect (the execution ratio of the uncomfortable effects A to D in FIG. 98 (c)) can be selected so as to execute the second effect. When executing the first predetermined effect, the first effect is repeatedly executed in the first execution period to form a routine state, and when the result of the game is a hit, the first predetermined effect is performed. When executing, by performing the second effect in the first execution period, it is possible to form a discomfort state that deviates from the routine state.

  Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In this pachinko machine, a plurality of pieces of identification information (symbols, symbols, etc.) displayed on the variable display device provided in the game area based on the fact that a game ball wins in the starting port provided in the game area (start winning). ) Is started, and when the mode of the plurality of pieces of identification information stopped after the lapse of a predetermined time is a predetermined special result mode, a special payout of paying out many prize balls to the player is performed. There is a game state (for example, JP-A-2017-121302). In such a conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the effect becomes monotonous by performing the game for a long time, and the interest of the game does not increase. According to the above invention, it is possible to perform a variety of unprecedented effects, such as being able to suggest a result by deviating from a routine state formed by performing a game for a certain period of time, and to enhance the interest of the game. Can be.

  Further, when the first predetermined effect is executed when the result of the game is out of order, the effect executing means repeatedly executes the first effect in the first execution period to form a routine state. When the first predetermined effect is executed when the result of the game is a hit, by executing the second effect in the first execution period, it is possible to form a discomfort state that deviates from the routine state It will be.

  Further, the effect execution means forms a routine state by repeatedly executing the first effect in the first execution period when executing the first predetermined effect when a result of the game is a hit. When the first predetermined effect is executed when the result of the game is a hit, by executing the second effect in the first execution period, it is possible to form a discomfort state that deviates from the routine state It will be.

  Further, when executing the first predetermined effect, the effect execution means forms a routine state by repeatedly executing the first effect in the first execution period, and when the result of the game is a hit. When the first predetermined effect is executed, the first predetermined effect is executed in the first execution period, and the first predetermined effect is continued in the second execution period following the first execution period. By executing, a discomfort state deviating from the routine state can be formed.

  Further, when the first predetermined effect is executed when the result of the game is out of order, the effect executing means repeatedly executes the first effect in the first execution period to form a routine state. When the first predetermined effect is executed when the result of the game is a hit, the first predetermined effect is executed in the first execution period, and in the second execution period following the first execution period, By continuously executing the first predetermined effect in this manner, it is possible to form a discomfort state that deviates from the routine state.

  Further, the effect execution means forms a routine state by repeatedly executing the first effect in the first execution period when executing the first predetermined effect when a result of the game is a hit. When the first predetermined effect is executed when the result of the game is a hit, the first predetermined effect is executed in the first execution period, and in the second execution period following the first execution period, By continuously executing the first predetermined effect in this manner, it is possible to form a discomfort state that deviates from the routine state.

  Further, the game area 32 is provided with a game area 32 in which the game ball can flow down, and the game ball is awarded to a start winning port (a first start port 36, a normal fluctuation winning device 37, a second start port 97) provided in the game area 32. Effect control means (effect control device) capable of executing an effect related to a game in a gaming machine which generates a state advantageous to a player when a result of the game is a special result based on the game. 300), wherein the effect control means can select and execute one effect pattern from among a plurality of effect patterns for executing a specific effect as the same effect content. Is a first effect, and one or more second effects different in execution timing of the specific effect from the first effect, and the first effect is selected when the result of the game is the special result. Probability So that the serial was higher than the selection probability of the second performance. Therefore, the game can be prevented from being monotonous, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. Note that the specific effect may be an effect that starts after shifting, such as the SP reach A effect illustrated in FIG. 98, or may be an effect in which a specific character appears as illustrated in FIG.

  The effect control means selects only the first effect when the result of the game does not become the special result, and selects the first effect or the second effect when the result of the game becomes the special result. The effect is selected, and when the second effect is executed, the player is caused to feel uncomfortable.

  In addition, the effect control means causes the start timing of the specific effect with respect to the start timing of the game to be different between the first effect and the second effect. Therefore, the player can grasp the second effect by observing the execution timing of the specific effect based on the start timing of the game.

  The effect control means is configured to execute the specific effect during execution of a common effect that is commonly executed in the first effect and the second effect, and the specific effect with respect to a start timing of the common effect. Is different between the first effect and the second effect. Therefore, the player can grasp the second effect by observing the execution timing of the specific effect based on the start timing of the common effect. The start timing of the common effect does not necessarily have to be a fixed timing from the start timing of the game.

  Further, the game area 32 is provided with a game area 32 in which the game ball can flow down, and the game ball is awarded to a start winning port (a first start port 36, a normal fluctuation winning device 37, a second start port 97) provided in the game area 32. Effect control means (effect control device) capable of executing an effect related to a game in a gaming machine which generates a state advantageous to a player when a result of the game is a special result based on the game. 300), wherein the effect control means includes, as the same effect content, a plurality of effect patterns for sequentially executing a first predetermined effect and a second predetermined effect started after the first predetermined effect. It is possible to select and execute one effect pattern from among the plurality of effect patterns, wherein the plurality of effect patterns include a first effect and one or more of the first effect different in transition timing to the second predetermined effect. The second production , So that the said game result the selection probability of the first effect when a special result above to be higher than the selection probability of the second effect. Therefore, the game can be prevented from being monotonous, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  A display device 41 controlled by the effect control means and capable of displaying a variable display game that variably displays a plurality of pieces of identification information in a plurality of variable display areas corresponding to the game; At the transition timing to the second predetermined effect, the identification information temporarily stops in some of the variable display areas, and the remaining variable display areas are in a state where the identification information is variably displayed in a distinguishable state. In the transition timing to the second predetermined production in the first production and the transition timing to the second predetermined production in the second production, the variable display of the same identification information as the temporarily stopped identification information is performed. That is, the display position in the variable display area is different. Therefore, the player can grasp that the second effect is based on the positional relationship of the identification information.

[Fifth Modification]
Next, a fifth modification of the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment will be described. Basically, the gaming machine has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment. Hereinafter, portions having the same configuration will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. explain. The gaming machine of the present modification differs in the transition of the gaming state.

  In the gaming machine of the present modified example, the falling lottery is not performed. That is, the fall lottery process (step Y239) in the special figure 1 change start process shown in FIG. 41 and the fall lottery process (step Y259) in the special figure 2 change start process shown in FIG. 42 are not performed. Therefore, in the case of the high probability state, the high probability state is continued until the next derivation of the first special result. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 104, the transition of the game state by winning the falling lottery is not set, and the fifth specific game state ST6 is not set.

  Further, in this modification, the third specific game state ST4 is not set, and stays in the first specific game state ST2 until the start of the special figure change display game in which the result is a big hit (first special result). The game shifts to the fourth specific game state ST5 based on the start of the special figure variable display game in which the result is a big hit in the first specific game state ST2. Then, in the fourth specific game state ST5, when the probability change big hit is derived, the special game state is shifted to the first specific game state ST2, and when the normal big hit is derived, the special game state is changed to the second specific game state. The process proceeds to ST3.

  The variation pattern selected in the gaming machine of the present modified example is basically the variation pattern shown in FIGS. However, the change pattern in FIG. 28B is selectable only in the second specific game state ST3, and the change pattern in FIG. 28C is selectable only in the first specific game state ST2. Thereby, when the special figure 1 variable display game in which the result is a big hit in the first specific game state ST2 is started, a very long fluctuation time is set, and a sufficient time after the transition to the fourth specific game state ST5 is set. Can be secured, and an opportunity to acquire a prize ball by a small hit (second special result) of the special figure 2 variable display game can be secured.

  As described above, by not performing the falling lottery, it is possible to prevent the transition to the low probability state (transition to the fifth specific game state ST6) in the fourth specific game state ST5. That is, in the case of a probability change big hit, the next big hit is guaranteed. In addition, when the special figure 1 variable display game that generates the next big hit is started, the game shifts to the fourth specific game state ST5, so that the profit is provided by the frequent occurrence of the small hit over the period until the big hit is derived. Is done.

  Thereby, if the probability change big hit is derived, the number of prize balls obtainable in the special game state based on the probability change big hit, the number of prize balls obtainable by the frequent occurrence of the small hit in the fourth specific game state ST5, It is determined that a profit can be obtained in combination with the number of prize balls obtainable in the special game state based on the next big hit, and the state can be made extremely interesting. In particular, for a period from the start of the fourth specific game state ST5 to the end of the subsequent special game state, a series of effects are executed, or the number of awarded balls acquired is notified to notify the above. The period can be shown as an integrated advantageous state in which the number of prize balls that cannot be obtained only in the special game state is provided, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, in the first embodiment, as one of the conditions for shifting to the fourth specific game state ST5, even if the special figure change display game is executed a specified number of times (for example, 100 times) in the first specific game state ST2, a drop lottery It is necessary to shift to the third specific game state ST4 without winning. However, in the present modification, the falling lottery is not performed, and the first specific game state ST2 is set to stay until the start of the special figure 1 variable display game in which the result is a big hit. Is reduced, and the profit in the fourth specific gaming state ST5 can be obtained easily and reliably.

  In addition, even when the special figure variation display game in which the result is a big hit is started in the second specific game state ST3, a long variation time is set as in the case of the first specific game state ST2, and the fourth specific game state is set. The process may shift to ST5. Further, in the first modified example, the selection of the variable time of the special figure variable display game which is a big hit according to the stay period of the third specific game state is made different, but this is applied to this modified example, and the first specific game is applied. The selection of the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game that becomes a big hit may be made different according to the stay period in the state ST2.

  Further, the first specific effect as shown in the second modified example is performed when the special figure variable display game which is a big hit in the first specific game state ST2 is started, and the process proceeds to the fourth specific game state ST5. May be directed. Further, the first specific effect may be performed as a gaseous effect when a special figure change display game that does not cause a big hit in the first specific game state ST2 is started.

  As described above, the game is provided based on the winning of the game ball into the starting winning opening provided in the game area 32, provided with the game area 32 in which the game ball can flow down, and the result of the game is a special result. In such a case, in a gaming machine generating a state advantageous to the player, a game control means (game control device 100) for controlling the game in a comprehensive manner, a start winning port, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won, An open state, in which the game ball can be easily won, is provided. An ordinary variable winning device 37, which can be converted into an open state, and which can generate a right to execute a game by winning, is provided. Is controlled in one of a first operation state (normal operation state) and a second operation state (time-saving operation state) in which a prize is easier than the first operation state. When the operation state of the is the second operation state , And thus it can be changed to the first operating state based on the game to be a special results start. Therefore, the operating state of the ordinary variable prize device 37 is changed at a timing that has not existed in the past, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, a second start winning opening 97 serving as a start winning opening is provided at a position downstream of the normal variable winning device 37 and at a position where a winning can be achieved via a path that can win the normal variable winning device 37. The control means executes the first game (special figure 1 variable display game) as a game based on the winning of the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37, and executes the game based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening 97. The second game (the special figure 2 variable display game) is executed, the first game and the second game can be executed simultaneously, and the special result includes the same derivation probability in the first game and the second game, The first special result whose derivation probability is set to a low-probability state, a high-probability state higher than the low-probability state, and the same derivation probability for both the low-probability state and the high-probability state Yes, derived at least in the second game And a second special result, which is included in the first operation result when the first game having the first special result is started when the operation state of the ordinary variable prize device 37 is the second operation state. When the result of the second game becomes the second special result during the execution of the first game and the special game state advantageous to the player is executed, the special game state is executed during the execution of the special game state. This means that the first game is interrupted.

  Therefore, by changing to the first operation state, it is possible to flow into the second start winning opening 97 on the downstream side, and the special figure variation display mainly executed when the special figure 1 variation display game which is a big hit is started. The game is switched to the special figure 2 variable display game, so that a new unprecedented playability can be provided, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, since the special figure 2 variable display game can generate a small hit, it is possible to acquire a prize ball by the small hit during a period until the occurrence of the big hit, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  In addition, the game control means sets the first operating state as a variable time for the first game that is the first special result in which the operating state of the normal variable winning device 37 is changed from the second operating state to the first operating state. Thus, it is possible to set a fluctuation time longer than the fluctuation time of the first game without the change to the first game. Therefore, it is possible to sufficiently secure the execution time of the special figure 2 variable display game executed in parallel.

[Sixth Modification]
Next, a sixth variation of the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment will be described. Basically, the gaming machine has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment. Hereinafter, portions having the same configuration will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. explain. The gaming machine of the present modified example is different in the effect execution mode.

  In the gaming machine of this modification, the probability of the first special result can be changed by operating the gaming machine. The game control device 100 is provided with a setting key operation unit and a setting value change button as operation units for selecting from a plurality of probability setting values to which probability values are assigned. By opening the front frame 12 and operating these operation units, the probability value of the first special result can be changed.

  The game control device 100 is provided with a setting key switch that detects an operation of a setting key operation unit that forms a first operation unit of the operation units. The setting key operation unit includes a keyhole into which the setting key is inserted, and is configured to be able to turn the setting key from the first position to the second position (predetermined state) only when the corresponding setting key is inserted. . The setting key switch is a sensor capable of detecting that the switch is turned to the second position, and is turned on when the switch is turned to the second position, and is not turned to the second position. In this case, it is turned off.

  In addition, the game control device 100 is provided with a set value change switch for detecting an operation of a set value change button forming a second operation unit of the operation unit. The set value change button is a push-type button, and the set value change switch is turned on when the set value change button is pressed, and is turned off when the set value change button is not pressed.

  By operating these operation units, it is possible to select a probability set value to which a probability value that is a special result in the special figure variation display game is assigned, and a probability value corresponding to the selected probability set value is determined in a game. Is being used. Here, six settings 1 to 6 are prepared as probability setting values. The probability value assigned to each probability setting value is 1/320 in setting 1, 1/310 in setting 2, 1/300 in setting 3, 1/290 in setting 4, 1/280 in setting 5, and 1/280 in setting 6. 1/270. This probability value is a probability value in the normal probability state, and the probability value in the high probability state is ten times the probability value in the normal probability state.

  When selecting the probability setting value, first, the front frame 12 is opened, and the power of the gaming machine is turned on while the setting key of the setting key operation unit is turned to the second position. Can be changed, and the probability set value can be changed by pressing the set value change button in this probability set value changed state. The selected probability set value is displayed on a probability set value display device provided in the game control device 100.

  When the power is turned on with the setting key of the setting key operation unit being turned to the second position in a state where the front frame 12 is closed, the setting key of the setting key operation unit is turned on after the game machine is turned on. When it is turned to the second position, the probability set value selected at present is displayed on the probability set value display device, but the probability set value cannot be changed.

  The probability setting value display device is a 7-segment display, and displays the probability setting values with numbers 1 to 6. Of course, the display mode is not limited to this, and may be any display mode that can recognize the probability setting value. In addition, a display device of another type such as a liquid crystal display device may be used, or a probability setting value may be indicated by a lighting mode, an emission color, or the like of one or a plurality of LEDs. Also, without providing the probability set value display device, the information of the probability set value may be displayed using a state display device provided for displaying the base value and the accessory ratio calculated in the game control device 100. good. In this case, while the operation relating to the probability set value is being performed (probability set value change state, probability set value confirmation mode, etc.), the information of the probability set value is displayed, and otherwise, the calculated base value and the ratio of the accessory are displayed. Give priority to display.

  In this modification, a set value change button, a set key operation unit, a probability set value display device, and the like are provided in the game control device 100, and the game control device 100 determines the probability value used for the lottery of the special figure change display game. A setting means is provided which enables the assigned probability set value to be selected from a plurality of types of probability set values by operating the operation unit. The function of this setting means may be provided on the setting sub-board and connected to the game control device 100. That is, a setting unit may be provided separately from the game control device 100. In this case, the operation signal of the set value change switch or the set key switch may be input to the game control device 100 to change the probability set value in the game control device 100, or the set value may be changed on the setting sub-board side. The probability set value may be changed and determined based on the operation of the change switch or the setting key switch, and the determined result may be transmitted to the game control device 100.

  Information on the probability set value set by the game control device 100 is transmitted to the effect control device 300. The effect control device 300 can execute an effect that suggests or reports a probability set value based on this information. The effect of suggesting or notifying the probability set value may be of any kind, and may be any of suggesting or notifying the probability set value itself, or the probability set value of 3 or less or 4 or more. A range indicating something may be suggested or reported. The game may be executed as a part of the effect of the special figure change display game, or may be executed independently of the special figure change display game. Further, the probability setting value may be suggested or notified by an effect that causes a sense of incongruity as shown in the fourth modified example. For example, when the probability setting value is 5 or 6, an effect that causes a sense of incongruity is executed. It is made possible, or an effect that causes a sense of incongruity that can be executed differs depending on the probability setting value.

  Further, in the gaming machine of the present modified example, a restriction period for restricting the effect of suggesting or notifying the probability set value according to the execution mode of the special figure change display game is provided. FIG. 105 shows an example of the case where the restriction period is set in the normal gaming state ST1. In the normal game state ST1, the main fluctuation special figure is the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is the main fluctuation, and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is the irregular fluctuation state. On the display device 41, a decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game is executed, and an effect that suggests or reports a probability set value can be executed as one of the effects of the decoration special figure variation display game. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 105, in the state where the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed in the normal gaming state ST1, the special figure 2 variable display game in which the irregular figure changes is started (t152). The special figure 2 variable display game in the normal gaming state ST1 has a long variable time (t152 to t156), and is executed over a period in which the special figure 1 variable display game is executed a plurality of times.

  In this manner, the effect of suggesting or notifying the probability set value is limited by using the period during which the special figure change display game that is irregularly changed is executed as the limit period. This makes it possible to give a penalty to a player who performs a game that does not follow the game method designed for the gaming machine, and to urge the player not to perform such a game.

  As a start condition of the restriction period, a start of a special figure change display game which becomes an irregular change (t152) can be cited. Further, as another start condition, after the special figure fluctuation display game which becomes irregular fluctuation is started during the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game which becomes main fluctuation, the special figure fluctuation display game which becomes the main fluctuation fluctuates. The game may be stopped (t153), the stop time of the special figure change display game as the main change may end, and the special figure change display game may end (t154), or the next main change may be performed. May be started (t154).

  In addition, examples of the end condition of the limit period include the stop of the change of the special figure variable display game which becomes irregular change (t156) and the end of the special figure variable display game in which the stop display time ends (t157). Further, as another termination condition, when the special figure fluctuation display game which becomes irregular fluctuation during the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game which becomes main fluctuation stops or ends, the special figure fluctuation which becomes the main fluctuation is performed. The start of the display game (t155), the stop of the special figure change display game as the main change (t158), or the end of the special figure change display game as the main change (t159) Alternatively, the start of the special figure change display game as the next main change may be started (t159).

  In addition, as a condition for ending the restriction period, the special figure change display game serving as the main change may be executed a predetermined number of times after the start of the special figure change display game causing the irregular change. This predetermined number can be set arbitrarily, but may be a number that is likely to end in a period shorter than the fluctuation time of the irregular fluctuation, or may be a period that is longer than the fluctuation time of the irregular fluctuation. May be higher. If the number of times that it is more likely to end in a period shorter than the fluctuation time of the irregular fluctuation can be prevented from being restricted for a long period of time, and when the player is replaced, the previous player It is possible to prevent a penalty from being applied to a new player due to the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game that is a fluctuation.

  In addition, as a condition for ending the restriction period, during the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game that is irregular fluctuation, when the special figure fluctuation display game that is main fluctuation ends, there is no start memory of the main fluctuation. That is, the special figure change display game that continuously becomes the main change may not be executed. This can prevent a penalty from being applied to a new player when the player is replaced.

  Further, as a start condition of the restriction period, a special figure fluctuation display game in which the irregular fluctuation is performed a predetermined number of times within the predetermined period may be started. This is because, when the irregular fluctuation is performed a plurality of times in a short period of time, the irregular fluctuation may be intentionally performed. Further, it is possible to prevent a penalty from being imposed immediately when the irregular fluctuation is executed unintentionally.

  Of course, the start and end conditions of the limit period may be other than the above conditions, and a plurality of start conditions and end conditions may be provided. Further, during the limited period, an effect for suggesting or notifying the probability set value may not be performed at all, or the execution frequency may be lower than in the case where the limited period is not set. Further, the accuracy of the suggestion may be lower than that in the case where the period is not the limited period.

  In the case of a limited period, a special effect that does not suggest or notify a probability set value may be performed at a timing when an effect that suggests or notifies a probability set value is performed unless the period is a limited period. In this way, the player can be made aware that the opportunity for the effect to suggest or notify the probability set value has been lost by executing the special effect. For example, usually, as an effect that suggests or informs the probability setting value, the probability setting value is suggested or notified by the content of a single picture, and if the period is a limited period, the probability setting value is not suggested or reported as a dedicated effect. Display a single picture.

  In addition, in a predetermined period before and after the transition of the gaming state, the restriction period may not be started even if there is irregular fluctuation. In particular, when there is a change in the game state accompanied by a change in the launch direction of the game ball, or a change in the game state accompanied by a change in the operation state of the normal fluctuation prize device 37, the irregular fluctuation is executed unintentionally. In such a case, a penalty can be prevented from being imposed.

  Also, the limit period may be set when a special figure change display game that is an irregular change is executed in a game state other than the normal game state ST1. Further, in the restriction period, the effect that suggests or notifies the probability set value is limited, but other effects may be limited. For example, the appearance or cut-in effect of a character suggesting a high possibility of a special result may be restricted. In addition, the effect by sound or light emission may be limited. For example, BGM may be stopped, or the volume or the luminance of light emission may be limited to a certain value or less.

  In addition, a restriction may be provided on the fluctuation pattern, such as restricting a specific SP reach effect. In this case, a limit may be provided for the variation pattern selected in the game control device 100, or a limit may be provided for the effect for the variation pattern determined by the game control device 100 set in the effect control device 300. Is also good.

  In addition, with regard to the start memory generated during the restriction period, a so-called look-ahead effect that preliminarily determines information such as a result before the start of the special figure change display game based on the start memory and suggests or notifies the result of the preliminary determination is restricted. You may do it. In this case, the advance determination regarding the start memory may be limited, or the advance determination may be performed but the prefetch effect may be limited. In the case of restricting the prefetch effect, the prefetch effect for the start memory generated before the start of the restriction period may also be restricted. In addition, when the preliminary determination is restricted, the prefetching effect is restricted for the start memory generated during the restricted period even after the restricted period ends. However, in this case, the prior determination may be performed again after the end of the limited period.

  As described above, the game is provided based on the winning of the game ball into the starting winning opening provided in the game area 32, provided with the game area 32 in which the game ball can flow down, and the result of the game is a special result. In such a case, in a gaming machine that generates a state advantageous to the player, control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300) for controlling a game, and a first start winning opening (first starting winning opening) forming a start winning opening. Port 36, a normal variable winning device 37), and a second starting winning port 97 serving as a starting winning port, and the game control means includes a first game as a game based on winning of a game ball in the first starting winning port. Is executed, and the second game is executed as a game based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting winning opening. The first game and the second game can be executed simultaneously, and the first game and the second game are executed in accordance with the game state. Mainly one of the two games Techniques or progresses predetermined and if it is not the main game is being executed, the fact that as a limit on the execution mode of the game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a game from being played by a game method that is not planned in design, and to ensure fairness of the game.

  When the non-main game is being executed, the control means limits the execution of the game effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a game from being played by a game method that is not planned in design, and to ensure fairness of the game.

  The control means includes setting means for selecting a probability set value to which a probability value used for a game lottery is assigned from a plurality of types of probability set values by operating the operation unit, and a non-main game is being executed. In such a case, the execution of the effect that suggests or notifies the probability setting value is limited. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a game from being played by a game method that is not planned in design, and to ensure fairness of the game.

[Seventh modification]
Next, a seventh variation of the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment will be described. Basically, the gaming machine has the same configuration as that of the gaming machine of the above-described fifth modified example. Hereinafter, portions having the same configuration will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. The parts will be described. The gaming machine of the present modification has a different winning port function.

  FIG. 106 shows a game board 30 of this modification. The arrangement of each winning opening is the same as that of the above-described embodiment and the modified example, but in this modified example, the execution right of the special figure 2 variable display game can be acquired by winning the normal variable winning device 37. That is, the right game area 32 is provided with a normal variable winning device 37 and a second starting winning port 97, all of which can acquire the execution right of the special figure 2 variable display game.

  Note that the special figure starting port 2 switch processing (step X508) in the above-described starting port switch monitoring processing (see FIG. 33) basically performs the same processing as the special figure starting port 3 switch processing shown in FIG. In the process in this case, in steps X561 to X564 related to the start-up signal, the process is performed on the start-up signal 2 that outputs information on the number of winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 to a management device outside the gaming machine 10. To

  The normal fluctuation winning device 37 can change the ease of winning the normal fluctuation winning device 37 by the movable member 37b. On the other hand, since the second start winning port 97 does not include a movable member, the ease of winning is not changed. However, since the number of game balls flowing down to the downstream side of the ordinary variable prize apparatus 37 changes due to the operation of the ordinary variable prize apparatus 37, the prize to the second start winning opening 97 depends on the operation state of the ordinary variable prize apparatus 37. It can also be said that the easiness of changing.

  In addition, since the normal fluctuation winning device 37 has a structure in which the winning opening is wide and when the closing is closed, the game ball gathers at the winning opening with the flow path above the winning opening, the game ball can easily flow in when the opening is opened. It has become. On the other hand, the second start winning opening 97 is about the size of a game ball, and a game nail (not shown) is disposed above the second start winning hole 97, so that the game ball is less likely to flow than the normal variable winning device 37. It can be said that That is, the number of game balls to be awarded to the normally-variable winning device 37 which has been opened when a certain number of gaming balls have been fired to the right gaming region 32 is determined by the number of game balls to be awarded with the normally-variable winning device 37 closed. When a certain number of game balls are fired in the game area 32, the number of game balls winning in the second starting winning opening 97 is larger than the number of game balls winning in the second starting winning opening 97. It can be said that there is.

  In addition, since the second starting winning opening 97 is located downstream of the normal variable winning device 37, if there is a game ball that cannot flow to the normal variable winning device 37 and flows down, the game ball is set to the second. It can be picked up at the start winning opening 97. For example, when the opening / closing timing of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 does not match the arrival timing of the game ball, or when the game ball does not flow into the general-purpose starting gate 34 and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is not opened, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is used. May not be able to win. In particular, during the normal power support where it is easy to win a prize to the ordinary variable prize device 37, the game ball does not enter the ordinary variable prize device 37 or the ordinary variable prize device 37 is not opened. As a result, the player may be dissatisfied and lose his will to continue the game.

  However, even in such a case, since the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed by winning the second starting winning opening 97, the occurrence of a period in which the special figure 2 variable display game is not executed is prevented, and the player is dissatisfied. Can be prevented. Further, in addition to the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game by winning the normal variable winning device 37, the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed by winning the second starting winning opening 97. And the game with a sense of speed becomes possible.

  In addition, a general drawing start gate 34 is provided in the general winning opening 35 located below the normal fluctuation winning device 37. When a game ball wins in the general winning opening 35, a general figure changing display game is performed. The execution right can be acquired, and a prize ball can be acquired based on winning in the general winning opening 35. That is, it functions as a general-purpose operating port that can acquire the execution right of the general-purpose change display game by winning. By providing a plurality of general-purpose starting gates 34 in this way, it is possible to prevent the state in which the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is not opened during general-purpose support.

  The number of prize balls (for example, one) paid out by prize in the general prize port 35 serving as the normal operation port is larger than the number of prize balls (for example, three) paid out when prize is received in another general prize port 35. Has been reduced. As a result, it is possible to design so that the general winning opening 35 serving as the general-purpose operating port can be easily won, and the general-purpose variable display game can be executed without interruption, so that the normal-variation winning device 37 does not open during the general-purpose support. Prevents a period from occurring. Of course, the number of prize balls to be paid out by winning a prize in the general prize port 35 serving as a normal operation port may be the same as the number of prize balls to be paid out when another prize port 35 is won.

  Further, since the general winning opening 35 is provided upstream of the second starting winning opening 97, the number of game balls flowing to the second starting winning opening 97 can be reduced, and the winning in the starting winning opening 97 becomes too large. Can not be. Thereby, even if a game ball is fired in the right game area 32 in the game state mainly including the special figure 1 change display game, it is possible to reduce the winning in the second starting winning opening 97, and to execute the irregular change. The frequency can be reduced, and the adverse effect of playing a game that is not planned in the design of the gaming machine can be prevented.

  That is, in the gaming board 30 of the present modification, a plurality of starting winning prize holes that generate the right to execute the special figure 2 variable display game are provided along the flowing path of the game ball, The general winning opening 35 is provided between the two starting winning openings. Further, a plurality of general-purpose starting gates 34 for generating the right to execute the general-purpose change display game along the flow path of the game ball are provided. Further, a plurality of starting winning ports and a general winning port 35 are arranged on the flow path of the game ball reaching the special variable winning device 38.

  FIG. 107 shows the types of big hits in this modification. The big hits in the present modified example include a probable A hit, a probable B hit and a normal hit. The probability-change A jackpot is a high-probability state after the end of the special game state, and is a jackpot in which regular power support for facilitating winning in the ordinary variable winning device 37 continues until the next jackpot. The probability change B big hit is a high probability state after the end of the special game state, and is a big hit in which a small hit RUSH in which it is easy to obtain a prize ball by a small hit continues until the next big hit. The normal jackpot is a normal probability state after the end of the special game state, and is a jackpot in which the normal power support is continued until the special figure change display game is executed 100 times.

  The special figure 2 variable display game includes a big hit in which the number of rounds in the special game state is larger than that of the special figure 1 variable display game, and does not include the probability change A big hit as a big hit type. While the holding ball does not increase during the Puden support, the holding ball tends to increase during the small hit RUSH, and the small hit RUSH is more advantageous for the player. That is, the special figure 2 variable display game can advance the game more advantageously than the special figure 1 variable display game.

  FIG. 108 shows a transition of a game state in this modification. In the gaming machine of the present modification, similarly to the fifth modification, the drop lottery is not performed. That is, the fall lottery process (step Y239) in the special figure 1 change start process shown in FIG. 41 and the fall lottery process (step Y259) in the special figure 2 change start process shown in FIG. 42 are not performed. Therefore, in the case of the high probability state, the high probability state is continued until the next derivation of the first special result. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 108, the transition of the game state by winning the falling lottery is not set, and the fifth specific game state is not set. In this modification, the third specific game state is not set. The variation patterns selected in each game state are basically the variation patterns shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, but portions corresponding to specific game states not set in this modification are excluded.

  The normal game state ST1 is a state in which the special figure probability is low, and there is no Tokuden support for improving the open time per unit time of the ordinary fluctuation winning device 37 to facilitate prize winning. This is a state in which there is no time reduction to shorten the fluctuation time of the figure fluctuation display game. The effect mode that defines the effect mode is a normal mode. The main fluctuation special figure is a special figure 1 fluctuation display game. The main starting area is a first starting winning opening 36, and the shooting direction is left-handed to aim at the first starting winning opening 36. That is, the special figure 1 variable display game is designed to be the main change, and the special figure 2 variable display game is to be the irregular change.

  In the normal game state ST1, a very long fluctuation time is set for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. In addition, since the normal variable winning device 37 is closed and cannot win, and the frequency of winning in the second starting winning opening 97 is not so high, it is not temporally aimed at executing the special figure 2 variable display game. The efficiency is improved, and the player is not selected to execute the special figure 2 variable display game aiming at the small hit in the normal game state ST1.

  The first specific game state ST2 is a game state to which a transition is made after the end of the special game state based on the probability change A big hit. In the first specific gaming state ST2, the special figure probability is a high probability state, and there is a general power support for improving the open time per unit time of the ordinary variable prize winning device 37 to facilitate winning. If there is a public figure support, there is also a time reduction to shorten the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game or the general figure fluctuation display game. In this game state, stay until the next big hit (first special result).

  The effect mode that defines the effect mode is a chance mode. The main fluctuation special figure is a special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the main starting area of which is the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and the shooting direction is right-handed in order to aim at the normal fluctuation winning device 37. That is, the special figure 2 variable display game is designed to be the main change, and the special figure 1 variable display game is to be the irregular change. In the first specific game state ST2, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is shorter than that in the normal game state ST1. 2 It is more advantageous for the player to play the variable display game.

  The special figure 2 variable display game has a higher probability of occurrence of a small hit (second special result) than the special figure 1 variable display game, and small hits frequently occur in the first specific game state ST2. In this state, a prize to the special variable prize winning device 38 can hardly be expected. The special variable prize winning device 38 is located downstream of the normal variable prize winning device 37. However, the winning of the normal variable prize winning device 37 significantly reduces the number of game balls flowing downstream and the structure of the normal variable prize winning device 37. The game ball can easily stay above the winning opening even when it is closed, so that the number of game balls flowing down is reduced. There are few game balls that arrive at the possible timing, and the possibility of winning is low.

  The second specific game state ST3 is a game state to which the game shifts after the end of the special game state based on the normal big hit. This second specific game state ST3 is a state in which the special figure probability is a low probability state, and is the same as the first specific game state ST2 except that the special figure change display game is to be executed 100 times.

  The fourth specific game state ST5 is a game state to which the game shifts after the end of the special game state based on the probability change B jackpot. In the fourth specific game state ST5, the special figure probability is in the high probability state, and there is no ordinary power support for improving the open time per unit time of the ordinary variable prize device 37 to facilitate prize winning. Since there is no general-purpose support, the fluctuation time of the normal-floor fluctuation display game is not shortened, but a time-saving state in which only the fluctuation time of the special-figure fluctuation display game is reduced. In this game state, stay until the next big hit.

  The main fluctuation special figure is a special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the main starting area of which is the second starting opening 97, and the firing direction is right-handed in order to aim at the second starting winning opening 97. That is, it is designed such that the special figure 2 variable display game based on the winning in the second start winning opening 97 is the main fluctuation, and the special figure 1 variable display game is the irregular fluctuation. In the fourth specific game state ST5, small hits occur frequently. The game ball always flows down to the special variable prize winning device 38 because there is no general electric support, and the player's possession ball increases because the special variable prize winning device 38 can be expected to win in the special game state with a small hit. . Since the small hit occurs at a high frequency, the effect mode is a mode called a small hit RUSH.

  In the first specific game state ST2 and the second specific game state ST3, small hits occur frequently as in the fourth specific game state ST5. However, in the first specific game state ST2 and the second specific game state ST3, since there is a general-purpose support, even if a small hit occurs, the normal variable winning device 37 provided upstream of the special variable winning device 38. Most of the game balls win, and the structure is such that the game balls do not flow down to the special variable winning device 38 (game characteristics). Therefore, in the game state of the first specific game state ST2 or the second specific game state ST3, the number of balls held by the player does not increase even if a small hit occurs.

  In other words, in the first specific game state ST2 and the fourth specific game state ST5, the game progresses mainly with the same special figure 2 variable display game, and the game progresses right-handed. It is possible to create a game state in which the playability and the degree of advantage for the player differ depending on the presence or absence of support. As a result, after the end of the special game state, it is possible to make a right-handed game regardless of the type of the big hit, so that the player can easily understand how to proceed the game. Further, after the end of the special game state, the game can be always progressed in the special figure 2 variable display game, and the state can be made advantageous for the player. In particular, since the state in which the game progresses in the special figure 2 variable display game continues during the extended villa, the state can be made very advantageous for the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Although the second start winning port 97 is provided on the downstream side of the normal variable winning device 37, it may be provided on the upstream side. Also in this case, it is preferable that the winning in the second starting winning opening 97 is more difficult than in the normal variable winning device 37. Further, in the above-described first embodiment and other modified examples, as in the present modified example, the ordinary variable winning device 37 may be used as a winning port for generating an execution right of the special figure 2 variable display game.

  As described above, the game is provided based on the winning of the game ball into the starting winning opening provided in the game area 32, provided with the game area 32 in which the game ball can flow down, and the result of the game is a special result. In such a case, a gaming machine that generates a special gaming state advantageous to the player includes a gaming control means (gaming control device 100) for comprehensively controlling the gaming, and the gaming area 32 is provided on one side of the gaming area (left side). A game area) and a game area on the other side (a game area on the right side), and the player adjusts the firing force of the game ball to flow the game ball to either the game area on one side or the game area on the other side. It is configured to be able to select whether or not to play, a first start winning port 36 is provided in one game area as a start winning port, and a start winning port is provided in the other game area, and a closed state in which game balls cannot be won. , Which can be converted to the open state, where it is easy to win game balls. In addition to the prize device 37, a second start prize hole 97 serving as a start prize port on the other side of the game area downstream of the normal variable prize device is provided, and the game control means is provided with a first start prize port. The first game (special figure 1 variable display game) is executed as a game based on the winning of the game ball, and the second game (special game) is performed based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening 97 or the normal variable winning device 37. That is, the variable display game shown in FIG. 2 is executed.

  Therefore, it is possible to provide a game with different tastes by giving a difference between a game by launching a game ball to the game area 32 on one side and a game by launching a game ball to the game area 32 on the other side. Can be improved. That is, in the gaming area 32 on one side, only one first starting winning opening 36 can be won, but in the gaming area 32 on the other side, the normal variable winning device 37 and the second starting winning opening 97 can be won, Different winning opportunities enable games with different tastes.

  In addition, even when the normal fluctuation prize device 37 arrives at the timing of closing when the game ball is fired to the game area 32 on the other side and the normal fluctuation prize device 37 cannot be won, the second start prize on the downstream side is also provided. There is a possibility of being picked up by the mouth 97, and it is possible to have both an expectation of winning in the normal variable winning device 37 and an expectation of winning in the second starting winning opening 97, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be. Further, the operation of the normal variable prize device 37 changes every moment whether the player wins the normal variable prize device 37 or the second starting prize port 97, and simply determines whether or not a prize can be made to the normal variable prize device 37. You can give them a different interest from what they just do.

  The game control means can set one game state from among a plurality of game states, and is configured to shift the game state based on a predetermined shift condition being satisfied. It is determined in advance which one of the first game and the second game is to be played, and the operation state of the ordinary variable prize device 37 is determined according to the game state by a first operation state (normal operation state). It can be set to any one of a second operation state (time saving operation state) in which a prize is easier than the first operation state, and a game state mainly including the second game includes a game state in which the first operation state is set. , A game state to be the second operation state. Therefore, even in a game state mainly based on the same second game, a game having a different taste can be performed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, a special variable prize winning device 38 is provided downstream of the second starting prize port 97 for enabling a prize of a game ball when a special game state occurs. The special result includes a first special result (big hit) and a second special result. The result (small hit) is included, and the game control means determines that the probability that the result of the game will be the first special result is the same probability in the first game and the second game, and the low probability state and the low probability The second special result can be set to any one of a high probability state higher than the state, and the probability that the game result is the second special result is the same regardless of the low probability state and the high probability state. In the gaming state in which the game progresses mainly with the first game, the fluctuation time of the second game is made shorter than in the gaming state in which the game progresses mainly with the first game.

  Therefore, in the game state mainly based on the second game, there is a possibility that a game ball is obtained by the second special result, and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, even in the game state mainly based on the second game, the possibility of acquiring game balls based on the second special result differs depending on the operation state of the ordinary variable prize device 37, so that a game with a different taste can be performed. Can enhance the interest of the people.

  It should be noted that a different response may be made between the case where the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is won and the case where the second starting winning opening 97 is won. For example, the effect control device 300 may perform different effects as an effect to be executed based on the winning of a game ball, depending on whether the normal variable winning device 37 is won or the second start winning opening 97. It is good, and it may be made to produce only at the time of one winning. Further, the selection mode of the effect of the special figure 2 variable display game based on each winning may be different. In addition, the selection mode of the variation pattern may be different between the case where the game control device 100 has won the normal variation winning device 37 and the case where the game has won the second start winning opening 97.

  Also, when a predetermined number of second start memories for suspending the start of the special figure 2 variable display game can be stored, a decorative special figure start memory display to be displayed on the display device 41 corresponding to the second start memory. May be different between the case where the normal winning winning device 37 is won and the case where the second starting winning opening 97 is won. In addition, the look-ahead effect that suggests or informs the pre-determination result of the second start memory may be different in the manner of selecting the effect, the frequency or reliability of the suggestion or notice, or only when one of the winnings is performed. The production may be performed.

[Eighth Modification]
Next, an eighth modification of the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment will be described. Basically, the gaming machine has the same configuration as that of the gaming machine of the above-described seventh modified example. Hereinafter, portions having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted. The parts will be described. The gaming machine of this modification differs in the transition of the gaming state.

  FIG. 109 (a) shows the types of big hits in the gaming machine of this modification. The big hits in this modification include a probable big hit and a normal big hit. The probability change jackpot is a jackpot that becomes a high probability state after the end of the special game state. The normal jackpot is a jackpot that becomes a normal probability state after the end of the special game state. The chance mode is set until the special figure change display game is executed 30 times. In the chance mode, as in the normal game state ST1, the normal probability state and the ordinary power support are not provided, but the effect execution mode is an effect mode different from the normal game state ST1.

  FIG. 109 (b) shows the probability of winning per ordinary figure in the gaming machine of this modification. In the gaming machine of this modification, the probability is constant regardless of the gaming state. Further, the operation state of the ordinary variable prize apparatus 37 is constant regardless of the game state, and there is no general power support that improves the open time per unit time of the ordinary variable prize apparatus 37 to facilitate winning.

  FIG. 109 (c) shows a general-purpose variation pattern in the gaming machine of this modification. There are five general pattern variation patterns, patterns 1 to 5, and one of them is selected based on the result of the general pattern variation display game and the random number variation pattern random number. In the case where the result of the ordinary figure change display game is out of order, any one of the change patterns 1 to 4 having different change times is selected. Since the normal fluctuation prize device 37 is closed during the fluctuation of the normal fluctuation display game, the period during which the normal fluctuation prize device 37 is closed can be made different by making it possible to select a fluctuation pattern having a different fluctuation time. It becomes possible. In addition, when the result of the ordinary figure change display game is a hit, the change pattern 5 is selected. In this fluctuation pattern 5, the fluctuation time is extremely short, and the normal fluctuation prize display game, which is a hit, continues, so that the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 is opened with a short closing time.

  FIG. 110 shows a transition of a gaming state in the gaming machine of the present modification. The normal game state ST1 is a state in which the special figure probability is low, and there is no ordinary power support for improving the open time per unit time of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 to facilitate winning, and the fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game. There is no time to shorten the time. The effect mode that defines the effect mode is a normal mode. The main fluctuation special figure is a special figure 1 fluctuation display game. The main starting area is a first starting winning opening 36, and the shooting direction is left-handed to aim at the first starting winning opening 36. That is, the special figure 1 variable display game is designed to be the main change, and the special figure 2 variable display game is to be the irregular change.

  In the normal game state ST1, a very long fluctuation time is set for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. Therefore, it is inefficient in time to aim at the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game by winning the normal variable winning device 37 or the second starting winning opening 97, and aims at the small winning in the normal gaming state ST1. The execution of the special figure 2 variable display game is not selected by the player.

  In the second specific game state ST3, the special figure probability is the low probability state as in the normal game state ST1, and there is no general power support for improving the opening time per unit time of the ordinary variable prize device 37 to facilitate winning, This is a state in which there is no time reduction to shorten the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game. The effect mode that defines the effect mode is a chance mode in which an effect different from that in the normal game state ST1 is executed, and the game shifts to the normal game state ST1 by executing the special figure change display game 30 times. I have.

  The main fluctuation special figure is a special figure 1 fluctuation display game. The main starting area is a first starting winning opening 36, and the shooting direction is left-handed to aim at the first starting winning opening 36. That is, the special figure 1 variable display game is designed to be the main change, and the special figure 2 variable display game is to be the irregular change. Also in the second specific game state ST3, a very long fluctuation time is set for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. Therefore, it is inefficient in time to aim at the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game by winning the normal variable winning device 37 or the second starting winning opening 97, and aims at the small winning in the normal gaming state ST1. The execution of the special figure 2 variable display game is not selected by the player.

  The first specific game state ST2 is a game state to which a transition is made after the end of the special game state based on the probability change big hit. In the first specific gaming state ST2, the special figure probability is a high probability state, and there is no general power support for improving the open time per unit time of the ordinary variable prize device 37 to facilitate winning. That is, in this modified example, there is no ordinary power support in any game state. Therefore, regardless of the game state, the operation mode of the ordinary variable prize apparatus 37 does not change, and the regular variable prize display game is hit at a constant probability (see FIG. 109 (b)). It is open to the public.

  In the first specific game state ST2, stay until the next big hit (first special result). The main fluctuation special figure is a special figure 2 fluctuation display game, and it is assumed that there is a time reduction to shorten the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game. Therefore, the special figure 2 variable display game in which the occurrence probability of the small hit (the second special result) is higher than that of the special figure 1 variable display game is executed with high frequency, and the small hit occurs frequently. The effect mode that defines the effect mode is a mode called small hit RUSH because small hits occur frequently.

  In the first specific game state ST2, the main starting area is one of the first zone where the normal variable winning device 37 is used and the second zone where the second starting winning port 97 is set depending on the execution mode of the ordinary figure variable display game. When the result of the general figure variable display game is a win, the normal variable winning device 37 is opened. Therefore, during the execution of the general figure variable display game in which the result is a hit, or during the subsequent state of the general figure winning game, the normal variable winning is achieved. The device 37 is the first zone which is the main starting area. In the case where the result of the normal game variable display game in which the result is a success is continuous, the change time of the general game variable display game is short, and the structure of the normal variable winning device 37 makes it easy for the game ball to stay above the winning opening even when closed. Therefore, most of the fired game balls will win the normal variable winning device 37.

  In this modification, since there is no ordinary power support, the time during which the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened in the first specific game state ST2 is a very short time, but since the game ball stays above the movable member 37b. Prizes can be awarded even with a short opening time. In addition, since most of the launched game balls win the normal variable winning device 37, even if the special variable winning device 38 is opened by a small hit, a small number of the game balls reach at a timing at which a winning can be achieved. The chance of acquiring the ball is low.

  On the other hand, if the result of the normal-float display game is not correct, the normal-float display game has a long fluctuating time and the normal fluctuating winning device 37 is closed for a long time. Since the number of game balls that do not win and the game balls flow down to the downstream side of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 increases, the second start winning opening 97 becomes the second zone where the main start area is set. In the case where the normal figure variation display game in which the result is out of order continues, the state in which the main starting area is the second starting winning opening 97 continues. Further, since the launched game balls flow down to the downstream side of the normal variable winning device 37, if the special variable winning device 38 is opened by a small hit, it is possible to win.

  In other words, in the first specific game state ST2, according to the execution mode of the normal figure fluctuation display game, the game figure fluctuation display game is efficiently performed while suppressing the decrease in the holding ball by the large number of game balls winning the normal fluctuation winning device 37. The game progresses while going back and forth between the first zone that can be executed and the second zone where the number of balls can be increased because a prize ball can be acquired by a small hit. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game in the first specific game state ST2 from being changed and becoming a monotonous game, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  In the first mode, the number of held balls tends to decrease, in the second mode, the number of held balls tends to increase, and the number of held balls tends to increase in the entire first specific game state ST2. Of course, the ball holding may be in a decreasing tendency in the entire first specific gaming state ST2, or the ball holding may not be increased or decreased.

  Further, in the present modification, when the result is unsuccessful, the fluctuation time of the normal figure fluctuation display game is lengthened so that the game ball flows down the downstream side of the normal fluctuation winning device 37, Although the possibility of winning is given, the game ball may flow down the downstream side of the normal variable winning device 37 by other methods.

  For example, a variation pattern of a long variation time may be included as the variation time of the general-purpose variation display game in which the result is a hit. In addition, the general figure stoppage time for displaying the result of the general figure change display game, the fanfare time set before opening the normal variable winning apparatus 37 in the state of normal figure winning, and the normal variable winning apparatus 37 in the state of normal figure winning state The ending time or the like set after the completion of all opening may be extended. Further, in the opening pattern of the normal fluctuation winning device 37, a closing time may be provided as an interval time so that the game ball flows down to the downstream side.

  In the case where these times are made longer to flow downstream, the same time may be always set, or these times may be selected by lottery or the like. However, if the probability of selecting a long time that can flow to the downstream side is high, the frequency of winning in the special variable winning device 38 in the second special game state based on the small hit may increase, which may be too advantageous for the player, It is necessary to appropriately set the time and the frequency in consideration of the structure of the game area 32 and the like.

  In addition, a method other than the above-described method is also conceivable. For example, a structure may be adopted in which a certain number of game balls flow down without being won even when the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is open. Further, if a certain number of start memories can be stored for the special figure 2 variable display game, the second start can be performed without waiting for a prize in the second start winning opening 97 when switching from the first zone to the second zone. The special figure 2 variable display game can be immediately executed based on the memory, and the winning of a prize ball due to the occurrence of a small hit can be ensured.

  In addition, the result of the general figure change display game and the general figure change pattern are transmitted to the effect control device 300 at the start of the general figure change display game, and the effect control device 300 determines which of the first zone and the second zone. If it can be grasped, it is possible to execute a corresponding effect. Further, different effects may be performed when a prize is generated in the ordinary variable prize device 37 and when a prize is generated in the second start winning opening 97, or only one of the effects may be performed. In addition, a special figure 2 variable display game based on winning in the normal variable winning device 37 and a special figure 2 variable display game based on winning in the second starting winning opening 97, and a manner of selecting an effect execution mode and a variation pattern And so on.

  In addition, the lottery of the ordinary figure change display game may be performed during the ending of the big hit. By doing in this way, the first specific game state after the big hit can be started from the second zone, if the fluctuation of the loss can be subtracted in the lottery of the ordinary figure fluctuation display game during the ending. In addition, the ending of the jackpot may be made longer than the ending of the regular jackpot to secure a period in which the lottery of the normal figure change display game is enabled. Further, when a lottery of the ordinary figure change display game is performed during the ending of the probability change big hit, an effect relating to the lottery result may be performed during the ending.

  As described above, the game is provided based on the winning of the game ball into the starting winning opening provided in the game area 32, provided with the game area 32 in which the game ball can flow down, and the result of the game is a special result. In such a case, a gaming machine that generates a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided with a gaming control means (gaming control device 100) for controlling the game in a comprehensive manner, and a gaming winning area is formed in the gaming area 32. A normal variable winning device 37 which can be converted into a closed state where a ball cannot be won and an open state where a game ball can be easily won, and a second starting winning port 97 serving as a starting winning port, are provided with a normal variable winning. The device 37 and the second starting winning opening 97 are arranged on the same game ball flowing path so as to be able to aim at the same time, and the game control means includes the first zone and the normally variable winning device 37 more than the first zone. 2nd zone where it is easy for the water to flow downstream , And thus it is possible to switch on the basis of the the establishment of a predetermined condition. Therefore, even in the gaming state (specific gaming state), which is the first operation state, it is possible to prevent the game from being changed and becoming a monotonous game, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, the second zone has a larger number of gaming balls flowing down the downstream side of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 than the first zone. In the second zone, it is more difficult to win the normal variable winning device 37 than in the first zone.

  Further, the game control means executes a general-floor variation display game in which the identification information is fluctuated and displayed for a predetermined fluctuating time based on establishment of a predetermined start condition and then stopped, and a result of the general-figure fluctuating display game is determined as a specific result. The normal fluctuation winning device is configured to be changed from the closed state to the open state in the case where the fluctuation time of the general fluctuation display game in the second zone is longer than the fluctuation time of the general fluctuation display game in the first zone. It means that it was made longer. Therefore, it is possible to lengthen the period during which the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is in the closed state in the second zone, and to make it easier to flow downstream from the first zone.

  Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine as described in the above-described embodiment as a gaming machine, but includes, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, and the like. The present invention is applicable to all gaming machines that use the game ball. Further, the present invention can be applied to a slot machine. The slot machine is not limited to a slot machine using medals, and includes, for example, all slot machines such as slot machines using gaming balls. Further, the configurations of the above-described modified examples can be appropriately combined and applied.

  The embodiments disclosed this time are to be considered in all respects as illustrative and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

10 gaming machine 32 gaming area 36 first start winning opening (start winning opening)
37 Ordinary variable winning device (Start winning port)
97 2nd start winning opening (starting winning opening)
100 game control device (game control means)

Claims (3)

A game area is provided in which a game ball can flow down, and a game is executed based on a prize of a game ball to a start winning port provided in the game area, and when a result of the game is a special result, In gaming machines that generate advantageous special gaming states,
Game control means for controlling the game overall,
The game area,
It is provided with a game area on one side and a game area on the other side, and the player adjusts the firing force of the game ball to allow the game ball to flow down to one of the one game area and the other game area. Is configured to be selectable,
A first starting winning opening that forms the starting winning opening in the one side game area;
The other-side game area comprises the start winning opening, a game ball includes a normal variable winning device that can be converted into a closed state where a game ball cannot be won, and an open state where a game ball can be easily won,
A second starting winning opening that forms the starting winning opening on the other side of the game area and downstream of the normal variable winning device;
The game control means,
Executing a first game as the game based on winning of a game ball to the first starting winning opening,
A gaming machine, wherein a second game is executed as the game based on a winning of a game ball to the second starting winning port or the normal variable winning device. The game control means,
One game state can be set from among a plurality of game states, and the game state is shifted based on a predetermined shift condition being satisfied,
For each of the game states, it is determined in advance which of the first game and the second game is to be mainly used for the game,
The operating state of the ordinary variable prize device can be set to one of a first operating state and a second operating state in which a prize is easier to win than the first operating state, according to the gaming state,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming state mainly based on the second game includes a gaming state in which the first operating state is set and a gaming state in which the second operating state is set. . A special variable winning device that enables a winning of a game ball when the special game state occurs is provided downstream of the second starting winning port,
The special result includes a first special result and a second special result,
The game control means,
The probability that the result of the game will be the first special result is the same probability in the first game and the second game, and is one of a low probability state and a high probability state higher than the low probability state. Crab can be set,
The probability that the result of the game is the second special result is the same probability regardless of the low probability state and the high probability state,
The variable time of the second game is shorter in a gaming state in which a game mainly proceeds with the second game than in a gaming state in which a game mainly progresses with the first game. Item 3. The gaming machine according to Item 2.